InteliMains-NT

Mains Circuit Breaker and

Master Generator Circuit
Breaker Applications

SW version 3.8.0
1 Document information 5
2 System overview 10
3 Installation and wiring 14
4 Controller setup 32
5 Appendix 188

Copyright © 2019 ComAp a.s.

Written by Vladimír Zubák
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., U Uranie 1612/14a,
170 00 Prague 7, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: info@comap-control.com, www.comap-control.com Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 5
1.1 Clarification of notation 5
1.2 About this guide 5
1.3 Legal notice 5
1.4 Document history 7
1.5 Symbols in this manual 8
1.6 Firmware and Archives 9
1.6.1 BaseBox type controllers 9
1.6.2 Graphical Character type controllers 9

2 System overview 10
2.1 General description 10
2.2 Configurability and monitoring 11
2.2.1 GenConfig 12
2.2.2 InteliMonitor 12
2.2.3 WinScope 12
2.2.4 WebSupervisor 13

3 Installation and wiring 14

3.1 General 15
3.1.1 Wiring 16
3.1.2 Grounding 16
3.1.3 Power supply 16
3.1.4 Power supply fusing 17
3.1.5 Voltage and current inputs 17
3.2 IM-NT Installation instructions 18
3.2.1 Mounting 19
3.2.2 Terminal diagram, Dimensions 20
3.2.3 Package contents 21
3.2.4 Jumper settings 21
3.3 IM-NT-BB and IM-NTC-BB Installation instructions 21
3.3.1 Mounting 22
3.3.2 Terminal diagram, Dimensions 24
3.3.3 Package contents 24
3.3.4 Jumper settings 25
3.4 Binary Input wiring 25
3.5 Binary Output wiring 26

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 2

 3.5.1 IM-NT 26
3.5.2 IM-NT-BB and IM-NTC-BB 26
3.6 Analog Input and Output wiring 27
3.7 CAN and RS485 bus wiring 29
3.7.1 Wiring examples 30

4 Controller setup 32
4.1 Connection to a controller using PC 32
4.1.1 Direct connection 32
4.1.2 Modem connection 33
4.1.3 Internet connection 34
4.1.4 Airgate connection 35
4.1.5 Connection to multiple controllers 35
4.2 Modification of configuration, setpoints etc 36
4.3 Programming of a controller 37
4.3.1 Standard programming 37
4.3.2 Programming of non-responsive controller 38
4.4 Changing the language 40
4.4.1 Selection of the language in InteliMains-NT GC 40
4.4.2 Selection of the language in InteliMains-NT(C)-BaseBox 41
4.5 Password management 41
4.5.1 User administration 41
4.5.2 Access group setting in GenConfig 42
4.5.3 Password break protection 43
4.6 Related tools 44
4.7 Operator Guide 45
4.7.1 IM-NT 45
4.7.2 Systems with InteliVision displays 46
4.7.3 Protections and Alarm management 47
4.7.4 MGCB/MCB fail detection 55
4.7.5 Controller operation states 61
4.8 Functions 63
4.8.1 Overview 63
4.8.2 Modes 77
4.8.3 Process Limitation 81
4.8.4 System start 87
4.8.5 StartUpSynchronization 88
4.8.6 Power management 88
4.8.7 Remote Alarm Messaging 120
4.8.8 Controller Redundancy 121

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 3

 4.8.9 System load control modes 122
4.8.10 Managing system load control modes 126
4.8.11 System PF control modes 131
4.8.12 Grid Codes specific functions 133
4.8.13 Automatic Mains Failure function 165
4.8.14 Regulation loops 167
4.8.15 Force value – step by step guide 169
4.8.16 Values for continuous writing from external sources 171
4.8.17 General Purpose Timers 172
4.8.18 History Related functions 173
4.8.19 User Buttons 175
4.8.20 Remote Control Function 176
4.8.21 Virtual Peripheral Inputs-Outputs (VPIO) module 177
4.8.22 Shared Inputs and Outputs 177
4.8.23 Distributed Binary Inputs and Outputs 179
4.8.24 MODBUS 180
4.8.25 Analog Input Sensors and User Sensors 182
4.8.26 Languages and Translator tool in GenConfig 182
4.8.27 System Start/Stop 183
4.8.28 Power Formats 183
4.8.29 Soft Unload with support of I Aux measurement 184
4.8.30 System Isolated 186
4.8.31 User Mask function 186
4.8.32 Switchable Current measurement ratio 187
4.8.33 PLC functions 187

5 Appendix 188
Controller objects 189
5.1 List of controller objects types 189
5.1.1 Setpoints 190
5.1.2 Values 388
5.1.3 Logical binary inputs 448
5.1.4 Logical binary outputs 489
5.1.5 Logical analog inputs 532

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 4

1 Document information
1.1 Clarification of notation 5
1.2 About this guide 5
1.3 Legal notice 5
1.4 Document history 7
1.5 Symbols in this manual 8
1.6 Firmware and Archives 9

1.1 Clarification of notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls readers attention to a notice or related theme.

IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.

Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.

1.2 About this guide

Pressing F1 in the GenConfig and InteliMonitor setpoint, values or configuration window will open the help with
the context of currently selected setpoint, value and binary input or output function.

1.3 Legal notice

This End User's Guide/Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product and
may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the “END USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS – COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE” (License Agreement) and/or in
the “ComAp a.s. Global terms and conditions for sale of Products and provision of Services” (Terms) and/or in
the “Standardní podmínky projektů komplexního řešení ke smlouvě o dílo, Standard Conditions for Supply of
Complete Solutions” (Conditions) as applicable.
ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Civil Code 89/2012 Col., by the Authorship Act
121/2000 Col., by international treaties and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the
intellectual properties (TRIPS).
The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide/Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any other
purpose.
Official version of the ComAp’s End User's Guide/Manual is the version published in English. ComAp reserves
the right to update this End User's Guide/Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any responsibility for its
use outside of the scope of the Terms or the Conditions and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide/Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide/Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly prohibited!

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 5

 Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content, trustworthiness and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End
User's Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such translation. The terms and conditions of such verification
must be agreed in the written form and in advance.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s License
Agreement, Terms and Conditions available on www.comap-control.com.
Security Risk Disclaimer
Pay attention to the following recommendations and measures to increase the level of security of ComAp
products and services.
Please note that possible cyber-attacks cannot be fully avoided by the below mentioned recommendations and
set of measures already performed by ComAp, but by following them the cyber-attacks can be considerably
reduced and thereby to reduce the risk of damage. ComAp does not take any responsibility for the actions of
persons responsible for cyber-attacks, nor for any damage caused by the cyber-attack. However, ComAp is
prepared to provide technical support to resolve problems arising from such actions, including but not limited to
restoring settings prior to the cyber-attacks, backing up data, recommending other preventive measures against
any further attacks.
Warning: Some forms of technical support may be provided against payment. There is no legal or factual
entitlement for technical services provided in connection to resolving problems arising from cyber-attack or
other unauthorized accesses to ComAp's Products or Services.
General security recommendations and set of measures
1. AccessCode
• Change the AccessCode BEFORE the device is connected to a network.
• Use a secure AccessCode – ideally a random string of 8 characters containing lowercase, uppercase letters
and digits.
• For each device use a different AccessCode.
2. Password
• Change the password BEFORE the device enters a regular operation.
• Do not leave displays or PC tools unattended if an user, especially administrator, is logged in.
3. Controller Web interface
• The controller web interface at port TCP/80 is based on http, not https, and thus it is intended to be used only
in closed private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port TCP/80 to the public Internet.
4. MODBUS/TCP
• The MODBUS/TCP protocol (port TCP/502) is an instrumentation protocol designed to exchange data
between locally connected devices like sensors, I/O modules, controllers etc. From it’s nature it does not
contain any kind of security – neither encryption nor authentication. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port TCP/502 to the public Internet.
5. SNMP
• The SNMP protocol (port UDP/161) version 1,2 is not encrypted. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port UDP/161 to the public Internet.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 6

1.4 Document history
Revision Related SW version Date Author
9 3.8.0 26.9.2019 Lubomír Brož
8 3.7.0 1.8.2019 Lubomír Brož
7 3.5.1 26.6.2019 Pavel Nepil
6 3.5.1 21.2.2019 Martin Klíma
5 3.5.1 2.8.2018 Vladimír Zubák
4 3.5.0 14.3.2017 Pavel Mareš
3 3.4.0 6.11.2015 Tomáš Vydra
2 3.3.1 4.9.2015 Tomáš Vydra
1 3.2.0 30.3.2015 Tomáš Vydra

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 7

1.5 Symbols in this manual
Resistive
Connector -
3 x Phases GSM sensor
male
RPTC
Active
GSM RS 232
current Contact
modem male
sensor

RS 232
Contactor IG-AVRi
AirGate female

Controller IG-AVRi
Starter
Alternating simplified TRANS
current
Switch -
Current
Jumper manually
Analog measuring
operated
modem
Current
Load Transformer
measuring
Battery
USB type B
Diode Mains male
Binary
output
Ethernet USB type B
Mains female
Breaker male
contact
Voltage
Ethernet Mobile
measuring
Breaker female provider
contact
Passive Wifi / WAN /
Fuel
current LAN
solenoid
Breaker sensor

Fuse Pick - up
Breaker

Fuse switch Relay coil

Breaker
Relay coil of
Generator slow-
Capacitor
operating
Generator
schematic Resistor
Coil

Grounding Resistor
Connector -
adjustable
female

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 8

1.6 Firmware and Archives
Since the version 3.0, controller firmware was differentiated for BaseBox type controllers and GC (Graphical
Character, with built-in display) controllers. These firmwares are compatible but their functions differ slightly. It
is not possible to upload BaseBox type firmware to GC controller and vice versa.

1.6.1 BaseBox type controllers

InteliMains-NT-BaseBox and InteliMains-NT-BaseBox

The firmware for these controllers has specific functions available which are not available in Graphical
Character type controllers. The list of BaseBox-exclusive function is as follows:
Peak Shaving based on kVA
Distributed Binary Inputs and Outputs
User Modbus

1.6.2 Graphical Character type controllers

InteliMains-NT-GC

The firmware for GC controllers do not support functions described above, although it can still be used in
combination with BaseBox type controllers.
Note: It is possible to use specialized InteliMains-NT firmware for InteliSys controllers. This firmware supports
all the functions mentioned above.

6 back to Document information

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 9

2 System overview
2.1 General description 10
2.2 Configurability and monitoring 11

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

InteliMains-NT controller is comprehensive mains supervision controller for multiple generating sets operating in
parallel to the Mains. A modular construction allows upgrades to different levels of complexity in order to provide
the best solution for various customer applications.
NT Family controllers are equipped with a powerful graphic display showing icons, symbols and bargraphs for
intuitive operation, which sets, together with high functionality, new standards in Gen-set controls.
BaseBox versions of InteliMains controllers are now available. This version features controller without built-in
monochromatic display and can be combined with new and powerful display units InteliVision 8, InteliVision 5
and InteliVision 12Touch. For more information on these products, please go to ComAp web pages.
The controller automatically connects the group of gen-sets to the Mains. It features mains failure detection
using integrated Mains protections, MCB and MGCB synchronization, configuration level switches based on
Mains import or object consumption.
The controller provides easy-to-use operation and installation. Predefined configurations for typical applications
are available as well as user-defined configurations for special applications.
Note: In versions below 2.6 the IM-NT controller does not accept an external bus supply (bus supply which is
not controlled by a ComAp controller).
Gen-sets have to be in AUT mode to ensure proper MGCB function.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 10

 The key features are:
Automatic gen-set start when the mains fails (BI SYS START/STOP is closed)
MCB controlled by InteliMainsNT
Break transfer on mains failure
MCB synchronizing after mains return
Power management (load dependent start and stop)
Gen-set priority can be defined manually or automatically based on running hours equalization or load
demand (most efficient combination)
Load sharing and VAR sharing
Gen-sets soft loading and unloading
Voltage matching
Reverse power protection
Full PLC logic included
Support of redundancy controller
MGCB support
Group Link function
Active calls and SMS

2.2 Configurability and monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system’s high level of adaptability to the needs of each individual
application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the powerful
ComAp PC/mobile tools.
Supported configuration and monitoring tools:
GenConfig (page 12) – complete configuration and firmware upgrade
InteliMonitor (page 12) – multiple site monitoring and setpoint setting
WinScope (page 12)– special graphical monitoring software
WebSupervisor (page 13) – web-based system for monitoring and controlling
WebSupervisor mobile – supporting application for smartphones

Note: Use the GenConfig PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 11

2.2.1 GenConfig
Configuration and monitoring tool for InteliMains-NT, InteliGenNT and other controllers.

Functions provided by GenConfig

Direct, modem or internet communication with the controller
Offline or online controller configuration
Controller firmware upgrade
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Binary/Analog Inputs and Outputs logical functions adjustments
Exporting data into a XLS file
Controller language translation
Screen Editor for editing InteliVision 5 a 8 screens
PLC Editor for editing built-in PLC functions
Updating and configuration of InteliVision 8 firmware
User Protections, User sensor curves, password protection and
history management

2.2.2 InteliMonitor
PC Monitoring tool for Inteli controllers.

Functions provided by InteliMonitor

Online monitoring of a controller or whole site

Fully customizable SCADA diagram
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records

2.2.3 WinScope
Special graphical controller monitoring software.

Functions provided by WinScope

Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s parameters and

values
View of actual/historic trends in controller
On-line change of controllers’ parameters for easy regulator
setup

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 12

2.2.4 WebSupervisor
Web-based system for monitoring and controlling ComAp controllers.

Functions provided by WebSupervisor

Site and fleet monitoring
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
On-line notification of alarms
E-mail notification
Also available as a smartphone application
6 back to System overview

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 13

3 Installation and wiring
3.1 General 15
3.2 IM-NT Installation instructions 18
3.3 IM-NT-BB and IM-NTC-BB Installation instructions 21
3.4 Binary Input wiring 25
3.5 Binary Output wiring 26
3.6 Analog Input and Output wiring 27
3.7 CAN and RS485 bus wiring 29

6 back to Table of contents

There are currently three HW versions of InteliMains-NT controller. Please refer to the corresponding portion of
this chapter for installation instruction for your particular controller type. Chapters relevant for both HW
configurations are marked as “(general)”.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 14

3.1 General
Controller type Hardware features
6 Binary Outputs
6 Binary Inputs
Mains and Bus Voltage measurement (3-phase)
Mains Current measurement (3-phase)
Auxiliary Current measurement (1-phase)
RS485 Communication port for universal use
RS232 Communication port
CAN1 Communication port (for extension modules)
CAN2 Communication port (for intercontroller communication and
monitoring)
12 Binary Outputs
12 Binary Inputs
3 Analog Inputs
1 Analog Outpuz
Mains and Bus Voltage measurement (3-phase)
Mains Current measurement (3-phase)
Auxiliary Current measurement (1-phase)
RS485 Communication port dedicated for display
RS232 Communication port
CAN1 Communication port (for extension modules)
CAN2 Communication port (for intercontroller communication and
monitoring)
12 Binary Outputs
12 Binary Inputs
3 Analog Inputs
1 Analog Output
Mains and Bus Voltage measurement (3-phase)
Mains Current measurement (3-phase)
Auxiliary Current measurement (1-phase)
RS485 Communication port dedicated for display
RS485 Communication port for universal use with galvanic
separation
RS232 Communication port
CAN1 Communication port (for extension modules)
CAN2 Communication port (for intercontroller communication and
monitoring)

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 15

 Controller type Hardware features
USB Communication port
RJ45 (Ethernet) Communication port

3.1.1 Wiring
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when the length is more than 3 m.
Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Mains(Bus) Voltage, Generator Voltage a Current terminals
Specified tightening torque is 0.56 Nm (5.0 In-lb)
Use only diameter 2.0-0.5 mm (12-26AWG) conductor, rated for 90 °C minimum.
For other controller field wiring terminals
Specified tightening torque 0.79 Nm (7.0 In-lb)
Use only diameter 2.0-0.5 mm (12-26 AWG) conductor, rated for 75 °C minimum.
Use copper conductors only.

3.1.2 Grounding
The shortest possible piece of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min. 2.5 mm2. A brass
M4x10 screw with star washer securing ring type grounding terminal shall be used.
The negative “-” battery terminal must be properly grounded.
IMPORTANT: Switchboard and engine must be grounded at a common point. Use as short a cable
as possible to the grounding point.

3.1.3 Power supply

To ensure proper function:
Use power supply cable min. 2.5 mm2
Use fuse
1 amp for InteliMains-NT
2 amps for IM-NT-BB or IM-NTC-BB
Maximal continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V DC.

IMPORTANT: Switchboard lightning strikes protection according standard regulation is expected!!!

The maximum allowable current through the controller negative terminal is 3 to 8 A (depends on
the controller type and binary output load).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 16

3.1.4 Power supply fusing

Always use according fuse (1Amp or

2Amps) when connection controller,
extension modules or relays to a power
source.

3.1.5 Voltage and current inputs

IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals
under voltage! Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.

IMPORTANT: Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is
closed!!! Open the primary circuit first!

Use 1.5 mm2 cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm2 for current transformers connection.
Adjust nominal voltage, nominal current, CT ratio and PT ratio by appropriate setpoints in the Basic Settings
group.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 17

 Image 3.1 Voltage measurement wiring

Image 3.2 Current measurement wiring

IMPORTANT: Check measurement connections carefully! Failure is possible if phases are

connected in wrong order (WrongPhSequence detected by the controller) but this is not detected if
the phases are just rotated (i.e. instead of phase sequence L1, L2, L3, phase sequence is e.g. L2,
L3, L1.

3.2 IM-NT Installation instructions

This portion of Instalation instructions is dedicated to the InteliMains-NT-

GC controller with built-in display. If you have BaseBox type of the
controller (without the built-in display), please refer to the section 3.2.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 18

3.2.1 Mounting

Prepare the screw holders Locate four sockets for screw holders

Insert the unit into cut-out in a switchboard and insert all

Tighten as required to fix the controller in the position
four screw holders accordingly to their positions

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 19

3.2.2 Terminal diagram, Dimensions

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 20

3.2.3 Package contents
The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks

3.2.4 Jumper settings

There are several jumpers available on the unit. Their location and purpose is described below.

Use boot jumper if controller is not responding to communication (e.g. due to faulty programming sequence).
Take off the rubber cover using screwdriver to access boot jumper next to dongle slot.
Use 120 Ω terminators at the end of CAN1, CAN2 or RS485 buses. Do not use these terminators on units that
are not terminating the bus.
Use pull up and pull down resistors on RS485 to bias the line when no device is active on the bus to prevent
noise from undriven line to be interpreted as data.

3.3 IM-NT-BB and IM-NTC-BB Installation

instructions

This portion of Installation instructions is dedicated to the InteliMains-NT-

BaseBox and InteliMains-NT-NTC-BaseBox controllers without built-in display.
If you have version with built-in display of the controller, please refer to the
section 3.1.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 21

3.3.1 Mounting
BaseBox units are prepared for mounting on DIN rain mount (35 mm).

Make sure both holders are in open position (right

Locate two plastic holders on the back side of the
image). If not (left image) open them by pulling them
controller
slightly out

Mount the unit on the DIN rail and secure by pressing

two plastic holder until they click and fix the unit into
position

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 22

BaseBox units may also be mounted on InteliVision 5 and together with it mounted into cut-out in a
switchboard.

Use the rail provided on the back side of InteliVision 5 and

Mount InteliVision 5 into the switchboard cut-out (for mount the controller to it while following the same steps
more information on InteliVision 5 mounting please when mounting on standard rail (rail openings on
refer to the InteliVision 5 Global Guide) InteliVision 5 are fixed so there is only one possible way
how to mount the controller to it)

Insert provided screws and use them to secure the

Locate four screw holes on the front of the controller controller mounted to InteliVision 5 (screws fit into
InteliVision 5 holder pieces)

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 23

3.3.2 Terminal diagram, Dimensions

3.3.3 Package contents

The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 24

3.3.4 Jumper settings
There are several jumpers available on the unit. Their location and purpose is described below:

Use boot jumper if controller is not responding to communication (e.g. due to faulty programming sequence).
Take off the rubber cover using screwdriver to access boot jumper next to dongle slot.
Use 120 Ω terminators at the end of CAN1, CAN2 or RS485 buses. Do not use these terminators on units that
are not terminating the bus.
Use pull up and pull down resistors on RS485 to bias the line when no device is active on the bus to prevent
noise from undriven line to be interpreted as data.

3.4 Binary Input wiring

Use min. 1 mm2 cables for wiring of binary inputs.

Note: The name and function or alarm type for each binary input
have to be assigned during the configuration. Binary inputs may be
used in built-in PLC as well. Please refer to the manual of GenConfig
for more information.

It is recommended to use separation diodes when multiple binary input

terminals are connected together to prevent unwanted activation of
binary input when one of the controllers is switched off.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 25

3.5 Binary Output wiring
3.5.1 IM-NT

This portion of Installation instructions is dedicated to the InteliMains-

NT-NT-GC controller with built-in display. If you have BaseBox type of
the controller (without the built-in display), please refer to the section
3.8.2.

Correct wiring for Binary output is shown in the diagram below. On the left +PWR BOUT is not used, on the right
+PWR BOUT is used. If Binary outputs are connected directly to the power source, additional fuse should be
used.

Note: If +PWR BOUT is used, it increases power consumption of the controller.

3.5.2 IM-NT-BB and IM-NTC-BB

This portion of Installation instructions is dedicated to the

InteliMains-NT-BaseBox and InteliMains-NT-BaseBox controllers
without built-in display. If you have version with built-in display of the
controller, please refer to the section 3.8.1.

It is possible to use binary outputs as low side switch or high side switch in BaseBox type of controller. For
correct wiring in both cases please refer to the following diagrams.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 26

 IMPORTANT: Both power supply sockets for binary outputs need to be connected to ensure proper
function of binary outputs.
Never use DC relays without protection diodes!

Low side or High side function of binary outputs can be chosen in configuration tool GenConfig in Modules tab.
This configuration is used for all binary inputs available on the controller.

3.6 Analog Input and Output wiring

This portion of Installation instructions is dedicated to the

InteliMains-NT-BaseBox and InteliMains-NT-BaseBox controllers
without built-in display. Analog inputs and output are not available in
InteliMains-NT-GC.

Note: For more information on technical data regarding supply, inputs, outputs etc. please refer to For jumper
setting of Analog inputs please refer to the section 3.2.4 Jumper settings.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 27

 Resistive sensor with grounding on Analog input 3
and Analog output wiring. Note, that battery
Resistive sensor on Analog input 3 and Analog output wiring
should be also grounded to common ground in all
cases!

Passive Current sensor on Analog input 3 and Active Current

Voltage sensors on Analog input 1 and 3
sensor on Analog input 2
Tristate sensor (binary sensor with fail detection) on Analog input 3
Below 750 Ω = Inactive
Between 750 Ω and 2400 Ω = Active
Below 10 Ω or Over 2400 Ω = sensor failure (wire shorted or interrupted)

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 28

3.7 CAN and RS485 bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules
are observed:
The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps, which
is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules, ECU) and CAN2 bus if it is switched to 32C mode, the
maximum length is 200 m. If the CAN2 bus is switched to 8C mode the speed is 50 kbps and the maximum
length is 800 m.
The maximum length of the RS485 bus is 1000 m
The bus (CAN and RS485) must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are
allowed except on the controller terminals.
Note: A termination resistors at the CAN and RS485 are already implemented on the PCB. For
connecting, close the jumper near the appropriate CAN or RS485 terminal.

Use a cable with following parameters:

Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥75 % (delay ≤4.4 ns/m)
Wire crosscut ≥0.25 mm2
Attenuation (@1 MHz) ≤2 dB / 100 m

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 29

 Image 3.3 CAN and RS485 BUS topology

Note: See the website www.can-cia.org for information about the CAN bus, specifications, etc.

3.7.1 Wiring examples

1. For shorter distances (all network components within one room) – picture 1 interconnect A and B; shielding
connect to PE on controller side
2. For longer distances (connection between rooms within one building) – picture 2 interconnect A, B, COM;
shielding connect to PE at one point
3. In case of surge hazard (connection out of building in case of storm etc.) – picture 3
We recommend using the following protections:
Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-BE (base element)(or
MT-RS485-TTL)
Saltek (http://www.saltek.eu): DM-006/2 R DJ
Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com)
1. For shorter distances: 3105A Paired – EIA Industrial RS485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors)
2. For shorter distances: 3105A Paired – EIA Industrial RS485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors)
3. In case of surge hazard: 3106A Paired – EIA Industrial RS485 PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 30

 Image 3.4 Shorter distances (all network components within one room)

Image 3.5 Longer distances (connection between rooms within one building)

Image 3.6 Surge hazard (connection out of building in case of storm etc.)

6 back to Installation and wiring

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 31

4 Controller setup
4.1 Connection to a controller using PC 32
4.2 Modification of configuration, setpoints etc 36
4.3 Programming of a controller 37
4.4 Changing the language 40
4.5 Password management 41
4.6 Related tools 44
4.7 Operator Guide 45
4.8 Functions 63

6 back to Table of contents

In this section brief introduction is presented how to
Connect to a controller,
Modify various settings,
Program controller and reprogram non-responsive controller,
Manage passwords and password protections and
Operate related tools (ScreenEditor, PLC Editor etc.).
is presented.

4.1 Connection to a controller using PC

There are several available ways to connect to controller using PC for monitoring, control or
configuration/programming. For more information on related PC tools see Configurability and monitoring on
page 11.

4.1.1 Direct connection

A direct connection can be realized by RS232 connection or USB connection (available on NTC BaseBox only).
Figures below illustrate the connection setting in GenConfig and InteliMonitor.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 32

 Image 4.1 GenConfig
Image 4.2 InteliMonitor

Select according COM port, adjust CAN address and enter password (optional for locked configuration).

4.1.2 Modem connection

A modem connection can be realized by suitable modem connected to the controller. Figures below illustrate the
connection setting in GenConfig and InteliMonitor.

Image 4.3 GenConfig Image 4.4 InteliMonitor

Select connected modem, adjust Phone number and enter CAN address and enter correct Access Code for
remote connection. Enter password (optional for locked configuration).
It is possible to adjust number of rings before the controller accepts the connection from modem – use Comms
settings:NumberRings AA.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 33

4.1.3 Internet connection
Internet (Ethernet) connection can be used directly in NTC BaseBox version of the controller. For connection to
other versions, use InteliBridge-NT device. Figures below illustrate the connection setting in GenConfig and
InteliMonitor.

Image 4.5 GenConfig Image 4.6 InteliMonitor

Adjust IP address of the controller (InteliBridge-NT) you want to connect to. Select CAN address of the
controller. Enter Access Code for remote connection. Enter password (optional for locked configuration).
Note: The controller must have public IP address or it must be reachable for connection in the specific network.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 34

4.1.4 Airgate connection
AirGate connection can be used directly in NTC BaseBox version of the controller. For connection to other
versions, use InternetBridge-NT device. Figures below illustrate the connection setting in GenConfig and
InteliMonitor.

Image 4.7 GenConfig Image 4.8 InteliMonitor

Enter AirGate address of a server with AirGate service (currently airgate.comap.cz). Select CAN address of the
controller you want to connect to. Enter AirGate ID of the controller (InteliBridge-NT) you want to connect to
(AirGate ID is assigned automatically if the controller is properly connected to the Internet and corresponding
AirGate setting is enabled. You can find AirGate ID in controller values.). Enter Access Code for remote
connection. Enter password (optional for locked configuration).
Note: What is AirGate service? AirGate is a service provided for free by ComAp which allows users to connect
to controllers even though they are not assigned public IP address or if there are behind corporate firewalls.
Controller connects to the AirGate server (secure and fast server located in Central Europe) and obtains
AirGate ID (used in the connection, see above). Then it communicates with the server on a secure line and any
user that know AirGate ID and access code for that particular controller can connect from anywhere (Internet
access needed) to the controller and monitor and control it.

4.1.5 Connection to multiple controllers

Connection to multiple controller is available in InteliMonitor. It is possible to connect to multiple controller using
Direct connection to I-LB+, using Internet connection to NTC BaseBox controllers or to InteliBridge-NT, using
modem connection capable of multiple connections or AirGate connection to multiple NTC BaseBox controllers
or to InteliBridge-NT.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 35

 Image 4.9 Direct multiple connection

Image 4.10 Internet multiple connection (use InternetBridge-NT IPs for connection to NTC
BaseBox controllers as well)

Image 4.11 AirGate multiple connection (fill in AirGate IDs for each controller, when using
InteliBridge-NT fill in InteliBridge-NT AirGate ID for each controller)

4.2 Modification of configuration, setpoints etc

For full configuration of controller configuration use GenConfig. You may open archive prepared for specific
application and upload it to the controller. You may also change:
Controller type (Modules tab)
Extension modules (Modules tab)
Binary Input and Output logical functions and protections (I/O tab)
Analog input sensor type, logical functions and protections (I/O tab)
Analog output function, conversion, normalization, resolution (I/O tab)
Setpoints and password level for particular setpoint (Setpoints tab)
Commands password protection (Commands tab)

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 36

 Prepare custom protections (Protections tab)
Modify History data selection (History tab)
Prepare custom user sensor characteristics (User Sensor tab)
Modify languages settings (Languages tab)
Translate corresponding names to other language prepared in Languages tab (Translator tab)
Prepare complex logical functions with built-in PLC functions (PLC Editor tab)
Modify screens for InteliVision 5 and 8 (ScreenEditor tab)
Review and modify assigned logical binary functions (LBI tab)
Review and modify assigned logical analog functions (LAI tab)
Select power format, rename Pulse counters and Remote switches (Miscellaneous tab)

IMPORTANT: Do not forget that changes in GenConfig are not sent to the controller unless you
write them to the controller.

In InteliMonitor it is possible to configure:

Setpoints (multiple setpoint configuration in several controllers at once)
Set/Reset statistics
Administrate users and their rights

IMPORTANT: Do not forget that all changes in InteliMonitor are sent to the connected controller
and controller immediately acts on it. Do not change CAN address of the controller or connection
is lost and need to be re-established with new CAN address.

4.3 Programming of a controller

4.3.1 Standard programming
For programming GenConfig is used. Select correct connection mode and then select the following option:

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 37

 You may use “FW upgrade (from default configuration)” (this will overwrite all of the settings in the controller with
default settings. If you need to upgrade firmware from existing configuration, select “FW upgrade (from existing
configuration)”. This function will automatically open wizard which will help you update the existing configuration
to be compatible with the newly selected firmware.

4.3.2 Programming of non-responsive controller

If the controller does not contain valid firmware, new firmware cannot be programmed in the standard way. This
situation can occur if the connection between the PC and the controller was interrupted e.g. during a previous
firmware upgrade. In such case the controller may have a blank display or connection to InteliVision may not be
established and it does not communicate with the PC. The bootjumper must be used to get valid firmware into
the controller.
Connect proper cable for programming (use RS232 port).
Open GenConfig and select “FW upgrade (default configuration)”
From the following table select FW that is required or click open and browse your files to find firmware in
non-default location

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 38

 Click OK
Wait until the connection times out and following dialog appears

Follow the instructions and then click OK (information regarding the location of boot jumper can be found in
section 3.1.4 (IM-NT GC) or 3.2.4 (IM-NT-BB and IM-NTC-BB)
Programming starts momentarily
When the programming is done following dialog appears

Follow the instructions and press OK. Following diagram will appear and programming is done

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 39

 Additional dialog warns you that the setpoints may have improper values. Change the configuration in
normal way.

4.4 Changing the language

There is step-by-step guide in GenConfig help available for the Languages and Translator tabs which contains
all the information on how to prepare new languages in the configuration (press F1 in Languages or Translator
tab or go to Help->GenConfig Help and locate corresponding chapters).

4.4.1 Selection of the language in InteliMains-NT GC

This portion of instructions is dedicated to the InteliMains-NT-GC

controller with built-in display. If you have BaseBox type of the
controller (without the built-in display), please refer to the section
4.4.2.

Selection of the language can be either done by Binary Input selection (please refer to the section Functions
description) or by selecting the language through the menu of built-in display. To select the language go to main
menu and scroll down. Select “Languages” by pressing Enter. There is complete selection of languages
configured in the controller. Using arrows select the preferred language and press Enter to confirm. Display
reboots (controller itself remains fully functional) and new language is used.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 40

 Note: If you need to use graphical language you may need to upload correct set of characters into the controller.
By default Chinese character set is uploaded in the controller. If you need to use for example Korean characters
(Hangul), in GenConfig select following menu while connected to the controller: File -> Firmware upgrade and
Cloning -> Display GC font change / FW upgrade. GenConfig connects to the controller and new fonts may be
uploaded to the controller as well as new firmware for the built-in display.

Note: If you are using InteliVision 5, InteliVision 8 or InteliVision 17Touch with the GC type of the controller
please refer also to the chapter 4.4.2 for more information on how to change language in the InteliVision.

4.4.2 Selection of the language in InteliMains-NT(C)-BaseBox

This portion of instructions is dedicated to the InteliMains-NT-

BaseBox and InteliMains-NT-BaseBox controllers without built-in
display. If you have version with built-in display of the controller,
please refer to the section 4.4.2.

If using BaseBox version of the controller you may use InteliVision 5, InteliVision 8 or InteliVision 17Touch. If
you need to use for some reason IG or IS-Display please refer to the chapter 4.4.1 for the instructions regarding
built-in display which works the same as the external displays.
For InteliVision 5 an 8 go to main menu and select Help / Others and Languages. Scroll up and down and select
preferred language. Confirm by pressing enter.
If you are using InteliVision 17Touch, it is running standard InteliMonitor software. Please refer to the manual of
InteliMonitor how to change fonts in InteliMonitor and in custom SCADA.
Note: you need to use graphical language you may need to upload correct set of characters into the InteliVision
via controller. By default Chinese character set is uploaded in the controller. If you need to use for example
Korean characters (Hangul), in GenConfig select following menu while connected to the controller: File ->
Firmware upgrade and Cloning -> Display GC font change / FW upgrade. GenConfig connects to the controller
and new fonts may be uploaded to the controller as well as new firmware for the built-in display.

4.5 Password management

Password management requires InteliMonitor for user names, passwords and rights modification. It also
requires GenConfig for assigning corresponding setpoints and command to correct right groups.

4.5.1 User administration

User administration is available only when logged in as an Administrator. Once logged in select “Admin users…”
as shown on the right.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 41

 Following dialog is displayed:

Enable or disable users. Change user names and by double clicking change the access groups that are
accessible by particular user. Hold CTRL and click separate access groups to select only several of them with
no access to lower groups.
Log in as a different user to change password for that particular user.
Note: Newly enabled user has always default password “0”.

4.5.2 Access group setting in GenConfig

To assign particular setpoint to access group use the following function in GenConfig (by clicking select the
correct access group).

Note: Each setpoint may be assigned to only one access group. This setpoint can be changed by all users with
activated corresponding access rights.

To assign particular command to access group use the following function in GenConfig (by clicking select the
correct access group).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 42

 Note: Each command may be assigned to only one access group. This command can be used by all users with
activated corresponding access rights.

4.5.3 Password break protection

Password break protection (PBP) can be adjusted to ENABLED or DISABLED by a tick box in password
management in InteliMonitor (see the figure below). Default value is ENABLED.
Warning “PassInsertBlck” is displayed in alarm list during the blocking period.
Controller does not accept attempts to insert correct or incorrect password during the blocking period. In
case of this attempt there is a message displayed in InteliMonitor, GenConfig and InteliVision 5 and 8 which
states the remaining time of blocking.
Controller is blocked for 5 minutes if there were 6 attempts to insert incorrect password. In case of another six
failed attempts (after the period of blocking elapses) the blocking period is 30, 60, 120 and 240 minutes long
respectively.
History record “Incorrect password” is written after the 6th failed attempt to enter password (i.e. this record is
written once the PBP is activated). During the blocking no history records of inserting incorrect or correct
password are written.
Entering of passwords during the blocking period does not prolong the blocking period (passwords are not
actually entered because they are rejected by the controller at all).
When the controller is switched OFF and ON again (i.e. power down and up again) during the blocking period,
the blocking period is reset back to the full length of currently active PBP (e.g. if there is 24 minutes remaining
out of 30 minutes after the controller reset there will be again 30 minutes remaining).
After the correct password is inserted the PBP blocking period for next 6 failed attempts is reverted back to 5
minutes.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 43

4.6 Related tools
There are two tools available for user regarding the configuration of the controller:
ScreenEditor – it can be used to modify screens in InteliVision 5 and 8

PLC Editor – it can be used to create and modify built-in PLC functions

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 44

 Note: For more information on ScreenEditor use help in GenConfig (Help -> ScreenEditor Help).
For more information on PLC Editor use GenConfig Reference Guide.

4.7 Operator Guide

4.7.1 IM-NT 45
4.7.2 Systems with InteliVision displays 46
4.7.3 Protections and Alarm management 47
4.7.4 MGCB/MCB fail detection 55
4.7.5 Controller operation states 61

6 back to Table of contents

4.7.1 IM-NT

This portion of instructions is dedicated to the InteliMains-NT-GC

controller with built-in display. If you have BaseBox type of the
controller (without the built-in display) or you are using also
InteliVision with InteliMains-NT-GC, please refer to the section 5.2.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 45

4.7.2 Systems with InteliVision displays

This portion of instructions is dedicated to the all three types of

controller with connected InteliVision 5 or 8. If you have InteliMains-
NT-GC and you are not using InteliVision 5 or 8 please refer to the
section 5.1.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 46

4.7.3 Protections and Alarm management

Supported protections
ComAp mains controllers provide following range of mains protections.
For each protection adjustable limit and time delay are available.

IM-NT,
ANSI Code Protection
IM-NT-BB
25 Synchronism Check •
27 Undervoltage •
32P Directional power •
37 Undercurrent •@
46 Current Unbalance •
47 Voltage Unbalance and Phase-sequence •
49T Temperature Monitoring (using configurable Analog input) •@
51 AC Inverse Time Overcurrent •
55 Power Factor •@
59 Overvoltage •
78 Vector Shift •
79 AC Reclosing •
81H Overfrequency •
81L Underfrequency •
81R ROCOF •

Note:
• - included
@ - example of protections that can be created using universal protections (it is possible to utilize controller
functions to prepare even more protections)

Protection groups

Protection Group Configurability Setpoint Group

Analog protections Configurable Analog protect
Mains protections Configurable Mains protect
Mains protect
Fixed protections Fixed
Bus protect

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 47

 Protection types

Protection Fault Reset

Level Abbreviation Controller Action Record
Type Needed
History History
1 HST none No
record only
Alarmlist
1 Alarm only Al none Yes
only
Alarmlist
1 Warning Wrn none and Yes
History
Alarmlist
1 AL indication ALI none No
only
Alarmlist
A+H
1 AHI none and No
indication
History
Controller opens MCB, no fault reset
Mains needed after alarm inactivation. History
2 MP No
protection When the breaker opens is given by the only
setpoint AMF settings:MCB open on.
Controller opens MCB, MCB cannot be
Mains
closed before alarm inactivation and Alarmlist
protection
2 MPR fault reset. and Yes
with fault
When the breaker opens is given by the History
reset
setpoint AMF settings:MCB open on.
Can be indicated when Analog input
value is ±6% out of sensor Alarmlist
X Fail sensor Fls characteristic range. Fls can optionally and Configurable
activate corresponding (e.g. Sd) Analog History
input protection as well.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 48

 Default protections in MCB/MGCB applications
Following protections are firmware based

Protection
Protection Corresponding Setpoints
Type
Mains:
IDMT Current MPR Mains protect: Mns2Inom prot;Mains2Inom del
Mains protect:Mns2POvrldProt; OverlStrtEval;
IDMT Active Power MPR
2POvrldStEvDel
Vector Shift MP Mains protect:VectorS prot; VectorS limit; Vector CB sel
ROCOF MP Mains protect:ROCOF prot; ROCOF Win, ROCOF df/dt
Mains Voltage – over and
under MP Mains protect:Mains >V MP; Mains <V MP; Mains V del
voltage in all phases
Mains Frequency – over and
MP Mains protect:Mains >f; Mains <f; Mains f del
under frequency
Average Mains Overvoltage MP Mains protect:Mains Avg>V MP
Bus:
Bus Voltage Hst Bus protect:Bus >V Hst; Bus <V Hst; Bus V del
Bus Frequency Hst Bus protect:Bus >f; Bus <f; Bus f del
Configured in Protections tab in default archive:
Mains Voltage Unbalance MP Mains protect:Mains V unbal; Mains Vunb del
Mains Current Unbalance MP Mains protect:Mains I unbal; Mains Iunb del
Bus Voltage Unbalance Hst Bus protect:Bus V unbal; Bus Vunb del
Batt <V, Batt >V Wrn Analog protect:Batt >V; Batt <V; Batt volt del

Protection
Protection Corresponding Setpoints
type
Bus left protections:
IDMT current BOR Load Protect: Load2Inom prot;Load2Inom del
Load Protect: Load2POvrldPro; OverldStrtEval;
IDMT Active power BOR
2POvrldStEvDel
Bus Left Voltage – over and under BusL protect: BusL Volt prot; BusLeft >V; BusLeft
Hst
voltage in all phases <V; BusLeft V del
Bus Left Frequency – over and under BusL protect: BusLfreq prot; BusLeft >f; BusLeft <f;
Hst
frequency BusLeft f del
Bus right protections:
Bus Right Voltage – over and under BusR protect: BusRVolt prot; BusRight >V; BusRight
Hst
voltage in all phases <V; BusRight V del
Bus Right Frequency – over and under BusR protect: BusRfreq prot; BusRight >f; BusRight
Hst
frequency <f; BusRight f del

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 49

 Protection
Protection Corresponding Setpoints
type
Configured in Protections tab in default archive:
Bus Left Voltage Unbalance Hst BusL protect: BusL V unbal; BusL V unb del
Bus Left Current Unbalance Hst BusL protect: BusL I unbal; BusL I unb del
Bus Right Voltage Unbalance Hst BusL protect: BusR V unbal; BusR V unb del
Batt <V, Batt >V Wrn Analog protect: Batt >V; Batt <V; Batt volt del

Mains voltage and frequency protections - limits and indications

IDMT Current
This protection can be activated or deactivated by the setpoint Mains protect:Mns2Inom prot. For more
information on the dynamic delay of this protection refer to the setpoint Mains protect:Mains2Inom del in the
APPENDIX of this document or in context help in GenConfig.

IDMT Active Power

This protection can be activated or deactivated by the setpoint Mains protect:Mns2POvrldProt. Mains
protect:OverldStrtEval setpoint defines when the IDMT Active Power protection starts to be evaluated. For
more information on the dynamic delay of this protection refer to the setpoint Mains protect:2POvrldStEvDel in
the APPENDIX of this document or in context help in GenConfig.

Vector Shift
This protection may be enabled, disabled or enabled in parallel operation only by the setpoint Mains
protect:VectorS Prot. Corresponding breaker that will react to this protection is determined by the setpoint
Mains protect:VS/ROCOF CB sel (MGCB application only). Triggering limit is defined by Mains protect:VectorS
limit. There are logical binary outputs VECTORSHIFTTRP and VECTORSHIFTACT which activate for 3s each
time vector shift causes corresponding breaker to trip (TRP) or when vector shift protection activates even
though the breaker is not tripped because for example the corresponding breaker for Vector Shift is already
opened or it fails to open (ACT).

ROCOF
This protection may be enabled, disabled or enabled in parallel operation only by the setpoint Mains
protect:ROCOF Prot. Corresponding breaker that will react to this protection is determined by the setpoint
Mains protect:VS/ROCOF CB sel (MGCB application only). Triggering limit is defined by Mains
protect:ROCOF df/dt. Evaluation window in number of periods is given by the setpoint Mains protect:ROCOF
Win. There are logical binary outputs ROCOFTRP and ROCOFACT which activate for 3s each time ROCOF
causes corresponding breaker to trip (TRP) or when ROCOF protection activates eventhough the breaker is not
tripped because for example the corresponding breaker for ROCOF is already opened or it fails to open (ACT).

Mains Over and Under Voltage

This protection limits are given by setpoints Mains protect:Mains >V MP, Mains protect: Mains <V MP. Delay
for over and under voltage is given by the setpoint Mains protect:Mains V del. Protection is indicated by
message “MP LX over” (X = number of corresponding phase) or “MP LX under”. When Basic
settings:FixVoltProtSel is adjusted to PHASE-PHASE then this protection is evaluated based on voltage
between phases and it is indicated by “MP LXY over” or “MP LXY under” (where XY are number of
corresponding phases).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 50

 Mains Over and Under Frequency
This protection limits are given by setpoints Mains protect:Mains >f, Mains protect: Mains <f. Delay for over and
under frequency is given by the setpoint Mains protect:Mains f del. Protection is indicated by message “MP fm
over” or “MP fm under”.

Bus voltage and frequency protections - limits and indications

Bus Over and Under Voltage
This protection limits are given by setpoints Bus protect:Bus >V, Bus protect: Bus <V. Delay for over and under
voltage is given by the setpoint Bus protect:Bus V del. Protection is indicated by message Vb LX over (X =
number of corresponding phase) or Vb LX under. When Basic settings:FixVoltProtSel is adjusted to PHASE-
PHASE then this protection is evaluated based on voltage between phases and it is indicated by “Vb LXY over”
or “Vb LXY under” (where XY are number of corresponding phases).

Bus Over and Under Frequency

This protection limits are given by setpoints Bus protect:Bus >f, Bus protect: Bus <f. Delay for over and under
frequency is given by the setpoint Bus protect:Bus f del. Protection is indicated by message “fbus fm over” or
“fbus fm under”.

User configurable protections

Controller provides vast possibilies for user configurable protections. There are several protections that
configured by default in standard configuration. There are 63 available Alarm and History messages
configurable by the user.

Configured protections by default

Mains Voltage Unbalance

This protection is by default configured as Mains protect with indication “Mains V unbal”. For more information
on this protection see the Protections tab in default archive.

Mains Current Unbalance

This protection is by default configured as Mains protect with indication “Mains I unbal”. For more information on
this protection see the Protections tab in default archive.

Bus Voltage Unbalance

This protection is by default configured as HistoryRecOnly with indication “Bus V unbal”. For more information
on this protection see the Protections tab in default archive.

Battery Over and Under Voltage

There are two protections configured by default as Warnings with indication “Batt volt”. For more information on
this protection see the Protections tab in default archive.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 51

 Configuration of User configurable protections in GenConfig
It is possible to configure protections on Binary Input, Analog Input or any value that is available in the controller.

Binary Input protection configuration

Open I/O tab in GenConfig and adjust parameters that are described below:

Analog Input protection configuration

Open I/O tab in GenConfig and adjust parameters that are described below:

Note: Fail Sensor protection (when activated) does not affect the function of the system itself. If you adjust
“Active when” to Under limit + Fls or Over limit + Fls the protection will considered the value that is out of range
(failed sensor) to be under or over limit (depending on the setting) and it will issue corresponding alarm after the
delay of the protection. This can be used for example when the function of the particular sensor connected to an
analog input is crucial for the operation of the system and its failure requires the system to be affected (open
breakers etc.).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 52

 Custom configurable protection
Open Protections tab in GenConfig and adjust parameters that are described below:

Note: You need to prepare two separate protections for level 1 and level 2.
Select the value for protection first and then use Wizard – it will take you through all the steps and help you
adjust them correctly.

Protection blocking
It is possible to block user defined protections (on binary inputs, analog inputs or any value available in the
controller).

Blocking Type Description
All the time The alarms are beeing evaluated all the time the controller is switched on.
The alarms are beeing evaluated while the input Force block 1 is not active. The
Force block 2
evaluation begins ForceBlockDel1 seconds after the input has been deactivated.
The alarms are beeing evaluated while the input Force block 2 is not active. The
Force block 3
evaluation begins ForceBlockDel2 seconds after the input has been deactivated.
The alarms are beeing evaluated while the input Force block 3 is not active. The
Force block 4
evaluation begins ForceBlockDel3 seconds after the input has been deactivated.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 53

 Reset Actual Alarms selection
It is possible to determine the behavior of alarms that are in alarm list when Fault Reset button is pressed.
Select behavior with ComProtSetting:ResetActAlarms.

Pressing of the fault reset button (at any terminal or external button) resets only inactive alarms.
Disabled Active alarms remain in the alarmlist unchanged and must be reset again when they become
inactive.
Pressing of the fault reset button (at any terminal or external button) resets all alarms that are
currently present in the alarm list. Inactive alarms disappear from the alarm list immediately,
Enabled
active alarms are changed to "confirmed" state and disappear when the alarm condition
disappear or the alarm starts to be blocked.

Note: ENABLED position corresponds to the method how the IG-classic and IS-classic controllers handled the
alarms.

Bus Measurement Error detection

InteliMains-NT is able to detect Bus Measurement Error. It is evaluated based on gen-sets and mains incomers.
GEN-SETS: If any gen-set from the logical group that is connected to the InteliMains-NT has closed breaker
and InteliMains-NT is not measuring correct values on Bus it automatically detects bus measurement error.
MAINS: If any Mains incomer is connected to the bus (provided that all corresponding Bus Tie Breakers are
closed as well) and InteliMains-NTis not measuring correct values on Bus it automatically detects bus
measurement error.

Peripheral Modules Error detection

It is possible to adjust the protection of level 1 (yellow) or level 2 (red) to any configured peripheral module. If the
controller detects that this periphery is missing it issues the corresponding alarm. In MCB/MGCB applications
Warning is issued when WARNING(YEL) option is selected and MPR (Mains Protect with Reset) is issued
when SHUTDOWN(RED) option is selected (this alarm causes MCB to open and Mains is considered as
failed, Fault Reset is required to remove this protection from the alarm list once inactive).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 54

4.7.4 MGCB/MCB fail detection
MCB fail Information
Opening of the MCB externally is allowed because external protection device may open it based on its
protections. The controller will try to reclose the breaker if Mains protect type protection is not configured
accordingly (e.g. external protection device/relay does not allow user to send this type of signal or such wiring is
impractical). After failed attempt to close the breaker, the controller issues standard alarm and in AUT mode
starts the engine and consequently closes GCB breaker.
IMPORTANT: In this case, if the supposed opening of the MCB is caused merely by MCB feedback
failure and the actual position of the MCB is still closed, the controller will close GCB to the Mains
voltage directly without synchronizing because it cannot be distinguished what exactly happened.
Should this be the case, the following solution is proposed:

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 55

 General Information
Note: In the following text, “CB” abbreviation is used for MCB or MGCB respectively.

Related binary inputs

CB FDB – CB feedback binary input.
CB FDB NEG – negative CB feedback binary input. Used for increasing the reliability of CB status
evaluated by the controller. In case that it is not configured, negative value of CB fdb is calculated internally
within the controller.
CB DISABLE – this input is used for disabling issuing of CB closing command (if CB is closed and this input
is activated CB keeps closed).

Related binary outputs

CB CLOSE/OPEN – output for circuit breaker. Equals to 1 during the time when CB is requested to be
closed.
CB ON COIL – output for closing coil of the CB. 2s pulse (5s if synchronising is not provided by the
particuilar CB) is used for closing the CB.
CB OFF COIL – output for opening coil of the CB. 2s pulse (5s if synchronising is not provided by the
particuilar CB) is used for opening the CB.
CB UV COIL – output for undervoltage coil of the CB. Permanently active, 2s negative pulse (5s if
synchronising is not provided by the particuilar CB) is used for CB opening request.
CB STATUS – output indicating CB status as evaluated by the controller. This signal is used for lighting
LEDs on the panel, switching the regulations, CB fail evaluation, etc.

Note: All pulse outputs for CB in following diagrams may be long 5s if the CB is not used for synchronization in
that particular instance.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 56

 Possible CB sequences

CB close command

Repeated CB close command

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 57

 CB fail – fdb mismatch

CB open command

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 58

 Transition closing
Transition closing -> opening (opening command is issued during closing pulse) – Left
Transition opening -> closing (closing command is issued during opening pulse) – Right

Other CB fail reasons

When the BO CB close/open is in steady state and CB feedback is changed, the CB fail is detected
immediately (no delay).

Note: This is not valid for MCB. MCB fail is not detected in this case.
This is because there can be additional device which can open the MCB if one of its protections is triggered. If
this configuration is used, binary input on the controller should be connected to the additional device and
configured to Mains Protect with according delay for proper function. Otherwise MCB opens and the controller
accepts this and no alarm is issued.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 59

 When the BO CB close/open opens, there is 5 resp. 2 sec delay for the breaker to respond before a CB fail is
detected. In such case, if CB OFF coil is used for opening the CB and CB fail occurs during opening the CB, the
signal CB OFF coil is automatically extended until the breaker opening is detected (evaluated as CB status).

In case that CB fail is detected after switching the controller on (CB is closed), the CB OFF coil output is
activated immediatelly.
IMPORTANT: In case that MCB feedback is active (MCB is expected to be closed) and “MCB fail” is
reported due to previous incorrect manipulation of MCB, in the moment of Fault reset, the MCB
fail is cleared and the controller internally goes to “closed” state. I.e. MCB fdb status is confirmed
and the output MCB close/open is energized.

Function for breaker control in AUT mode

Only in MCB application.
Using setpoint ProcessControl:BrkCtrl in AUT behavior of breaker control can be adjusted.

ProcessControl:
Controller Behavior
BrkCtrl in AUT
Breaker is controller by the controller. It is possible to fault reset (press fault reset twice)
MCB fail alarm which happened due to previous incorrect manipulation with the breaker.
NORMAL
This is possible if the breaker was closed externally and the Mains is healthy. Controller
accepts the state of the breaker and continues in normal operation.
Breaker is controlled externally and the controller does not attempt to control it nor any
alarms are issued. Synchronization process can be started by the FORCE SYNC input
if it is allowed by the setpoints ProcessControl:Synchro enable and
COX (FOLLOW) ProcessControl:ParallelEnable (Synchro enable must be set to REVERSE and
ParallelEnable must be set to ENABLED). Synchronization in COX(FOLLOW) does not
have any timeout and controller keeps voltages synchronized indefinitely (i.e. until
FORCE SYNC is opened or the breaker is closed externally).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 60

 Function for breaker control in MAN mode
Using setpoint ProcessControl:BrkCtrl in MAN behavior of breaker control can be adjusted.

ProcessControl:
Controller Behavior
BrkCtrl in MAN
Breaker is controller by the controller. It is possible to fault reset (press fault reset twice)
MCB fail alarm which happened due to previous incorrect manipulation with the breaker.
NORMAL This is possible if the breaker was closed externally and the Mains is healthy (there is no
Level 2 alarm and no alarm with MGCB). Controller accepts the state of the breaker and
continues in normal operation.
Breaker is controlled externally and by the controller as well (closing or opening of the
breaker can be done manually or can be issued by the pressing of MCB/MGCB button
on the controller). Synchronization process can be started by the FORCE SYNC input if
it is allowed by the setpoints ProcessControl:Synchro enable and
ProcessControl:ParallelEnable (Synchro enable must be set to BOTH, REVERSE
FOLLOW (MCB is not closed, MGCB is closed!), FORWARD (MGCB is not closed, MCB is
closed!) and ParallelEnable must be set to ENABLED). Synchronization in FOLLOW
does not have any timeout and controller keeps voltages synchronized indefinitely (i.e.
until FORCE SYNC is opened or the breaker is closed externally). The synchronization
can be also denied for other reasons (e.g. ProcessControl:MainsCoupling is no
enabled).

IMPORTANT: In the FOLLOW mode, the controller buttons are still active in MAN mode. Therefore
it is possible to control the breaker manually or by the pressing of corresponding button on the
controller! To ensure no injuries and/or damage always operate the breaker with extreme caution
and prevent other personell from manipulating the breaker by the controller buttons. If necessary,
use the MCB and/or MGCB DISABLE function!

4.7.5 Controller operation states

These states are given by requested breaker positions and other parameters (e.g. healthy Mains).
Controller can operate in following states:

MCB application: MCB feedback is active, all GCB feedbacks are not active, Mains
parameters are within limits
MainsOper
MGCB application: MCB feedback is active, MGCB feedback is not active, Mains
parameters are within limits
MCB application: Mains parameters are not within limits
MainsFlt
MGCB application: MGCB feedback is not active, Mains parameters are not within limits
MCB application: Mains parameters are not within limits and AMF settings:EmergStart del
elapsed
ValidFlt
MGCB application: MGCB feedback is not active, Mains parameters are not within limits
and AMF settings:EmergStart del elapsed
MCB application: MCB feedback is not active, at least one GCB feedback is active, Mains
IslOper
parameters are not within limits

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 61

 MGCB application: MCB feedback is not active, MGCB feedback is active, Mains
parameters are not within limits
MCB application: MCB feedback is not active, at least one GCB feedback is active, Mains
parameters are within limits
MainsRet
MGCB application: MCB feedback is not active, MGCB feedback is active, Mains
parameters are within limits
MCB application: MCB and all GCB feedback are not active
BrksOff
MGCB application: MCB and MGCB feedbacks are not active
MGCB application: MCB feedback is active, MGCB feedback is not active, synchronization
Synchro
is allowed and started
MCB application: MCB feedback is not active, at least one GCB feedback is active, reverse
synchronization is allowed and started
RevSync
MGCB application: MCB feedback is not active, MGCB feedback is active, reverse
synchronization is allowed and started
MCB application: MCB feedback is active, at least one GCB feedback is active
ParalOper
MGCB application: MCB and MGCB feedbacks are active
Controller is in this state if BI EMERG. MANUAL is activated. In this state controller does not
react on breaker changes and do not activate any of its binary outputs. For more information
EmergMan
please refer to EMERG. MANUAL description in the APPENDIX of this manual or see
context help in GenConfig.
Init Initialization of controller. In this state, controller is not fully functional.

6 back to Operator Guide

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 62

4.8 Functions
4.8.1 Overview 63
4.8.2 Modes 77
4.8.3 Process Limitation 81
4.8.4 System start 87
4.8.5 StartUpSynchronization 88
4.8.6 Power management 88
4.8.7 Remote Alarm Messaging 120
4.8.8 Controller Redundancy 121
4.8.9 System load control modes 122
4.8.10 Managing system load control modes 126
4.8.11 System PF control modes 131
4.8.12 Grid Codes specific functions 133
4.8.13 Automatic Mains Failure function 165
4.8.14 Regulation loops 167
4.8.15 Force value – step by step guide 169
4.8.16 Values for continuous writing from external sources 171
4.8.17 General Purpose Timers 172
4.8.18 History Related functions 173
4.8.19 User Buttons 175
4.8.20 Remote Control Function 176
4.8.21 Virtual Peripheral Inputs-Outputs (VPIO) module 177
4.8.22 Shared Inputs and Outputs 177
4.8.23 Distributed Binary Inputs and Outputs 179
4.8.24 MODBUS 180
4.8.25 Analog Input Sensors and User Sensors 182
4.8.26 Languages and Translator tool in GenConfig 182
4.8.27 System Start/Stop 183
4.8.28 Power Formats 183
4.8.29 Soft Unload with support of I Aux measurement 184
4.8.30 System Isolated 186
4.8.31 User Mask function 186
4.8.32 Switchable Current measurement ratio 187
4.8.33 PLC functions 187

6 back to Table of contents

4.8.1 Overview
Note: There are numerous built-in functions in the controller that can be modified or combined to produce new
functions for specific uses. Note that it is not possible to describe all the combinations or modifications in detail
in this manual. Users are encouraged to find new way of how to use existing functions to their benefit.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 63

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
There are vast options regarding
access restrictions in the
controller. It is possible to lock:
Buttons for various
Local buttons
commands on the terminal.
ACCESSLOCK INT
External buttons for various
commands on binary inputs. ACCESSLOCK D#2
Access locking STARTBUTTON
Built-in terminal or terminal ACCESSLOCK D#3
from various MCBBUTTON
#1 to monitoring mode only. ACCESSLOCK EXT
sources MGCBBUTTON
External local terminal or FAULTRESBUTTON
terminal #2 to monitoring HORNRESBUTTON
mode only.
STOPBUTTON
All external remote
terminals (PC connection,
displays on all buses except
on RS485 dedicated port).

History record
Alarm only ActCallAttempt
Warning Acall+SMS lang
Mains protect ISSUEACTCALLC1
MainsP w/Reset ISSUEACTCALLC2
This function allows user to choose
AcallCH1-Type ISSUEACTCALLC3
under which conditions active
Active call, emailing happens, what is the type AcallCH2-Type ISSUEACTCALLC4
emailing and SMS of the message and separate AcallCH3-Type ISSUEACTCALLC5
service addresses or numbers. Learn more AcallCH4-Type SMTP authent
about these functions in a separate
AcallCH5-Type SMTP user name
chapter.
AcallCH1-Addr SMTP password
AcallCH2-Addr SMTP address
AcallCH3-Addr Contr mailbox
AcallCH4-Addr Time zone
AcallCH5-Addr
Alternative It is possible to choose two
brightness for different levels of brightness and
Alt brightness
built-in InteliGen switch them with logical binary
display input.
It is possible to leave the
Automatic CAN assignement of CAN addresses on
address controllers themselves. If the CANnegotiation
assignement function is activated controllers will
look for possible collisions of CAN

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 64

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
bus communication and they will
change their addresses
accordingly. This function need to
be activated or deactivated in all
controllers on CAN bus. It is
available only in some
applications.
It is possible to adjust timeout for
backlight of built-in display of the
Automatic display controller. When using InteliVision
DispBaklightTO
backlight timeout display the backlight timeout is
adjusted separately in the the
display.

MFStart enable
EmergStart del
FwRet break
This is a complex function that MCB close del
ensures correct reaction of the
Automatic Mains MCB opens on
system to detected Mains Failure. MGCB Close del
Failure function ReturnWithIntr
For more information please refer
to a separate chapter. BreakerOverlap
RetFromIsland
ReturnTo mains
Mains ret del
Controller automatically performs
synchronization sequence
including corresponding regulations
to achieve correct phase and
voltage on both synchronized Voltage window
sides. It possible to set phase shiftBtoM AngleReq
caused by transformers to be taken Phase window
into acount during synchronization.
Automatic Dwell time
Synchronization automatically
synchronization Sync timeout
closes corresponding breaker if the
voltages on both sides do not differ FORWARDSYNCHRO
more than Voltage window and REVERSESYNCHRO
their phases do not differ more than IN SYNCHRONISM
Phase window for time equal to
Dwell time. For regulation loops
functions please refer to a separate
chapter.
In the controller there are many Vm VT ratio MainsCTprim
Basic Voltage and
parameters that are used for
Current settings Vm InpRangeSel MainsCTsec

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 65

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
entering of nominal values of Mains
and Bus characteristics. It also
allows users to set measurement Bus VT ratio
transformers ratio and select range
BusInpRangeSel
of voltage measurement. All of
these parameters are crucial for the MainsNomV AuxCurrCTprim
right function of the controlle since MainsNomVph-ph AuxCurrCTsec
regulations, protections and other BusNomV Nominal freq
function are directly dependant of BusNomVph-ph Nom frq offset
these settings. For additional
Nomin current
information on protections please
refer to separate chapter NominMainsImp
Protections and Alarm
Management.
It is possible to change speed of
communication on CAN2 bus
CAN bus
(Intercontroller and Monitoring) to
communication CAN bus mode
lower (longer distance, limited to 8
mode
controllers) or to higher (shorter
distance, limited to 32 controllers).
MCB CLOSE/OPEN
MCB ON COIL
MCB OFF COIL
MCB UV COIL
Circuit Breaker control depends on
Circuit Breaker MCB STATUS
many various parameters. Please
control MGCB CLOSE/OPEN
refer to a separate chapter.
MGCB ON COIL
MGCB OFF COIL
MGCB UV COIL
MGCB STATUS
MGCB FEEDBACK
Lear more about circuit breaker
Circuit breaker MGCB FDB NEG
feedback sensing in a separate
feedback sensing MCB FEEDBACK
chapter.
MCB FDB NEG
It is possible to log communication
Communication
events into the controller history
log in controller LB/UART Log
(e.g. opened new communication,
history
communication closed etc.).
Controller can be switched to ControllerMode
Controller modes several modes of operation. It is REMOTE OFF
of operation possible to switch modes using REMOTE MAN
buttons on terminal, using buttons
REMOTE AUT

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 66

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
in InteliMonitor, changing of a REMOTE TEST
setpoint or activation of binary OFF MODE
inputs for remote change of the
MAN MODE
mode of operation. For more
information on modes of operation AUT MODE
please refer to a separate chapter. TEST MODE
It is possible to use redundant Watched Contr
controller which is in monitoring CTRLHEARTBEAT
Controller mode only unless the primary
CTRLHBEAT FD
Redundancy controller fails. This is a complex
function and it is described in a EMERG. MANUAL
separate chapter. CTRLHBEAT SENS
Controller detects any problems in
Detection of communication with extension
communication modules (it is possible to adjust
PeriphCommErr
error of peripheral corresponding level of protection in
modules GenConfig) and issues alarm
based on it.
This function can be used to detect
failed communication via CAN2
Detection of empty
bus. If no other controllers are CAN2emptDetect
CAN bus
found on CAN2 bus, alarm is
issued.
It is possible to disable one or both
breakers via InteliMains-NT. MGCB DISABLE
Disable Circuit Disabled circuit breaker opens (if
MCB DISABLE
breaker function previously closed) and InteliMains-
NT keeps it open under any MGCB OPEN
conditions.
Controller automatically detects
Evaluation of
possible collisions on CAN2 bus
CAN2
(e.g. same shared binary outputs SHxOcol detect
communication
are broadcasted by two controllers
collision
on one CAN bus).

It is not possible to repeatedly write ExtValue1deflt EXTVALUE1 UP

setpoints from external device ExtValue2deflt EXTVALUE2 UP
(although it is possible to ExtValue3deflt EXTVALUE3 UP
repeatedly force different values or
External values ExtValue4deflt EXTVALUE4 UP
continuously changing values into
available for ExtValue1LoLim EXTVALUE1 DOWN
setpoint because forced value is
repeated writing ExtValue2LoLim EXTVALUE2 DOWN
not stored in the memory) because
of possible memory damage. If ExtValue3LoLim EXTVALUE3 DOWN
continuous writing of some value ExtValue4LoLim EXTVALUE4 DOWN
into a setpoint from external device
ExtValue1HiLim EXTVALUE1RESET

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 67

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs

ExtValue2HiLim
is needed, External values should ExtValue3HiLim
be used and their value should be ExtValue4HiLim EXTVALUE2RESET
subsequently forced to the setpoint
ExtValue1 rate EXTVALUE3RESET
for safe operation. For detailed
guide to the usage of external value ExtValue2 rate EXTVALUE4RESET
please refer to a separate chapter. ExtValue3 rate
ExtValue4 rate

Force value 1 FORCEVALUEIN 1

Force value 2 FORCEVALUEIN 2
It is possible to force up to 16 Force value 3 FORCEVALUEIN 3
different values to one setpoint to Force value 4 FORCEVALUEIN 4
change various functions of the Force value 5 FORCEVALUEIN 5
controller. Any suitable setpoint or
Force value 6 FORCEVALUEIN 6
value can be forced into the
setpoint provided that this setpoint Force value 7 FORCEVALUEIN 7
Forcing of a value is forcable. There are 16 Force Force value 8 FORCEVALUEIN 8
to the setpoint value setpoints designed just for Force value 9 FORCEVALUEIN 9
forcing (if correct value for forcing Force value 10 FORCEVALUEIN 10
is not available in any other
Force value 11 FORCEVALUEIN 11
setpoint or value). For detailed
step-by-step instruction on how to Force value 12 FORCEVALUEIN 12
use value forcing please refer to a Force value 13 FORCEVALUEIN 13
separate chapter. Force value 14 FORCEVALUEIN 14
Force value 15 FORCEVALUEIN 15
Force value 16 FORCEVALUEIN 16
Group Link function enables
Group Link ComAp controllers to work GROUPLINK
function for independently or together
Control group
complex dependent on the state of a Bus Tie
GroupLinkLeft
installations (Bus Breaker. For more information refer
Tie Breaker) to the chapter Power GroupLinkRight
management.
It is possible to modify history
records layout and set periodic
Time stamp act
time stamping in history. Controller
has adjustable time and date Time Stamp Per
History related
setpoints (time is update each #SummerTimeMod
functions
second) and there is inbuilt #Time #Date
summer time mode function. Read
TIME STAMP ACT
about history layout modification in
separate chapter.
Internet related It is possible to connect controllers IP Addr mode

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 68

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
IP address
to Internet. AirGate function is also Net mask
available when Internet connection Gateway IP
is established. Active emails may
communication ComApProtoPort
be sent upon various reasons. For
functions AirGate
more information on these
functions please refer to a separate AirGate IP
chapter. DNS IP
NumberRings AA
LANG SEL INT A
LANG SEL INT B
LANG SEL INT C
InteliMains-NT can change LANG SEL D#2 A
language in its built-in display as
Language selection LANG SEL D#2 B
well as in attached displayes by
activation of binary inputs. LANG SEL D#2 C
LANG SEL D#3 A
LANG SEL D#3 B
LANG SEL D#3 C
Ld reconLevel1
Ld shed active
Ld reconLevel2
LdShedBased on
Ld reconLevel3
Ld shed mode
LdRecon f lvl1
Ld shedStages
LdRecon f lvl2
Ld shedLevel1
Complex load shedding and LdRecon f lvl3
Ld shedLevel2
Load shedding reconnection function is available Ld reconDelay1
Ld shedLevel3
function in the controller. It is described in Ld reconDelay2
the separate chapter. Ld shed f lvl1
Ld reconDelay3
Ld shed f lvl2
AutoLd recon
Ld shed f lvl3
LDSHED STAGE 1
Ld shedDelay1
LDSHED STAGE 2
Ld shedDelay2
LDSHED STAGE 3
Ld shedDelay3
MANUALLDRECON

This function defines if Mains

Coupling is enabled via controller
breakers. It should be enabled only
Mains Coupling Mains coupling
if two or more Mains incommers
are in phase and it is allowed by
local authorities.
Measurement of P You may select the source of I/E-Pm meas
and Q selection Mains current measurement or I/E-Qm meas

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 69

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
MLC:I/E-PM
disable this measurement.
MPF:I/E-QM
This function sets minimal power
produced by gen-set group in
parallel to Mains operation in % of
Minimum required
nominal power of each gen-set
power in parallel to Min Power PtM
regardless of Import/Export limit.
Mains operation
This function is active only if
InteliMains-NT plays active role in
load sharing.
There are two Modbus registers
containing 16 bits each that can be
easily written using Modbus. Their MODBUSSW1-32
Modbus switches values are available in the form of a ModbusSw1
Value (BINARY) and in the form of ModbusSw2
logical binary ouputs that can be
used further in the configuration.
This function is used to protect
system from overheating. If the
temperature rises above given
limit, mode of load control is
changed to prevent overheating. Overheat prot
Overheat
When temperature returns back the TempByPwr Treq
Protection
previous mode of load control is MLC:TBYPWR
restored. For exact function of
Temperature By Power control see
separate chapter System Load
Control.
PeakLevelStart

Peak Shaving function can be PeakLevelStop

Peak Shaving based on active power (kW) or PeakAutS/S del
function reactive power (kVA). It is Peak kVA Start
described in a separate chapter. Peak kVA Stop
PeakKVAS/S del
It is possible to use permanent
Permanent logical logical binary function that is LOGICAL 0
0 or 1 outputs always logical 0 or logical 1. It may LOGICAL 1
used for various purposes.
Power management is a very
#Pwr mgmt mode NextStopDel
complex function with many
#PriorAutoSwap SlowStopDel
Power Management settings that is used if the gen-sets
are in AUT mode of operation (and Priority ctrl MinRunPower 1
other requirements are fulfilled) to #SysAMFstrtDel MinRunPower 2

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 70

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs

#SysAMFstopDel MinRunPower 3
LoadResStrt 1 RunHrsMaxDiff
LoadResStop 1 PwrBandContr 1
LoadResStrt 2 PwrBandContr 2
LoadResStop 2 PwrBandContr 3
LoadResStrt 3 PwrBandContr 4
start and stop engines accordingly
LoadResStop 3 PwrBnChngDlUp
to set parameters for more efficient
LoadResStrt 4 PwrBnChngDlDn
function of the system. Part of
Power Management consists of LoadResStop 4 LOAD RES 2
automatic priority swapping for %LdResStrt 1 LOAD RES 3
extended efficiency of the system. %LdResStop 1 LOAD RES 4
For complete information of all
%LdResStrt 2 SYSTREADY
Power Management function
%LdResStop 2 SYST RES OK
please refer to a separate chapter.
%LdResStrt 3 SYST RES 1 OK
%LdResStop 3 SYST RES 2 OK
%LdResStrt 4 SYST RES 3 OK
%LdResStop 4 SYST RES 4 OK
NextStrt Del ALLAVAILGS RUN
OverldNext Del ENGINES SWAPPED

This function is used to limit

process (e.g. parallel operation is Island enable
Process limitation
not allowed). This function is ParallelEnable
control
complex and it is described in a Synchro enable
separate chapter.
Horn Timeout COMMONACTLEV2
BinInp delay 1 COMMONALLEV2
BinInp delay 2 Mns2POvrldProt
BinInp delay 3 OverldStrtEval
ForceBlockDel1 2POvrldStEvDel
Protections in the controller are
very complex function with many ForceBlockDel2 Mns2Inom prot
settings. Please refer to a separate ForceBlockDel3 Mains2Inom del
Protections
chapter for more information about ResetActAlarms Mains >V MP
protection functions in InteliMains- Force block 1 Mains <V MP
NT.
Force block 2 Mains V del
Force block 3 Mains Avg>V MP
VMAINS <> Mains >f
VMAINS <> Mains <f
FMAINS <> Mains f del

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 71

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs

FBUS <>
MAINSFAIL
BUS FAIL
VectorS prot
VECTORSHIFTTP
VectorS CB sel
VMAINS <>
VectorS limit
HORN
ROCOF Win
ALARM
ROCOF df/dt
HORN LASHING
Bus >V
ALARM FLASHING
Bus <V
COMMON WRN
Bus V del
COMMON MPR
Bus >f
COMMON FLS
Bus <f
COMMON MP
Bus f del
COMMON AL
BusMeasError
COMMON HST
COMMONACTLEV1
COMMONALLEV1

ConvCoefPulse1
The controller offers up to 4 pulse ConvCoefPulse2
counters that can count incomming ConvCoefPulse3
pulses of at least 100 ms (high and
ConvCoefPulse4
Pulse Counters low) length with various
PULSECOUNTER 1
conversion. The counted value is
stored in the controller and can be PULSECOUNTER 2
displayed. PULSECOUNTER 3
PULSECOUNTER 4
Freq gain
Freq int
Angle Gain

There is whole variaty of regulation Load Ramp

Regulation functions in the controller. Please Load gain
functions refer to a separate chapter to find Load int
out more. Voltage gain
Voltage Int
PF gain
PF int
This particular function enables REMOTECONTROL1
Remote Control
user to close or open binary output REMOTECONTROL2
Function
assigned to RemoteControl REMOTECONTROL3

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 72

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
REMOTECONTROL4
function from InteliMonitor or via REMOTECONTROL5
Modbus commands. For more
REMOTECONTROL6
information please refer to a
separate chapter. REMOTECONTROL7
REMOTECONTROL8
System controlled by InteliMains-
NT can be started and stopped
based on activation/deactivation of
Remote start and binary input Rem start/stop.
REM START/STOP
stop of the system Behavior of the system then
depends on load control mode,
power management, process
control and other factors.
RS232(1) mode
The controller has several settings RS232(2) mode
regarding RS232 and RS485 RS232(1)MBCSpd
RS232 and RS485 functions. It is possible to set
RS232(2)MBCSpd
communication mode of communication on
RS232(1)MdmIni
functions particular port, speed of
communication and AT commands RS232(2)MdmIni
for modem connection. RS485(1) conv.
RS485(2) conv.
Soft unloading can be performed in
the standard way or it can be
performed based on actual current
to the load or through MGCB Soft Unload
Soft unloading and measurement to prevent sudden AuxCurrCTprim
Soft unloading overloading of gen-sets because of
AuxCurrCTsec
based on Auxiliary other loads on bus. This function is
measurement using Auxiliary current MGCB open lev
measurement to ensure that soft MGCB open del
unloading is performed correctly in
case of complex installations (e.g.
two Mains incommers).
The controller indicates blocked
start of the gen-set group based on
process limitation setpoints by
Start Blocked
activation of logical binary output START BLOCKED
indication
START BLOCKED (previously it
was indicated by alarm list
message).
StartUpSynchro StartUpSynchronization is now
MultiSoftStart
nization supported in InteliMains-NT

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 73

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
controllers.
This function enables or disables
the direct synchronization of each
gen-set to Mains voltage. This is
Synchronization of
beneficial for faster system
separate gensets
reaction time after startup. MGCBparalClose
directly to the
Moreover, you can use this
Mains voltage
function to distribute Mains voltage
along bus even if no gen-set is
running.
There are two logical binary inputs
that can be used for secondary CB
feedbacks. When these binary
inputs get activated the MCBISOLATED
System Isolated
corresponding breakers are MGCBISOLATED
considered opened no matter what
is the position of feedbacks of
MCB or MGCB.
SysBaseLoad
SysPwrFactor
SysLdCtrl PtM
SysPFCtrl PtM
Import load
Import PF
MLoad ctrl PtM
System Load is a complex function
System Load PF ctrl PtM
and it is described in a separate
Control Export limit
chapter.
TempByPwr Treq
TempByPwr gain
TempByPwr int
MLC:ANEXSYSBLD
MLC:ANEXI/E
MLC:TBYPWR
MPF:ANEXI/E
This is multipurpose starting
System starting impulse which serves as a starting
SYS START/STOP
impuls input for genset controllers in the
system.
Using force value function on
Switchable Current
MainsCTprim, the controller can MainsCTprim
measurement ratio
effectively switch the ratio of the

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 74

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
current measurement on the fly (if
the measurement transformers can
switch their amplification).
TEST ON LOAD
Parallel enable
Synchro enable
InteliMains-NT can perform
Test on load and controlled test on load in TEST Island enable
Test on load with mode. For detailed description of FwRet break
break Test on load please refer to a ReturnWithIntr
separate chapter.
BreakerOverlap
RetFromIsland
ReturnTo Mains
InteliMains-NT obtains data about
precise time and GPS position
Time
from InternetBridge-NT-2.0 (and
synchronization
higher) connected to the CAN. Latitude
and GPS
Time is broadcasted to all the Longitude
positioning with
controllers on CAN bus. Position is
InternetBridge-NT
available for monitoring and for
WebSupervisor.
Timer channel 1
TIMERACT 13-16
Timer channel 2
TIMERACTIVECOM
Timer channel 3
TIMER BLOCK 1
Timer channel 4
TIMER BLOCK 2
Timer channel 5
TIMER BLOCK 3
Timer channel 6
TIMER BLOCK 4
Timer channel 7
Up to 16 timers are provided in the TIMER BLOCK 5
Timer channel 8
controller (with 4 combined TIMER BLOCK 6
outputs). They can be used to Timer channel 9
TIMER BLOCK 7
Timers trigger various internal functions as Timer channel 10
TIMER BLOCK 8
well as external devices. Please Timer channel 11
refer to a separate chapter for TIMER BLOCK 9
Timer channel 12
detailed information. TIMER BLOCK 10
Timer channel 13
TIMER BLOCK 11
Timer channel 14
TIMER BLOCK 12
Timer channel 15
TIMER BLOCK 13
Timer channel 16
TIMER BLOCK 14
TIMERACT 1-4
TIMER BLOCK 15
TIMERACT 5-8
TIMER BLOCK 16
TIMERACT 9-12

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 75

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs

It is possible to use up to 16 user UserBtn pulse

USER BUTTON 9
buttons. User buttons can be for USER BUTTON 1
USER BUTTON 10
example assigned to software USER BUTTON 2
buttons in InteliVision displays. USER BUTTON 11
USER BUTTON 3
Pressing of corresponding button USER BUTTON 12
User Buttons USER BUTTON 4
then activates the output with USER BUTTON 13
function that is chosen in the USER BUTTON 5
USER BUTTON 14
configuration. For more information USER BUTTON 6
USER BUTTON 15
on how to use User Buttons please USER BUTTON 7
refer to a separate chapter. USER BUTTON 16
USER BUTTON 8
Batt >V
Batt <V
There are several prepared user Batt volt del
configurable protections in default Mains I unbal
User Configurable archive. Please refer to a separate
Mains Iunb del
protections chapter for complex step-by-step
instructions on user configurable Mains V unbal
protections. Mains Vunb del
Bus V unbal
Bus Vunb del
It is possible to use four separate
Logical Binary Inputs to show or
hide particular objects in USER MASK 1
InteliVision 5 and 8. It is possible to USER MASK 2
User Mask
use these inputs to show particular USER MASK 3
screens in InteliVision 5. For more USER MASK 4
information on this function please
refer to the separate chapter.
Modbus registers (up to 128) can
be defined for every value and
setpoint in the controller. This can
be used to prevent shift of Modbus
numbers, to standardize Modbus
communication for several
User MODBUS
applications or to make Batch
reading and writing much more
user friendly. For more information
on Modbus please refer to the
Communication Guide or to the
context help in GenConfig.

Variable It is possible to select number and

type of devices connected on CANAddrSwitch1
connection of
CAN2 bus (MODEM: I-LB+ or CANAddrSwitch2
devices on CAN

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 76

 Function Name Brief Description Related Setpoints, Inputs and Outputs
OTHER: InteliVision, I-RD). CAN
addresses 123 and 124 are always
dedicated to connection of OTHER
devices (e.g. InteliVision 5 CAN).
Using two setpoints dedicated to
bus this function, it is possible to
choose if addresses 122 and 125
are used for communication by
OTHER devices or in MODEM
mode (i.e. prepared for I-LB+ or IB-
NT connection).
In the controller it is possible to
select whether fixed protections
are based on measured Ph-N
Voltage protections
voltage or on measured Ph-Ph
mode Ph-N or Ph- FixVoltProtSelect
voltage. For more information of
Ph
fixed protections please refer to the
separate chapter Protections and
Alarm management.
Controller automatically detects if
phases measurement is connected
Wrong Phases in wrong sequence (note that the
WRONGPHSEQ
sequence wrong sequence is not detected if
the phases are just rotated, i.e. L2-
L3-L1).

4.8.2 Modes
OFF mode
Note: InteliMains-NT has no influence at gen-set group.

If mains voltage is within limits and no mains alarm is active, MCB is closed after AMF settings:MCB close del
if AMF settings:MCB opens on = MAINS FAIL.
If AMF settings:MCB opens on = GEN RUNNING, MCB stays closed all the time, regardless of the mains
condition.
MCB application - if the controller is switched to OFF mode while the gen-sets are running and there is voltage
on the bus, MCB is not closed before bus voltage disappears.
MGCB application – if the controller is switched to OFF mode while the gen-sets are running and there is
voltage on the bus, MGCB is opened and after AMF settings:FwRet break MCB is closed (if there is Mains
voltage).
Binary output SYS START/STOP is not active.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 77

 MAN mode
It is possible to close/open breakers manually under supervision of IM-NT controller which doesn’t allow to
close simultaneously breakers without synchronizing (e.g. MCB and MGCB).
If the Mains fails, controller opens MCB if AMF settings:MCB opens on = MAINS FAIL. After the Mains
returns, MCB stays opened. Otherwise MCB is controlled manually by pressing MCB ON/OFF button or closing
MCBBUTTON binary input.
MGCB application – if the Mains fails and group of gen-sets is started and there is voltage on the bus, then
MGCB can be closed anytime by pressing MGCB ON/OFF button.
Pressing of Start/Stop buttons closes/opens binary output SYS START/STOP, i.e. cause start/stop of the gen-
set group.

AUT mode
Controller performs automatically sequences after Mains failure, closing/opening MCB and MGCB, Peak
shaving function, closing of SYS START/STOP binary output.
MCB is opened according to setpoint AMF settings:MCB opens on after Mains failure or after the gen-sets are
running.
MGCB is closed after the start of gen-set group as soon as an appropriate load reserve is achieved (SYST RES
OK binary output closed). If Mains fails and MCB is opened then MGCB stays closed unless voltage on the bus
goes out of the limits.
Controller reacts on binary input REM START/STOP – if this input is closed, controller activates binary output
SYS START/STOP in order to start gen-set group. In MGCB application, MGCB can be closed before the
output activation (see also setpoint Process control:MGCBparalClose).

TEST mode
MCB application
In TEST mode gen-sets are automatically started (activation of binary output SYS START/STOP) and connect
to the bus. System goes to parallel to Mains operation and remains there. The group required power is given by
currently selected mode of Load control.

Test on Load in MCB application

This function is activated when TEST ON LOAD Binary Input is activated and gets deactivated when the Binary
Input is deactivated. The load is taken over by gen-sets and MCB is opened. If the Mains fails during the test,
load is transferred to the gen-sets. If there are not enough gen-sets (running with GCB closed) to cover the
actual load, alarm is issued WrnTstOnLdFail and MCB stays closed. If the load goes down alarm is then
deactivated and MCB is opened.
Note: The settings of the controller must allow the Test on Load function to transfer the load to the gen-set
group. If this is not allowed (e.g. SysBaseLoad is 0 kW), the system will not transfer the load.

MGCB application
Gen-sets are started and synchronized on generator bus. If the ProcessControl:MGCBParalClose is set to
MCB CLOSED, MGCB is opened when switching to TEST mode. If ProcessControl:MCB opens on is set to
MAINSFAIL, MGCB is opened immediately after switching to TEST mode. If ProcessControl:MCB opens on
is set to GEN RUNNING, MGCB is opened when the first gen-set reaches Running state.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 78

 Test on Load in MGCB application
This function may be initiated by activation of Binary Input TEST ON LOAD or by pushing of MCB or MGCB
button.
Activation and Deactivation by TEST ON LOAD Binary Input. Red area is Test on Load with
synchronization. Blue area is Test on Load with break.

Example: This is an example of Test on Load function when: ProcessControl:Island enable = ENABLED,
ProcessControl:Parallel enable = DISABLED and ProcessControl:Synchro enable = NONE.
Controller mode is changed to TEST mode. Gen-sets are started by SYS START/STOP activation. Logical
Binary Input TEST ON LOAD is activated. Because Island operation is enabled, but Parallel operation is
disabled, controller will perform Test on Load with Break. See the figure below for detailed path.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 79

 Example: This is an example of return from Test on Load function when the same setting are applied as in
previous example and AMF setting:ReturnTo Mains = ENABLED.
Logical Binary Input TEST ON LOAD is deactivated. Because Parallel operation is not allowed controller
performs return with break. Because return to Mains is enabled, controller opens MGCB, waits for AMF
Settings:FwRetBreak and closed MCB. See the figure below for detailed path.

Activation by pushing MCB or MGCB button. This is available only if AMF settings:ReturnTo mains is set
to DISABLED.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 80

 MGCB button: Gen-sets are synchronized to Mains via MGCB and MGCB closes. If there are not enough
gen-sets (running with GCB closed) to cover the actual load, alarm is issued WrnTstOnLdFail and MCB
stays closed. If the load goes down alarm is then deactivated and MCB is opened.
MCB button: MCB is opened and MGCB is closed after FwRetBreak if there is enough running gensets to
support actual selected reserve for start.
Return to Mains after using buttons to initiate Test on Load function may be performed by changing or forcing to
ENABLED value to AMF settings:ReturnTo mains or by changing into different mode (e.g. AUT mode). If the
controller is switched to another mode, it behaves accordingly to that mode and the current situation.
Example: Test on Load was performed by pushing MCB button. ProcessControl:Parallel enable =
DISABLED and ProcessControl:Synchro enable = NONE. Load is on gen-sets and the system is in Island
operation. Mode is changed to AUT. Controller counts down AMF settings:Mains ret del and if AMF
settings:RetFromIsland = AUTO, it starts break transfer of the load back to Mains if it is enabled by the
setpoint AM settings:ReturnWithIntr.

Note: The settings of the controller must allow the Test on Load function to transfer the load to the gen-set
group. If this is not allowed (e.g. SysBaseLoad is 0 kW), the system will not transfer the load.

4.8.3 Process Limitation

This chapter brings overview of process limitations in AUT mode (whole system in AUT mode, if there are e.g.
gen-set controllers in MAN mode, other settings combinations may be used). There are many possibilities how
to set the setpoints related to the process limitation, nonetheless there are several recommended settings (for
whole system in AUT) that are shown the table below with short description of the function.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 81

 MGCB

Island Parallel Synchro

MFStart MGCBParalClose Short Description
Enable Enable Enable
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Island to Parallel and from Mains to
Yes Yes Both Yes No Parallel are enabled
Gen-sets will be started when the
Mains fails.
Gen-sets will first synchronize on the
bus before synchronizing via MGCB
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Island to Parallel and from Mains to
Yes Yes Both No No Parallel are enabled
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Mains fails.
Gen-sets will first synchronize on the
bus before synchronizing via MGCB
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Mains to Parallel is enabled (Island to
Yes Yes Forward Yes No Parallel N/A)
Gen-sets will be started when the
Mains fails.
Gen-sets will first synchronize on the
bus before synchronizing via MGCB
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Mains to Parallel is enabled (Island to
Yes Yes Forward No No Parallel N/A)
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Mains fails.
Gen-sets will first synchronize on the
bus before synchronizing via MGCB
Island and Parallel operations are
Yes Yes None Yes Yes possible.
Transfer with synchronization via

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 82

 Island Parallel Synchro
MFStart MGCBParalClose Short Description
Enable Enable Enable
InteliMains-NT is not available
Gen-sets will be started when the
Mains fails.
Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed),
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Island to Parallel
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization via
InteliMains-NT is not available
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Yes Yes None No Yes
Mains fails.
Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed),
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Island to Parallel
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization via
InteliMains-NT is not available
Gen-sets will be started when the
Mains fails.
Yes Yes None Yes MCB closed
Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed),
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Island to Parallel
MGCB will be closed if the MCB is
closed
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization via
InteliMains-NT is not available
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Mains fails.
Yes Yes None No MCB closed
Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed) ,
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Island to Parallel
MGCB will be closed if the MCB is
closed

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 83

 Island Parallel Synchro
MFStart MGCBParalClose Short Description
Enable Enable Enable
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Island to Parallel is enabled
Gen-sets will be started when the
Yes Yes Reverse Yes Yes
Mains fails.
Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed),
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Mains to Parallel
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Yes Yes Reverse Yes No Island to Parallel is enabled (Mains to
Parallel N/A)
Gen-sets will be started when the
Mains fails.
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Island to Parallel is enabled
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Yes Yes Reverse No Yes
Mains fails.
Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed),
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Mains to Parallel
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Yes Yes Reverse No No Island to Parallel is enabled (Mains to
Parallel N/A)
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Mains fails.
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Yes Yes Reverse Yes MCB closed
Island to Parallel is enabled
Gen-sets will be started when the
Mains fails.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 84

 Island Parallel Synchro
MFStart MGCBParalClose Short Description
Enable Enable Enable
Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed),
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Mains to Parallel
MGCB will be closed if the MCB is
closed
Island and Parallel operations are
possible.
Transfer with synchronization from
Island to Parallel is enabled
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Mains fails.
Yes Yes Reverse No MCB closed
Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed),
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Mains to Parallel
MGCB will be closed if the MCB is
closed
Island operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization is N/A
Yes No None Yes No
Gen-sets will be started when the
Mains fails.
Island operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization is N/A
Yes No None No No
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Mains fails.
Island operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization is N/A
Gen-sets will be started when the
Yes No None Yes MCB closed
Mains fails.
MGCB will be closed if the MCB is
closed
Island operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization is N/A
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Yes No None No MCB closed
Mains fails.
MGCB will be closed if the MCB is
closed
Parallel operation is possible.
No Yes Forward No No
Transfer with synchronization from

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 85

 Island Parallel Synchro
MFStart MGCBParalClose Short Description
Enable Enable Enable
Mains to Parallel is enabled
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Mains fails.
Gen-sets will first synchronize on the
bus before synchronizing via MGCB
Parallel operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization via
InteliMains-NT is N/A
Gen-sets will not be started when the
No Yes None No Yes Mains fails.
Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed),
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Mains to Parallel
Parallel operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization via
InteliMains-NT is N/A
Gen-sets will not be started when the
Mains fails.
No Yes None No MCB closed Gen-sets will synchronize directly to
the Mains (MGCB already closed),
i.e. synchronization transfer from
Mains to Parallel
MGCB will be closed if the MCB is
closed

MCB

Island Parallel Synchro

MFStart Short Description
Enable Enable Enable
Island and Parallel operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization via InteliMains-NT is
Yes Yes Reverse Yes
possible
Gen-sets will be started when the Mains fails.
Island and Parallel operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization via InteliMains-NT is
Yes Yes Reverse No
possible
Gen-sets will not be started when the Mains fails.
Island and Parallel operation is possible. (Controller can
Yes Yes None Yes transfer to Parallel operation from Mains operation.)
Transfer with synchronization via InteliMains-NT is not

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 86

 Island Parallel Synchro
MFStart Short Description
Enable Enable Enable
possible
Gen-sets will be started when the Mains fails.
Island and Parallel operation is possible. (Controller can
transfer to Parallel operation from Mains operation.)
Yes Yes None No Transfer with synchronization via InteliMains-NT is not
possible
Gen-sets will not be started when the Mains fails.
Island operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization via InteliMains-NT is not
Yes No None Yes
possible
Gen-sets will be started when the Mains fails.
Island operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization via InteliMains-NT is not
Yes No None No
possible
Gen-sets will not be started when the Mains fails.
Parallel operation is possible.
Transfer with synchronization via InteliMains-NT is
No Yes Reverse No
possible
Gen-sets will not be started when the Mains fails.
Parallel operation is possible. (Controller can transfer to
Parallel operation from Mains operation.)
No Yes None No Transfer with synchronization via InteliMains-NT is not
possible
Gen-sets will not be started when the Mains fails.

4.8.4 System start

There may be several reasons for system start. The most common are: pressing of Start button in MAN mode,
activation of BI REM START/STOP in AUT mode, AMF in MAN or AUT mode, activation of BI TEST ON
LOAD in TEST mode, power management in AUT mode and other reasons. Below there is description of power
management initiated start of the system.
In the following section there is a description of system with several gen-sets and IM-NT controlling MCB and
MGCB (see the lower diagram on the page 6). All gensets are taking part in power management (Pwr
management:Pwr management = ENABLED)
Power management is set to Abs(kW) – for Abs(kVA) same setpoints are used, for Rel(%)setpoints Pwr
management:#%LdResStrt and Pwr management:#%LdResStop are used.
In Island operation IM-NT will not close MGCB untill sufficient nominal power (given by formula below) is
reached (i.e. untill sufficient number of gen-sets with according nominal powers are running).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 87

 Example: First set of Pwr management:#LoadResStrt/Stop setpoints is used - Pwr
management:#LoadResStrt 1 = 300, Pwr management:#LoadResStop 1 = 500.
There are 4 gensets, all with nominal power 100 kW. When Mains failure occurs (i.e. system goes to the
Island operation mode) SYSTEM START/STOP is activated for all gensets and all gensets are starting
because they need to fullfill load reserve 300 kW (supposing non zero load, such reserve is fullfiled only
when all four gensets are running).
If Pwr management:#LoadResStrt 1 is set to 299, only three gensets will be started when Mains failure
occurs before MGCB closes. The formula which determines how many gensets will be started is show
below:

After MGCB closing power management is functioning accordingly to the description below.
Different load reserve sets may be used for starting of the system and for its usual run (e.g. selection of
second load reserve set may be conditioned by MGCB FEEDBACK). It is particularly beneficial in
combination with load shedding after Mains failure occurs (i.e. part of the load is supplied immediately and
other parts are connected as other gensets start).
Note: System starting sequences may be very different due to their complexity (i.e. gensets which do not take
part in power management, various nominal powers etc.). Each system should be considered individually.

4.8.5 StartUpSynchronization
InteliMains-NT now supports StartUpSynchronization function which is available in standard firmware for
InteliGenNT and InteliSysNT from version 3.1.0.
BusMeasError function was changed so it does not signalize Bus measurement error when there are gen-sets
starting in start up synchronization with their closed GCB and there is no voltage on the bus.
In MGCB application there is a support for closing of MGCB in Island mode (MCB must be opened) when at lest
one gen-set in the same control group indicates that it starts in SUS. This can be used for soft start on big
transformers connected behind MGCB and therefore preventing dangerous magnetization currents. This
behaviour is changed by setpoint ProcessControl:MultiSoftStart.

4.8.6 Power management

It is important to note that InteliMains-NT in MCB or MGCB applications is not directly controlling the power
management. The power management is decentralized system and it is resolved individually in each
InteliGenNT or InteliSysNT running in MINT application (this system synchronizes setpoints so it is resolved
based on the same rules in all controllers and the system is more robust because it does not depend on a single
master). InteliMains-NT controller plays crucial role in the system in the control of required load in parallel to
Mains operation (see the chapter 7.9) and also it can be switched to MASTER in Automatic priority swap
function (see the chapter 7.6.2).
The Power management function decides how many gen-sets should run and selects particular gensets to run.
The power management is applicable in cases multiple gen-sets run in parallel to mains or in the island
operation. The function is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of available running power.
Since it allows the system to start and stop gen-sets based on the load demand, it can vastly improve the
system fuel efficiency. In other words, an additional gen-set starts when the load of the system rises above
certain level. The additional gen-set stops, when the load of the system drops down below a certain level. The
process of determining gen-set start and stop is done in each controller; there is no "master slave" system.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 88

 Therefore, the system is very robust and resistant to failures of any unit in the system. Each of the controllers
can be switched off without influencing the whole system. Except the situation the respective gen-set is not
available for the power management.
The power management evaluates so called load reserve. The load reserve is calculated as difference between
actual load and nominal power of running gen-sets. The reserve is calculated as absolute value (in kW / kVA) or
relatively to the nominal power of gen-set(s) (in %). The setpoint Pwr management: #Pwr mgmt mode is used
to select the absolute or relative mode.
The automatic priority swapping function focuses on efficient run of gen-set in regards to running hours and gen-
set size.

Power management limitations

IMPORTANT: This section contains important information regarding power management function
that are crucial for the correct function of power management.

The function of the controller is designed to handle the maximum sum of nominal power at 32000 kW
(3200.0 kW, 320.00 MW depending on the power format in the controller). If the sum of nominal power of all gen-
sets connected to the intercontroller CAN exceeds these values the power format needs to be changed
accordingly.
Example: There are 20 Gen-set each with 2000 kW of nominal power. The sum of the nominal power is
40000 kW. Therefore the power format in kW cannot be used because the sum exceeds 32767. Therefore
power format in MW needs to be chosen because the sum in MW is 40 MW (it does not exceeds
320.00 MW).

Basic Power management

The setpoint Pwr management: Pwr management enables and disables the gen-set to be active within the
power management and makes automatic load dependent starts and stops. If the power management is
disabled, the start and stop of the gen-set do not depend on the load of the group. If the gen-set remains in AUT
mode, the running condition depends only on the binary input Sys start/stop.
The binary input Sys start/stop requests the gen-set to start or stop. If the input is not active, the genset stops
with delay Pwr management: #SysAMFstopDel after the input has been deactivated and will not start again if
in AUT mode. If the input is activated again, the delay Pwr management: #SysAMFstrtDel starts to count
down. Once the delay elapsed (+0.5s because of compatibility reasons with Load Demand Swapping), the gen-
set is activated and can be started by the power management. In other words, the power management is
activated only if the binary input Sys start/stop is activated, the option of setpoint Pwr management: Pwr
management = ENABLED and the AUT mode are selected.
Note: The gen-set takes part of the power management (= is active) only if the controller is in AUT mode!

Note: The gen-set performs load and VAR sharing whenever it is connected to the bus bar i.e. it is independent
on whether the controller is in AUT or MAN mode or whether the power management is active or not. Do not
confuse power management with load sharing.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 89

 Principles of Power management
Internal conditions based on remaining load reserves and priorities are evaluated once a delay is elapsed. If the
load reserve is insufficient the gen-set is started after delay given by the setpoint Pwr management: #NextStrt
del is elapsed. Once the gen-set runs the controller evaluates stopping conditions based on load reserves and
priorities. If the reserve is sufficient enough to stop a particular gen-set, it is stopped after delay given by the
setpoint Pwr management: #NextStopDel is elapsed. All the time the system stop condition – i.e. the binary
input Sys start/stop deactivated – is evaluated as well. Once the delay given by the setpoint Pwr
management: #SysAMFstopDel has elapsed all gen-sets in AUT mode are stopped. Following figure depicts
the system activation and deactivation logic.

System activation System deactivation

Note: The setpoint Pwr management: OverldNext del is used in the case gen-sets are running at 90% or more
of their nominal power. The setpoint Pwr management: OverldNext del should be generally shorter than the
setpoint Pwr management: NextStrt del. The shorter time always applies in such a case (counting in that part
of NextStrt del may have already been elapsed).

Load reserve
The power management is based on the load reserve concept. The load reserve is defined as a difference of the
running nominal power of the group within power management and the total load of the system. There are two
ways how to determine the load reserve. The absolute power management allows the system to keep the load
reserve higher or equal to value in kW or kVA given by a relevant setpoint. The relative power management

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 90

 assures that load reserve is kept higher or equal to relative portion in % of the nominal power of group (i.e.
running gen-sets active in power management) given by a relevant set-point. Depending of the situation, load
reserves are calculated differently in two cases:
Case #1:
Island operation
or parallel to mains operation, ProcessControl: #SysLdCtrl PtM = LDSHARING

Reserve Actual Reserve Start condition Stop condition

Absolute ARstrt = ΣPgNom – ΣPgAct ARstrt < ARstp >

kW/kVA ARstp = ΣPg*Nom – ΣPgAct #LoadResStrt #LoadResStop

Relative RRstrt = [(ΣPgNom – ΣPgAct)/ΣPgNom].100% RRstrt < RRstp >

% RRstp = [(ΣPg*Nom – ΣPgAct)/ΣPg*Nom].100% #%LdResStrt #%LdResStop

Case #2:
Parallel to mains operation, ProcessControl: #SysLdCtrl PtM = BASELOAD

Start Stop
Reserve Actual Reserve
condition condition

Absolute ARstrt = ΣPgNom – BaseLd ARstrt < ARstp >

kW/kVA ARstp = ΣPg*Nom – BaseLd #LoadResStrt #LoadResStop

Relative RRstrt = [(ΣPgNom – BaseLd) / ΣPgNom].100% RRstrt < RRstp >

% RRstp = [(ΣPg*Nom – BaseLd) / ΣPg*Nom].100% #%LdResStrt #%LdResStop

Where

ARstrt Actual Absolute reserve in kW or kVA - for engine start calculation.

ARstp Actual Absolute reserves in kW or kVA - for engine stop calculation.
RRstrt Actual Relative reserve in % - for engine start calculation.
RRstp Actual Relative reserves in % - for engine stop calculation.
ΣPgNom Sum of Nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus.
Sum of Nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus apart of the one, which is going
ΣPg*Nom
to be stopped.
ΣPgAct Sum of Actual power of all gen-sets on the bus = system load.
BaseLd Baseload is given by the setpoint ProcessControl: #SysBaseLoad.

System starting sequences may be very different due to their complexity (i.e. gen-sets which do not take part in
power management, various nominal powers etc.). Each system should be considered individually. Optional
functions in absolute or relative Power management are:
Running hours balancing (equalization) – in absolute or relative pwr mgmnt
Load demand (different size) engines swap – in absolute pwr mgmnt only
Power management of two or more gen-set groups (bus tie support) – in absolute or relative power
management

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 91

 Starting sequence
As written above, the power management is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of available
running power. An additional gen-set starts when the load of the system raises above certain level to keep the
load reserve big enough. Following figure depicts the situation when an additional gen-set is requested to join
the already running gen-set(s) to the bus.

Image 4.12 Starting sequence

As shown above, the load of the system has increased above the level defined by the start condition – i.e. the
load reserve is not sufficient as required by the setpoint Pwr management: #LoadResStrt. Further explication is
provided in chapters Absolute Power Management and Relative Power Management.
The level is illustrated by the green dashed line. If the load reserve keeps insufficient for longer time than defined
by the setpoint Pwr management: #NextStrt del, the next gen-set is actually started. The standard starting
sequence follows. Please refer to the chapter Engine states for further information. Once the synchronization
procedure is done, the GCB breaker is closed and the gen-set power is ramping up. Once loaded, the system
load reserve is raised and becomes sufficient again. Please note the sum of nominal power of all gen-sets on
the bus is increased by the nominal power of the additional gen-set.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 92

 Stopping sequence
As it is written above, the power management is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of
available running power. An additional gen-set stops when the load of the system drops below certain level to
avoid inefficient run of the gen-set. Following figure depicts the situation when a gen-set is requested to stop
due to the power management.

Image 4.13 Stopping sequence

As shown above, the system load has decreased below the level defined by the stop condition – i.e. the load
reserve is over a limit given by the setpoint Pwr management: #LoadResStop. Further explication is provided in
chapters Absolute Power Management and Relative Power Management.
The level is illustrated by the red dashed line. If the load reserve keeps over this limit for longer time than defined
by setpoint Pwr management: #NextStopDel del, the next gen-set is actually requested to stop. Once the gen-
set is unloaded, the GCB breaker is opened. Please note the sum of nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus is
decreased by the nominal power of the stopped gen-set. The cooling sequence follows before the gen-set is
actually stopped. The gen-set is ready to be started if the system load increases again.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 93

 Absolute Power Management
The power management based on absolute load reserves can be successfuly used in cases the load portions
are similar to the gen-set capacity or even bigger. The goal of the absolute reserve mode is to provide the same
load reserve all the time independently on how many gen-sets are currently running. The mode perfectly fits for
industrial plants with large loads.
The absolute power management guarantees adjustable load reserve in kVA or kW.

Activation

Pwr management: #Pwr mgmt mode = ABS Based on active power load reserve.
(kW) Suitable for load demand-based optimization
Based on apparent power load reserve.
Pwr management: #Pwr mgmt mode = ABS
Suitable for generator or busbar dimensioning-based
(kVA)
optimization.

Image 4.14 Power management based on absolute load reserve

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 94

 An example of absolute power management is shown on the figure below. There are three gen-sets with
following choice of setpoints:

Setpoint Basic
Pwr management
Group settings
Nomin Pwr #Pwr mgmt #PriorityAuto #LoadRes #LoadRes
Setpoint Priority
power management mode Swap Strt X Stop X
Gen-set #1 200 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 1 DISABLED 100 kW 125 kW
Gen-set #2 500 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 2 DISABLED 100 kW 125 kW
1 000
Gen-set #3 ENABLED ABS (kW) 3 DISABLED 100 kW 125 kW
kW

Note: Gen-set #1 means that the CAN address of the controller is set to 1. The relevant setpoint is adjusted by
Comms settings: Contr. address.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 95

 As it is shown on both figures above, the addional gen-set is added once the actual load reserve is below the
level given by the setpoint Pwr management: #LoadResStrt X. The addional gen-set is removed once the actual
load reserve is above the level set by Pwr management: #LoadResStop X. The green dashed line depicts the
value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to start. This value of the load value is linked with the
setpoint Pwr management: #LoadResStrt X in following way:
Sum of Nominal power - #LoadResStrt X = Value of load when additional gen-set requested to start
Example:
700 kW – 100 kW = 600 kW

The red dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to stop. This value of
the load value is linked with the setpoint Pwr management: #LoadRes Stop X in following way:
Sum of Nominal power - #LoadResStop X = Value of load when additional gen-set requested to stop
Example:
700 kW – 125 kW = 575 kW

There are 4 levels for starting and stoping gen-sets:

#LoadResStrt 1 / #LoadResStop 1 considered by default.
#LoadResStrt 2 / #LoadResStop 2 considered if LBI: Load res 2 activated
#LoadResStrt 3 / #LoadResStop 3 considered if LBI: Load res 3 activated
#LoadResStrt 4 / #LoadResStop 4 considered if LBI: Load res 4 activated
The option of switching the load reserves by LBI may be usefull in cases appliances with important power
consumption are expected to be connected to the bus.
Note: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same load reserve set
selected.
It is possible to use virtual shared peripheries for distribution of the binary signal to activate LBI Load res 2,3 or 4
among controllers over the CAN bus. For further information, please refer to the chapter Shared Inputs and
Outputs.

Image 4.15 Example of using virtual shared peripheries for signal distribution

Relative Power Management

The power management based on relative load reserves perfectly fits to those applications with such load
portions connected to the group at once are much lower than the gen-set nominal power. This mode helps to
achieve the maximal lifetime of the gen-sets, as they can be operated within optimal load range. The maximal
size of the load connected at once depends on number of actually working gen-sets. The more gen-sets are
connected to the busbar the bigger load portion can be connected at once.
The relative power management guarantees that the engines are not continuously loaded more than to a certain
level.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 96

 Activation: Pwr management:#Pwr mgmt mode = REL (%)
Suitable for engine life-based optimization.

Image 4.16 Power management based on relative load reserve

An example of relative power management is shown on the figure below. There are three gen-sets with following
choice of setpoints:

Setpoint Basic
Pwr management
Group settings
Nomin Pwr #Pwr mgmt #PriorityAuto #LoadRes #LoadRes
Setpoint Priority
power management mode Swap Strt X Stop X
Gen-set #1 200 kW ENABLED REL (%) 1 DISABLED 35 % 40 %
Gen-set #2 500 kW ENABLED REL (%) 2 DISABLED 35 % 40 %
1 000
Gen-set #3 ENABLED REL (%) 3 DISABLED 35 % 40 %
kW

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 97

 Note: Gen-set #1 means that the CAN address of the controller is set to 1. The relevant setpoint is adjusted by
Comms settings: Contr. address.

Image 4.17 Relative Power management example

As it is shown on both figures above, the addional gen-set is added once the actual load reserve is below the
level given by the setpoint Pwr management: #%LdResStrt X. The addional gen-set is removed once the actual
load reserve is above the level set by Pwr management: #%LdResStop X. The green dashed line depicts the
value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to start. This value of the load value is linked with the
setpoint Pwr management: #%LdResStrt X in following way:
(100 % - #%LdResStrt X) * Sum of Nominal power = Value of load when additional gen-set requested to start
in kW (in % of nominal power)
Example: (100 % – 35 %) * 700 kW = 455 kW (65 % of nominal power)

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 98

 The red dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to stop. This value of
the load value is linked with the setpoint Pwr management: #LoadRes Stop X in following way:
(100 % - #%LdResStop X) * Sum of Nominal power = Value of load when additional gen-set requested to
stop in kW (in % of nominal power)
Example: (100 % – 40 %) * 700 kW = 420 kW (60 % of nominal power)

There are 4 levels for starting and stoping gen-sets:

#%LdResStrt 1 / #%LdResStop 1 considered by default.
#%LdResStrt 2 / #%LdResStop 2 considered if LBI: Load res 2 activated
#%LdResStrt 3 / #%LdResStop 3 considered if LBI: Load res 3 activated
#%LdResStrt 4 / #%LdResStop 4 considered if LBI: Load res 4 activated

Note: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same load reserve set
selected.
It is possible to use virtual shared peripheries for distribution of the binary signal to activate LBI Load res 2,3 or 4
among controllers over the CAN bus.

Image 4.18 Example of using virtual shared peripheries for signal distribution

Priorities
The priority of the gen-set within the group is given by the setpoint Pwr management: Priority. Lower number
represents "higher" priority, i.e. a gen-set with lower number starts before another one with higher number. In
other words, the setpoint Pwr management: Priority means order in which gen-sets are started and connected to
the bus. An example is shown on the figure below. There are four gensets with following choice of setpoints:

Setpoint Basic
Pwr management
Group settings
Nomin Pwr #Pwr mgmt #PriorityAuto #LoadRes #LoadRes
Setpoint Priority
power management mode Swap Strt X Stop X
Gen-set #1 200 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 4 DISABLED 50 kW 70 kW
Gen-set #2 200 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 3 DISABLED 50 kW 70 kW
Gen-set #3 200 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 2 DISABLED 50 kW 70 kW
Gen-set #4 200 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 1 DISABLED 50 kW 70 kW

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 99

 Note: Gen-set #1 means that the CAN address of the controller is set to 1. The relevant setpoint is adjusted by
Comms settings: Contr. address.

By choosing the setpoint Pwr management: Priority = 1, the gen-set #4 is running all the time in the example
shown on the figure above (AUT mode selected, Pwr management enabled and LBI Sys start/stop activated).
The priority can be also adjusted by a set of logical binary inputs Priority sw A, Priority sw B, Priority sw C and
Priority sw D. If at least one of these inputs is closed, the priority adjusted by the setpoint as mentioned above
is overridden by the priority given by the combination (binary code) of the Priority SW inputs.
Note: The inputs are intended for adjusting the priority by a rotary switch.

The force value function can be used to force priority 0 into the setpoint Pwr management: Priority. Priority 0 is
the "highest" one, which means the gen-set will be running all the time while the power management is switched
on.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 100

 If more than one gen-set have the same priority, they will act as "one big" gen-set. There are methods of
automatic optimization of the priorities to achieve specific behavior of the group such as equalizing engine hours
of the gen-sets or selection of optimal gen-sets to run according to their size and current load demand.

Automatic priority swapping

As stated in the chapter Priorities, the operator is able to select the order of gen-set starting. There is also the
option of automatic priority selection. The controllers are sharing data concerning the running hours and all
important information relevant to the actual load. Thanks to the Automatic priority swapping function the
controllers choose the gen-set(s) to be running with consideration of their running hours and the actual load. The
Running hours equalization (RHE) function keeps a constant maximal difference of gen-sets’ running hours.
The Load demand swap (LDS) function keeps running only the gen-sets with suitable nominal power to avoid
inefficient fuel consumption or gen-set overload.
At least one gen-set in the group must be set as the master for priority optimization (Pwr Management: Priority
ctrl = MASTER). It is possible to have more than one master, the one with lowest CAN address will play the role
of the master and if it is switched off the next one will take the master role.
Important setpoint: Pwr management: #PriorAutoSwap
The Automatic priority swapping function does not change the setpoint Pwr management: Priority.
The function sets the order of gen-sets by virtual values “engine priority”.

Running hours equalization (RHE)

The gen-sets “engine priorities” are automatically swapped to balance engine running hours. In other words, the
controllers compare Run hours of each gen-set and select gen-set(s) to run in order to maintain constant
maximal difference of running hours. Up to 32 controllers are supported.
Activation: Pwr management: #PriorAutoSwap = RUN HOURS EQU
Important setpoints: RunHoursBase, #RunHrsMaxDiff, Priority ctrl, Control group
The actual values to be considered by the Running Hours Equalization are calculated from the following
formula:
RHEi = Runhoursi - RunHoursBasei,
where RHE is considered value for Running hours equalization, i stands for a particular gen-set, Runhours is a
cumulative sum of run hours available in statistic values of the controller, RunHoursBase is a setpoint. This
setpoint may be used in the case of gen-sets with different runs hours are intended to be set at the same initial
point (e.g. a new gen-set and a used gen-set after retrofit maintenance inspection).
The Running hours equalization function compares RHE value of each controller in the group. Once the
difference between RHE of individual controllers is higher than #RunHrsMaxDiff (i.e. #RunHrsMaxDiff + 1), the
gen-set(s) with the lowest is/are started.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 101

 Image 4.19 Running Hours Equalization example

Example: The system structure is shown on the figure above. The InteliMains-NT controller assumes the
role of master in priority swapping and swaps priority of the engines based on their running hours. 3 cases are
considered:
Case #1: 2 gen-gets available
Case #2: 3 gen-gets available with same initial RHE.
Case #3: 3 gen-gets available with different initial RHE.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 102

 Case #1
Gen-set 1 running hours = 250 -> running hours considered in RHE = 100 (150-RunHoursBase)
Gen-set 2 running hours = 450 -> running hours considered in RHE = 200 (250-RunHoursBase)
Both gen-sets have the same nominal power of 700 kW. Originally, priority of gen-sets was G1 = 2, G2 =
1. Load demand in this example is constant and it is 500 kW (i.e. only one engine is running at any time).
In this case, the InteliMains-NT controller sets the engine priority of the gen-set 1 to 1 because it has the
lowest considered RHE and the difference between RHE2 (i.e. considered RHE of gen-set 2) and RHE1
is higher than #RunHrsMaxDiff that is set to 10h.

Run hours #RunHoursBase RHE

Gen-set #1 250 150 100
Gen-set #2 450 250 200

The gen-set 1 runs for 100 hours to equalize the RHE of both gen-sets. The gen-set 1 keeps running until
the difference between RHE1 and RHE2 exceeds #RunHrsMaxDiff (i.e. 10h). The gen-set 1 runs 100 +
#RunHrsMaxDiff + 1 = 100 + 10 + 1 = 111 hours. After 111 hours the gen-sets 2 has the lowest RHE and
the difference between RHE1 and RHE2 is higher than #RunHrsMaxDiff. The gen-set 2 runs 11 hours to
equalize the RHE of both gen-sets and then additional #RunHrsMaxDiff + 1 hours (i.e. 11 + 10 + 1 = 22
hours). The evolution of RHE1 and RHE2 is shown on the figure below.

Image 4.20 Running Hours Equalization example, 2 gen-sets

Step 0 1 2 3 4 5
RHE1 100 211 211 233 233 255
RHE2 200 200 222 222 244 244
Run G1 (ΔRHE1) 0 111 0 22 0 22
Run G2 (Δ RHE2) 0 0 22 0 22 0

SwapTime = Second lowest considered running hours – Current lowest considered running hours +
#RunHrsMaxDiff +1

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 103

 Case #2
Gen-set 1 running hours = 0 -> running hours considered in RHE = 0 (0-RunHoursBase)
Gen-set 2 running hours = 0 -> running hours considered in RHE = 0 (0-RunHoursBase)
Gen-set 3 running hours = 0 -> running hours considered in RHE = 0 (0-RunHoursBase)
Each gen-set has the same RHE = 0 h. By applying the SwapTime formula, we get the run time of gen-
set 1 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG1 = 0 – 0 + 10 + 1 = 11
Similar way, we get the run time of gen-set 2 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG2 = 11 – 11 + 10 + 1 = 11
Finally, we get the run time of gen-set 3 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG2 = 11 – 0 + 10 + 1 = 22
Please refer to figure below to understand the evolution of RHE of gen-sets in this particular case:

Image 4.21 Running Hours Equalization example, 3 gen-sets with same initial RHE

Step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
RHE1 0 11 11 11 11 33 33 33 33 55 55 55 55 77
RHE2 0 0 11 11 22 22 33 33 44 44 55 55 66 66
RHE3 0 0 0 22 22 22 22 44 44 44 44 66 66 66
Run G1 (Δ RHE1) 0 11 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22
Run G2 (Δ RHE2) 0 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0
Run G3 (Δ RHE3) 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 104

 Case #3
Gen-set 1 running hours = 250 -> running hours considered in RHE = 100 (150-RunHoursBase)
Gen-set 2 running hours = 450 -> running hours considered in RHE = 200 (250-RunHoursBase)
Gen-set 3 running hours = 750 -> running hours considered in RHE = 250 (500-RunHoursBase)
The gen-set 1 has the lowest RHE1 = 100 h. By applying the SwapTime formula, we get the run time of
gen-set 2 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG1 = 200 – 100 + 10 + 1 = 111
Till the step 5, the evolution of the gen-set swapping is the same as in the case #1, just gen-set 1 and
gen-set 2 involve. In the step 6 the gen-set 2 can run only 17 hours (previously 22 hours) because the
gen-set 3 involves. The evolution of RHE1, RHE2 and RHE3 is shown on the figure below:

Image 4.22 Running Hours Equalization example, 3 gen-sets with different initial RHE

Step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
RHE1 100 211 211 233 233 255 255 272 272 272 288 288 288 288
RHE2 200 200 222 222 244 244 261 261 261 277 277 277 294 294
RHE3 250 250 250 250 250 250 266 266 266 266 283 283 283 299
Run G1 
0 111 0 22 0 22 0 0 17 0 0 16 0 0
(Δ RHE1)
Run G2 
0 0 22 0 22 0 17 0 0 16 0 0 17 0
(Δ RHE2)
Run G3 
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 16
(Δ RHE3)

Note: Setting Pwr management: #RunHrsMaxDiff = 5 does not mean that gen-sets swap every 5 hours. The
Swap time is determined by the formula stated above. Please read the entire chapter Running hours
equalization for better understanding.
In the case Pwr management: #RunHrsMaxDiff is set to 0 and all gen-set in the group are at the same initial
point (RHE are equal), the gen-set swapping happens every hour.

Note: Core power management is still fully functional.

Priority setpoints are not actually changed. Virtual values “engine priority” are used. If changing of priority
setpoints is required, they need to be changed and RHE needs to disabled and enabled again for the changes to
take place.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 105

 Load demand swap (LDS) – different sized engines
If there are gen-sets of different size at the site, it may be required always to run such gen-sets that best fit to
the actual load demand. The Load demand swap function is intended for this purpose and can control up to 3
gen-sets (priorities). Up to three running engines (priorities) can be swapped based on load demand (e.g. one
“small” engine may run on “small” load and swaps to another one, “big” engine that runs when load increases).
This function is available only in combination with absolute power management.
Activation: Pwr management:#PriorAutoSwap = LD DEMAND SWAP
Important setpoints: #PwrBandContr1, #PwrBandContr2, #PwrBandContr3, #PwrBandContr4,
#PwrBandChngDlUp, #PwrBandChngDlDn, Load reserve setpoints (depending on selected load reserve set),
Priority ctrl, Control group.
The gen-sets must have addresses 1, 2 and 3. There are four power bands; each of them has adjusted specific
combination of gen-sets that run within it. Power bands are adjusted by setpoints #PwrBandContr1,
#PwrBandContr2, #PwrBandContr3 and #PwrBandContr4. The load levels of the power bands are defined by
sum of nominal powers of gen-sets that are adjusted to run in each particular power band, and the load reserve
for start. The combinations of gen-sets must be created in the way the total nominal power of the Power band #1
< #2 < #3 < #4. If the load demand is above the power band #4 then all gen-sets are ordered to run. In fact there
is power band #5, which has fixedly selected all the gen-sets to run.
The currently active power band is given by the actual load demand. If the load demand changes and gets out
from the current power band, the next/previous power band is activated with delay Pwr management:
#PwrBnChngDlUp or Pwr management: #PwrBnChngDlDn depending on the direction of the change. The gen-
sets which are included in the current power band get engine priority 1, the others get priority 32. The setpoint
Pwr management: Priority is not influenced by this function. Virtual values “engine priority” are used.
Note: If the power band change delays (i.e. Pwr management: #PwrBnChngDlUp and Pwr management:
#PwrBnChngDlDn) are adjusted to higher values than Pwr management: #NextStrt del and Pwr
management: #OverldNextDel setpoints then it may occur, that also the gen-sets not belonging to the current
power band will start. This is normal and it prevents the system from overloading. Priority setpoints are not
actually changed. Virtual values “engine priority” are used.

Note: When the LDS option is selected and a controller is adjusted to the Master role, the controller does not
initiate its master functions and therefore other controllers will not accept its priority changing messages.

Handover UP Swap sequence

As explain above, the automatic priority swapping evaluates the load of the system and assigns the most
appropriate power band. The handover UP sequence describes the situation the gen-set with lower nominal
power is swapped by the gen-set with higher nominal power. The gen-set with lower nominal capacity is
stopped once the sequence is over. The stopped gen-set is in ready state and keeps available in power
management.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 106

 Note: If the power band change delay Pwr management: #PwrBnChngDlUp is adjusted to that longer value
than total time requiring start of other gen-set, stabilization, synchronization, GCB closing and soft loading, it
postpones the soft unloading of the gen-set to be stopped. This delay is depicted by the dashed orange line.
Consequently, the handover up swap sequence is postponed by this delay.

Handover DOWN Swap sequence

The handover DOWN sequence describes the opposite situation. The gen-set with higher nominal power is
swapped by the gen-set with lower nominal power. The gen-set with higher nominal capacity is stopped once
the sequence is over. The stopped gen-set is in ready state and keeps available in power management.

Note: If the power band change delay Pwr management: #PwrBnChngDlDn is adjusted to that longer value
than total time requiring start of other gen-set, stabilization, synchronization, GCB closing and soft loading, it
postpones the soft unloading of the gen-set to be stopped. This delay is depicted by the dashed orange line.
Consequently, the handover down swap sequence is postponed by this delay.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 107

 Image 4.23 Load Demand Swapping example

The system is shown in previous figure. The InteliMains-NT controller assumes the role of master in priority
swapping and swaps engine priority based on user defined power bands. There are 4 available customizable
power bands. The power band #5 is fixed – all available gen-set in power gen-set are running.
Power bands are changed up if:
(Nominal power of all gen-sets in a particular band - Total generated power by gen-sets in power
management) < Reserve for start
or down if:
(Nominal power of all gen-sets in next lower band - Total generated power by gen-sets in power
management) > Reserve for stop
The site contains 3 gen-sets, G1 is 200kW, G2 is 500kW and G3 is 1000kW. The reserve for start is adjusted to
50kW and for stop to 70kW. Following table describes available power bands:

Gen-sets Nominal power [kW] Power band [kW]

G1 200 0 .. 150
G2 500 151 .. 450
G1+G2 700 451 .. 650
G3 1000 651 .. 950
G1+G3 1200 951 .. 1150
G2+G3 1500 1151 .. 1450
G1+G2+G3 1700 >1450

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 108

 Following table describes selected power bands:

Power band Gen-sets Nominal power [kW] Power band range [kW]
#PwrBandContr1 G1 200 0 .. 150
#PwrBandContr2 G2 500 151 .. 450
#PwrBandContr3 G3 1000 451 .. 950
#PwrBandContr4 G2+G3 1500 951 .. 1450
#PwrBandContr5 G1+G2+G3 1700 >1450

Following figure illustrates the power bands swapping in function of load evolution.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 109

 Image 4.24 Load Demand Swapping example

Efficiency
The Efficiency mode is a combination of Running Hours Equalization and Load Demand Swap priority
optimization modes. Please refer to chapters 7.6.3.1 and 7.6.3.2 for further information about RHE and LDS
priority optimization function.
In the first step, the controller sorts the gen-sets according to their nominal power.
In the second step, the controller sorts the gen-sets with the same nominal power according to their RHE.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 110

 The gen-set(s) their nominal power fits the most are chosen. From those with same nominal power, the gen-
set(s) with lowest RHE are chosen.

Setpoint Basic
Pwr management
group settings
#Pwr
Nomin Pwr Prio- #Priority #LoadRes #LoadRes
Setpoint mgmt
power/RHE management rity AutoSwap Strt X Stop X
mode
ABS 
Gen-set #1 300kW ENABLED 1 EFFICIENCY
(kW)
ABS
Gen-set #2 200kW/0h ENABLED 2 EFFICIENCY
(kW)
ABS
Gen-set #3 200kW/10h ENABLED 3 EFFICIENCY 20 kW 30 kW
(kW)
ABS
Gen-set #4 200kW/20h ENABLED 4 EFFICIENCY
(kW)
ABS
Gen-set #5 100kW ENABLED 5 EFFICIENCY
(kW)

Gen-set #1 means that the CAN address of the controller is set to 1. The relevant setpoint is adjusted by
Comms settings: Contr. address.
Following table provide an example of gen-set selection in function of system load evolution. The table is an
example of Efficiency priority optimization function:

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 111

 Relative
Total Running
System Load Running load of
Description powerwithin PM
[kW] gen-sets gen-sets
[kW]
[%]

40 100 40%

60 100 60%
start
80 [0h] LDS Swap 300 26%
stop

100 [10h] 200 50%

120 [20h] 200 60%

start
120 [30h] [10h] RHE Swap 400 30%
stop
120 [20h] 200 60%

140 [30h] 200 70%

start
180 [40h] LDS Swap 500 36%
stop

200 300 67%

240 300 80%

Gen#5 joins
280 start 400 70%
(LDS)
340 400 85%

start LDS + RHE

380 [20h] 600 63%
stop Swap
400 500 80%

440 500 88%

Gen#5 joins
480 start 600 80%
(LDS)

540 600 90%

start
580 [30h] LDS Swap 800 73%
stop

600 700 86%

640 700 91%

Gen#5 joins
680 start 800 85%
(LDS)
740 800 93%

start
780 [40h] LDS Swap 1000 78%
stop

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 112

 Relative
Total Running
System Load Running load of
Description powerwithin PM
[kW] gen-sets gen-sets
[kW]
[%]

800 900 89%

840 900 93%

880 start Gen#5 joins 1000 88%

940 1000 94%

Minimum Running Power

Minimum Running Power function is used to adjust a minimum value of the sum of nominal power of all running
gen-sets. If the function is active, then the gen-sets would not be stopped, although the reserve for stop is
fulfilled.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 113

 The setpoint Pwr management: #MinRunPower 1 is adjusted to 400 kW. Once the LBI: MinRunPwr 1 is
activated, the available nominal running power has to be equal or higher to 400 kW. Even if the load reserve is
big enough to stop the gen-set #2 (nominal power 500 kW), the gen-set keeps running as at least 400 kW has to
be available. The gen-set#1 (nominal power 200 kW) is not enough.
There are 3 different MinRunPower setpoints:
#MinRunPower 1 considered if LBI MinRun power 1 activated
#MinRunPower 2 considered if LBI MinRun power 2 activated
#MinRunPower 3 considered if LBI MinRun power 3 activated

Note: If more than one binary input for MinRunPower activation is closed MinRunPower setpoint with higher
number is used (i.e. binary inputs with higher number have higher priority). When no binary input is closed, then
minimal running power is 0.

Note: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same Minimal Running Power
set selected.
It is possible to use virtual shared peripheries for distribution of the binary signal activating LBI MinRun Power
1,2 or 3 among controllers over the CAN bus.

Image 4.25 Example of using virtual shared peripheries for signal distribution

Control Groups
The physical group of the gen-sets (i.e. the site) can be separated into smaller logical groups, which can work
independently even if they are interconnected by the CAN2 bus. The logical groups are intended to reflect the
real topology of the site when the site is divided into smaller gen-set groups separated from each other by bus-
tie breakers. If the bus-tie breakers are closed the sub-groups have to work as one large group and if the bus-tie
breakers are open, the sub-groups have to work independently.
The group which the particular controller belongs to is adjusted by the setpoint Pwr management: Control
group. If there is only one group in the site, adjust the setpoint to 1 (=COMMON).
The information which groups are currently linked together is being distributed via the CAN. Each controller
can provide information about one BTB breaker. The breaker position is detected by the input GroupLink (i.e.
this input is to be connected to the breaker feedback).
The two groups which are connected together by the BTB breaker mentioned above are adjusted by
setpoints Pwr management: GroupLinkLeft and Pwr management: GroupLinkRight.
Note: The "group link" function is independent on the group, where the controller itself belongs to.
The controller can provide "group link" information about any two groups.

If the "group link" is opened the two groups act as two separated groups. If it is closed the roups act as one
large group.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 114

 The picture below shows an example of a site with 4 gen-sets separated by a BTB breaker into two groups of 2.
The BTB position is detected by the controllers 2 and 3. The reason, why there are 2 controllers used for
detection of the BTB position, is to have a backup source of the group link information if the primary source
(controller) is switched off.

Image 4.26 Example of control groups

Once the BTB breaker is closed, the control group 2 and 3 become new group 2+3. The closed BTB and the
group link function influence the load reserve (i.e. increased by added gen-set of added gensets). Load sharing
applies for all gen-sets.

Load shedding based on active power

Load shedding is a function that automatically disconnects and reconnects various loads depending on several
user defined parameters. The load shedding based on active power is activated by setting the setpoint Ld shed
mode to PWR ONLY.
Important setpoints: all setpoints in group Load shedding
The load shedding function is active in all controller modes except OFF. Load shedding works based on mains
import value or the total gen-set group active power (setpoint Load shedding:LdShedBased on).
Load shedding has three steps and each step is linked with its own Load shed binary output (LDSHED STAGE
X). There are three load shed levels and delays for all three steps as well as recon levels and delays (setpoints
in Load shedding group Ld shedLevel1-3, Ld shedDelay1-3, Ld reconLevel1-3, Ld reconDelay1-3). Load shed
can only move from one step to the next, e.g. “No LoadShed” to “LdShed stage 1” to “LdShed stage 2” to
“LdShed stage 3” and vice versa.
If manual reconnection of the load is desired, the Load shedding:AutoLd recon setpoint needs to be disabled
(DISABLED) and the MANUALLDRECON binary input needs to be configured.
Rising edge on this input resets the controller to a lower stage, but only if the load is under the Ld recon level for
Ld recon delay at that moment.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 115

 Depending on Load shedding:Ld shed active setting load shedding is active never (DISABLE), during island
operation (ISLAND ONLY), during island operation with special function when transition to island operation
occurs (ISL + TRIP PARAL) or all the time (ALL THE TIME).
Example: When Ld shed active = ISL + TRIP PARAL, all load shed outputs are activated (closed) to trip
theunessential load when gen-set group goes to island:

Immediately when MGCB closes after mains fail and gen-set group is instructed to start in AUT mode
(MGCB application only).
After EmergStart del elapses when mains fail and gen-set group is instructed to start in AUT mode (MCB
application only).
Immediately when MGCB is closed in MAN mode by button (transit to island from parallel operation).

Note: If no Load Shedding outputs are configured, there is no record to history and no screen timer indication of
the activity of this function.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 116

 Image 4.27 Examples of load shedding and load reconnection
(load shed, load recon, manual load recon)

Load shedding based on frequency

Load shedding is a function that automatically disconnects and reconnects various loads depending on several
user defined parameters. The load shedding based on frequency is activated by setting the setpoint Ld shed
mode to FREQ ONLY.
Important setpoints: all setpoints in group Load shedding
The load shedding function is active in all controller modes except OFF. Load shedding works based on Mains
frequency or Bus frequency based on setting LdShedBase on (MAINS IMPORT is Mains frequency, GEN-
SETS means Bus frequency).
Load shedding has three steps and each step is linked with its own Load shed binary output (LDSHED STAGE
X). There are three load shed levels and delays for all three steps as well as recon levels and delays (setpoints
in Load shedding group Ld shed f lvl1-3, Ld shedDelay1-3, LdRecon f lvl1-3, Ld reconDelay1-3). Load shed can
only move from one step to the next, e.g. “No LoadShed” to “LdShed stage 1” to “LdShed stage 2” to “LdShed
stage 3” and vice versa.
If manual reconnection of the load is desired, the Load shedding:AutoLd recon setpoint needs to be disabled
(DISABLED) and the MANUALLDRECON binary input needs to be configured.
Rising edge on this input resets the controller to a lower stage, but only if the load is under the Ld recon level for
Ld recon delay at that moment.
Depending on Load shedding:Ld shed active setting load shedding is active never (DISABLE), during island
operation (ISLAND ONLY), during island operation with special function when transition to island operation
occurs (ISL + TRIP PARAL) or all the time (ALL THE TIME).
Example: When Ld shed active = ISL + TRIP PARAL, all load shed outputs are activated (closed) to trip the
unessential load when gen-set group goes to island:

Immediately when MGCB closes after mains fail and gen-set group is instructed to start in AUT mode
(MGCB application only).
After EmergStart del elapses when mains fail and gen-set group is instructed to start in AUT mode (MCB
application only).
Immediately when MGCB is closed in MAN mode by button (transit to island from parallel operation).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 117

 Note: If no Load Shedding outputs are configured, there is no record to history and no screen timer indication of
the activity of this function.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 118

 Image 4.28 Examples of load shedding and load reconnection (load shed, load recon, manual
load recon) based on frequency

Peak shaving based on Active and Apparent Power

The Peak shaving function is active only in AUT mode in parallel to Mains operation. Peak shaving is based on
Object P or Apparent power consumption (consumption of load). If load consumption increases over
ProcessControl:PeakLevelStart or ProcessControl:PeakKVAStart for period longer than
ProcessControl:PeakAutS/S or ProcessControl:PeakKVAS/S del the gen-set group is started (BO Sys
start/stop is activated).
If load consumption decreases below ProcessControl:PeakLevelStop or ProcessControl:PeakKVAStop for
period longer than ProcessControl:PeakAutS/S del or ProcessControl:PeakKVAS/S del the gen-set group is
stopped. Both Peak shaving based on kW and kVA can work simultaneously (SYS START/STOP is activated
if at least one condition is fulfilled).

Image 4.29 Example of peak shaving function based on Active power

(the same function for Apparent power)

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 119

 Note: Function Peak Shaving based on Apparent power is not available for IM-NT-GC controller.

4.8.7 Remote Alarm Messaging

It is possible to use up to five channels for Active Call, Email and SMS upon defined type of Alarm. It is possible
to define protection type for all ENABLED channels to react. All the possibilities in InteliMains-NT are: History
record, Alarm only, Warning, Mains protect and Mains protect with Reset. Find more information about alarm
types in the chapter Protections and alarm management.

Communication Types for Remote Alarm Messaging

Below there all types of communication available for each Active Call channel.

DATA-ANA
This option sends a complete archive to the recipient's PC via analog modem. An analog modem must be
connected either to one of controller COM ports or to one of I-LB modules connected to the controller via CAN2
bus. The channel address must contain complete telephone number of the recipient's PC where InteliMonitor is
running in Active call receiving mode.

DATA-GSM
This option sends a complete archive to the recipient's PC via GSM modem. A GSM modem with activated
CSD data transfers must be connected either to one of controller COM ports or to one of I-LB modules
connected to the controller via CAN2 bus. The channel address must contain complete telephone number of the
recipient's PC where InteliMonitor is running in Active call receiving mode.

DATA-ISDN
This option sends a complete archive to the recipient's PC via ISDN modem. An ISDN modem must be
connected either to one of controller COM ports or to one of I-LB modules connected to the controller via CAN2
bus. The channel address must contain complete telephone number of the recipient's PC where InteliMonitor is
running in Active call receiving mode.

DATA-CDMA
This option sends a complete archive to the recipient's PC via CDMA modem. A CDMA modem must be
connected either to one of controller COM ports or to one of I-LB modules connected to the controller via CAN2
bus. The local CDMA network must allow point-to-point data transfers. The channel address must contain
complete telephone number of the recipient's PC where InteliMonitor is running in Active call receiving mode.

SMS-GSM
This option sends a short text message (SMS) containing the actual Alarmlist contents to the recipient's mobile
phone via the GSM modem. The channel address must contain complete telephone number of the recipient's
mobile phone.

SMS-CDMA
This option sends a short text message (SMS) containing the actual Alarmlist contents to the recipient's mobile
phone via the CDMA modem. The channel address must contain complete telephone number of the recipient's
mobile phone.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 120

 IB-E-MAIL
This option sends an e-mail containing the actual Alarmlist contents and latest 20 history records (only date,
time, reason) to the recipient's mailbox via the IB-COM module or IG-IB module. The channel address must
contain valid e-mail address of the recipient.
Note: The SMTP settings (SMTP authent,SMTP user name, SMTP password, SMTP address, Contr mailbox)
must be properly adjusted for sending e-mails.

Example of setting
There is an example of setting of Remote Alarm Messaging. In this case active calls we be triggered on Mains
protect and Mains protect with Reset alarms. Message is sent via email to emailAddress@domain.com
(Channel 1 – available for NTC controller or with any controller with connected IB-NT or I-LB+), archive is sent
via ISDN modem to the number +111222333444 (Channel 2) and SMS is sent to the number +999111333555
(Channel 3).

It is also possible to adjust number of attempts that controller performs in case of not successful Active Call –
Comms settings:ActCallAttempt. The language of messages can be changed – Comms settings:Acall+SMS
lang (use Translator and Languages tabs in GenConfig to adjust languages).
Note: Up to five channels can be used.

4.8.8 Controller Redundancy

Redundant system is a general term for applications where there are two controllers at each gen-set. One is the
main controller, which controls the gen-set in normal conditions, the other is the redundant controller, which
takes over the control when the main controller fails. Both controllers have identical firmware and most of the
configuration and setpoints. Only several things need to be adjusted/configured differently because of the
rendundancy function itself.
IMPORTANT: If there are shared binary or analog outputs used on InteliMains-NT (e.g. for system
start/stop), it is necessary to prepare the configuration in the way so each controller uses binary or
analog output set with different address. Configuration in gen-set controllers then needs to be
altered so it can receive signals from both InteliMains-NT controller (e.g. using built-in PLC
functions).

Redundant systems using binary signals

It is not possible to use this redundancy system since correct function of InteliMains-NT depends on CAN bus
communication and thus CAN redundancy should be always used.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 121

 Redundant systems using CAN bus
This system uses the CAN bus for detection whether the main controller is operational or not. If the redundant
controller has not received two consequent messages from the main one (~100ms) it will take over the system
control - it activates the binary output CTRLHBEAT FD, which has to be wired in such a way, that it
disconnects the dead main controller from the control, connects the redundancy controller instead and activates
it by deactivation of the binary input EMERG. MANUAL.
As there can be up to 16 pairs of controllers at the CAN bus it is necessary to select which main controller
(address) belongs to which redundant one. The setpoint ProcessControl:Watched Contr is used for this
purpose. It must be adjusted to address of the respective main controller in each redundant controller and it
must be adjusted to 0 in each main controller.
IMPORTANT: Correct wiring of all inputs and outputs that should be used both by the main and the
redundant controller needs to be done. Please refer to the corresponding chapter for wiring of
binary inputs and outputs.
Do not use Shared Binary Inputs/Outputs for CTRLHBEAT FD -> EMERG.MANUAL connection
since the failed controller may not interpret it correctly!

Image 4.30 Example of redundancy function

In the figure above the signal of logical function CtrlHBeat FD is used to disable the main controller if it is lost
from CAN bus or CAN bus communication from that controller becomes erratic. It is used also to disable the
redundant controller when the communication on CAN bus is alright (it is negated). For more information on
Virtual Binary Inputs and Outputs (VPIO) please refer to the chapter about Shared Binary Inputs and Outputs
and Virtual Binary Inputs and Outputs.
Note: Use pulse signals for control of circuit breakers. MCB ON COIL, MCB OFF COIL, MGCB ON COIL and
MGCB OFF COIL should be used to prevent sudden opening for a short period of time when the controller fails
and to ensure proper function of redundancy.

4.8.9 System load control modes

Note: If you need more information on how to choose suitable load control mode, please refer to the chapter
6.8.7 Managing system load control modes.

System load control modes are determined by setpoints ProcessControl:Mload ctrl PtM and SysLdCtrl PtM.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 122

 If ProcessControl:#SysLdCtrl PtM is set to BASELOAD, then Gen-set group requested load is not determined
by InteliMains-NT but it is given by setpoint ProcessControl:#SysBaseLoad regardless of
ProcessControl:Mload ctrl PtM setting.

Image 4.31 General schematic of system load control modes in gen-set group with InteliMains-
NT

Determination of actual value of requested gen-set group active power for various settings of
ProcessControl:Mload ctrl PtM is shown in separate diagrams in chapters below:

SYSBLD->LS
Following diagram shows the way of calculation of requested gen-set group active power if
ProcessControl:Mload ctrl PtM = SYSBLD->LS:

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 123

 ANEXSYSBLD- >LS
Following diagram shows the way of calculation of requested gen-set group active power if
ProcessControl:Mload ctrl PtM = ANEXSYSBLD->LS:

IMP/EXP
Following diagram shows the way of calculation of requested gen-set group active power if
ProcessControl:Mload ctrl PtM = IMP/EXP.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 124

 ANEXT IMP/EXP
Following diagram shows the way of calculation of requested gen-set group active power if
ProcessControl:Mload ctrl PtM = ANEXT IMP/EXP.

T BY PWR
Following diagram shows the way of calculation of requested gen-set group active power if
ProcessControl:Mload ctrl PtM = T BY PWR.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 125

4.8.10 Managing system load control modes
It may be very complex task to select correct mode of operation for the whole system to meet all the
requirements. This is a short guide that should illustrate which mode to select when particular requirements are
to be fulfilled. There are graph examples of the operation for each setting.
First of all there are two different groups of load control – it is given by ProcessControl:SysLdCtrl PtM. If you
choose BASELOAD, InteliMains-NT does not take part in Load sharing (load control is determined by InteliGen
or InteliSys gen-set controller). If you choose LDSHARING, then InteliMains-NT is determining System
baseload for the gen-set group and plays active role in load sharing. If LDSHARING is chosen, it is possible to
choose from several modes available.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 126

 SYSBLD ->LS
In this mode the function is similar to the function when BASELOAD is chosen but InteliMains-NT acts as a
master for the gen-set group. In this mode of operation ProcessControl:#SysBaseLoad is shared amongst gen-
sets. Moreover, thanks to InteliMains-NT measurement of Mains power, it is possible to employ also
import/export limit so if the load demand goes down and export is not allowed, system baseload is lowered so
there is no export or just limited export.

Image 4.32 SysBaseLoad ->LS

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 127

 Image 4.33 SysBaseLoad ->LS with Export limit

ANEXTSYSBLD ->LS
This mode works the same way as the previous one but its system baseload value is determined by external
input (e.g. third party device providing required power of the system).

IMP/EXP
In this mode it is possible to adjust required import from or export to Mains. SysBaseLoad is internally changed
so import or export value remain constant (adjusted by setpoint).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 128

 Image 4.34 Import/Export

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 129

 Image 4.35 Import/Export

ANEXT IMP/EXP
This mode works the same way as the previous one but its import/export required power is determined by
external input (e.g. third party device providing required import/export value of the system).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 130

 T BY PWR
In this mode the system baseload is determined by internal PID regulation loop based on temperature measured
from external device and connected to the controller via analog input. It is possible to use also Import or Export
limiting function which limits system baseload determined by T BY PWR function so there is no export to the
Mains where it is not allowed.

4.8.11 System PF control modes

System PF or Q control modes are determined by setpoint Process Control:PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) and
#SysPFCtrl PtM (page 199).
If ProcessControl:#SysPFCtrl PtM is set to BASEPF, then Gen-set group requested power factor is not
determined by InteliMains-NT but it is given by setpoint ProcessControl:#SysPwrFactor (page 197) regardless
of Process Control:PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) setting.
The same behavior is in case the #SysPFCtrl PtM (page 199) is set to BASE Q with only the change, that here
is set the reactive power request for the gen-set group by #SysBaseQ (page 197).

Image 4.36 General schematic of system power factor and reactive power control modes
in gen-set group with InteliMains-NT

Reactive power control by VSHARING

The reactive power control recognize few main modes which could be switched via Setpoint PF/Qctrl PtM
(page 205).

PF control mode
The power factor of generator is controled according to adjusted Setpoint #SysPwrFactor (page 197). The
required Value Required PF3dc (page 421) should be equal to actual Value TotRun PF (page 407).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 131

 PF/Pm mode
Grid codes specific functionality where the power factor depends on the actual power of the generator.
see PF control based on actual Gen-set power on page 147

Q control mode
The reactive power of generator is controled according to adjusted Setpoin #SysPwrFactor (page 197). The
required Value Required Q (page 421) should be equal to actual Value TotRun Q (page 406).

Q(Um) mode
Grid codes specific functionality where the Required Q (page 421) depends on the actual mains voltage.
see Q(Um) control on page 149

Q(P) mode
Grid codes specific functionality where the Required Q (page 421) depends on the actual power of the
generator.
see Q(P) – Q control based on actual Gen-set power on page 151

Qref/Ulim mode
Grid codes specific functionality where the Required Q (page 421) depends on the actual mains voltage with a
modified behavior than Q(Um) mode.
see Qref/Ulim on page 153

Reactive power control - analog extern control

The above mentioned modes except PF(Pm) and Q(P) could be also controlled via analog signal. For that
reason is there new Setpoint PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206).
In case the required mode is chosen and Setpoint PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) is switched to ENABLED the
correct LAI must be configured otherwise the alarm message is activated and the reactive power control stays
internally in DISABLED state until the correct LAI is configured.

Reactive power control - import/export

The Setpoint PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page 206) activates the regulation of import/export.
In case the required mode is chosen and Setpoint PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page 206) is switched to ENABLED the
correct condition for import/export measurement must be fulfilled:
Setpoints I/E-Pm meas (page 207) and I/E-Qm meas (page 208) are switched to IM3 CT INPUT and the
CT's must be wired on the Mains
Setpoints I/E-Pm meas (page 207) and I/E-Qm meas (page 208) are switched to ANALOG INPUT and
the correct LAI's must be configured

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 132

 Mode Description
The power factor of generator is controled according to adjusted Setpoint Import PF (page
PF control mode
200). The required Value is visible as Mains PF (page 393).
Grid codes specific functionality where the Mains PF (page 393) depends on the actual
PF/Pm mode power of the generator. For more information see PF control based on actual Gen-set
power on page 147.
The reactive power of generator is controled according to adjusted Setpoint Import Q (page
Q control mode
200). The required Value is visible as Mains Q (page 391).
Grid codes specific functionality where the Mains Q (page 391) depends on the actual mains
Q(Um) mode
voltage. For more information see Q(Um) control on page 149.
Grid codes specific functionality where the Mains Q (page 391) depends on the actual power
Q(P) mode of the generator. For more information see Q(P) – Q control based on actual Gen-set
power on page 151.
Grid codes specific functionality where the Mains Q (page 391) depends on the actual mains
Qref/Ulim mode voltage with a modified behavior than Q(Um) mode. For more information see Qref/Ulim on
page 153.

4.8.12 Grid Codes specific functions

IMPORTANT: To keep the correct grid codes required functions in case the connection point is
measured on IM-NT is important to set following setpoints correctly: #SysLdCtrl PtM (page 197) has
to be set to LDSHARING and #SysPFCtrl PtM (page 199) has to be set to VSHARING. Any other
setting will not evaluate the grid codes features correctly.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 133

 Image 4.37 Principle of PF/Q control

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 134

 Image 4.38 Principle of evaluation of VRT

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 135

 Image 4.39 Principle of evaluation Mains Overfrequency/Underfrequency

Active power feed-in at over and under frequency

Power reduction by over frequency
Reduction of power has to generally start by 50.2 Hz of mains frequency. The starting point could be adjustable
till 50.5 Hz. Unit must be able to reduce the active power till the frequency 51.5 Hz.
51.5 Hz in this case responds to 48 % of TotRunPnomAll (page 417)TotRunPnomAll (page 417). If the unit
is able to ride under the 48 % of nominal power the curve continuous with same gradient also by frequency
>51.5 Hz.
Anyway the norm allows, that the unit could disconnect from the mains in case the frequency is >51.5 Hz.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 136

 Note: Technical possibilities of Gen-sets by frequency >51.5 Hz can be solved with other configuration
features (MinPowerPTM, PLC logic etc.)

Function is defined by user sensor curve adjusted in configuration tool till the maximum possible frequency.
The curve is adjusted according to following formula: ∆P=20*TotRunPnomAll (page 417)*(50.2-fmains)/50
User Sensor curve name is PWROVRFREQ.
If the mains frequency reaches 50.2 Hz the actual active power value is frozen (Pm (page 422)) and from this
value is the power is decreased.
The actual power of Gen-set (value Pm) is decreased of a power which is related to ∆P in actual mains
frequency.
While the power is reduced due to over frequency LBO:PWROVERFREQLIM (PAGE 513) and the LBO:EVENT -
MAINSFRQRISE (PAGE 503) are activated and MainsFrqRise (page 332) is used.
For the return from power reduction – this is meant that the frequency returns from over frequency, the
MainsFrqFall (page 332) is used and LBO:EVENT - MAINSFRQFALL (PAGE 503) is active.

Power over frequency related setting

Power over frequency related setting:
Setpoint: Bus Settings: MainsFrqRise (page 332)
Setpoint: Bus Settings: MainsFrqFall (page 332)
Value: Binary CU: ActPwrReq (page 420)
Value: Bin outputs CU: Pm (page 422)
Value: Bin outputs CU: PoF Curve (page 423)
GenConfig: User Sensors - PWROVRFREQ
GenConfig: LBO: PWROVERFREQLIM (PAGE 513)
GenConfig: LBO: EVENT - MAINSFRQRISE (PAGE 503)
GenConfig: LBO: EVENT - MAINSFRQFALL (PAGE 503)
GenConfig: LBO: EVENT - RET OVUNFREQ (PAGE 516)
In case of using Testing frequency:
Setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: GridCodesTestGridCodesTest (page 336)
GenConfig: LAI: TEST F (PAGE 540)
GenConfig: LAI: TEST P (PAGE 540)

Power increase by under frequency

If the frequency drops to 49.8 Hz the actual value of active power is saved and is taken as reference value for
the under frequency curve.
The under frequency is watched till 47.5 Hz below this value could be the unit disconnected from the mains.
For this function is defined new user sensor curve - PWRUNDRFREQ.
The curve is adjusted according to following formula: ∆P=20*TotRunPnomAll (page 417)*(49.8-fmains)/50
The actual power of Gen-set (value Pm) is increased for a power which is related to ∆P in actual mains
frequency.
While the power is increased due to under frequency LBO:PWRUNDERFREQ (PAGE 513) and the LBO:EVENT -
MAINSFRQFALL (PAGE 503) are activated and MainsFrqFall (page 332) is used.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 137

 For the return from power increasing – this is meant that the frequency returns from under frequency, the
MainsFrqRise (page 332) is used and LBO: EVENT - MAINSFRQRISE (PAGE 503) is active.
Power increase has to be limited by TotRunPnomAll (page 417). If the Pm is equal or higher (higher could be
because the active power is never stable and in fact oscillates around required value) the under frequency will
not be realized.

Power under frequency related setting

Power under frequency related setting:
Setpoint: Bus Settings:MainsFrqRise (page 332)
Setpoint: Bus Settings:MainsFrqFall (page 332)
Value: Binary CU:ActPwrReq (page 420)
Value: Bin outputs CU:Pm (page 422)
Value: Bin outputs CU:PuF Curve (page 423)
GenConfig: User Sensors - PWRUNDRFREQ
GenConfig: LBO:PWRUNDERFREQ (PAGE 513)
GenConfig: LBO:EVENT - MAINSFRQRISE (PAGE 503)
GenConfig: LBO:EVENT - MAINSFRQFALL (PAGE 503)
GenConfig: LBO:EVENT - RET OVUNFREQ (PAGE 516)
In case of using Testing frequency:
Setoint: Sync/Load ctrl:GridCodesTest (page 336)
GenConfig: LAI:TEST F (PAGE 540)
GenConfig: LAI:TEST P (PAGE 540)

End of critical mains states and return to normal state

When the mains frequency returns from over or under frequency, it means mains frequency is back over 49,8Hz
and under 50,2Hz the transitional period from the critical to normal state must be initialized.
This transitional period is fixed to 600s.
During this period is active the LBO: EVENT - RET OVUNFREQ (PAGE 516) and the RetOvUnFreq (page 335) is
used.

Load reduction
Load reduction via Binary inputs
Controller enables remote power control of the Gen-set. This mechanism is dedicated for purposes when e.g.
utility company wants to control the Gen-set power on predefined power levels.
Load reduction ramp is based on setting of Setpoint: ActPwrRamps:LoadReductPr (page 329)
andLoadReduct (page 333) based on the RampEvntType adjust correspond ramp time.

Reduction is based on combination of:

Power levels which are adjusted by Setpoints: LoadReduct1 (page 336), LoadReduct2 (page 337),
LoadReduct3 (page 337), LoadReduct4 (page 337). Which corresponds with LBI: LOADREDUCT 1 (PAGE
475), LOADREDUCT 2 (PAGE 475), LOADREDUCT 3 (PAGE 475), and LOADREDUCT 4 (PAGE 475) .
Activation of set of LBI: LOADREDUCT 1 (PAGE 475), LOADREDUCT 2 (PAGE 475), LOADREDUCT 3 (PAGE
475), LOADREDUCT 4 (PAGE 475).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 138

 in case none of these LBIs are activated, Gen-set power is (if no other requirement occur) regulated on
value % of InstalPower given by Setpoints above.
in case more LBI's activated at once, Gen-set power will be reduced to lower kW
Activation of LBI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476)
this LBI is general condition for activation of power limitation.
Required load reduction is lower than actual power
this is mainly in situations when other "loading ramp" is activated and Gen-set ramps from 0 or low power
and then would Load reduction not reduce but increase the actual power.
Example: There was Mains fail and after synchronization to the Mains Gen-set starts to increase the
load via slow load ramp. If there comes requirement for Load reduction 60% when the actual power is
10%, the actual loading ramp is active till the actual power comes over the required Load reduction. If
the Load reduction is deactivated and there is still active previous ramp timer, gen-set is loaded due to
previous ramp.

Image 4.40 Load reduction

Load reduction via Binary inputs – statistic values

There are counters as statistic value which indicates how many times was activated any level of power
reduction.
We store the data of running hours and minutes in the reduced levels, which are available for network
supervisors.
If the actual power is lower than actual required reduction the average statistic values will not be filled, we
monitor definitely only the situation when is the gen-set forced to reduce his power.
We store following statistic data:
during the actual month
data are every 1.day of next month in 0:00 moved in to the statistics of "last month"
data are every 1.day of next month in 0:00 automatically reseted
statistic of last month
this value is actualized every 1.day of next month in 0:00

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 139

 long term statistic
statistic from the first switching on or from the reset command till the end of data range

Image 4.41 Principal of statistic values

Load reduction via Binary inputs related setting

Setpoint: Bus Settings: LoadReductPr (page 329)
Setpoint: Bus Settings: LoadReduct (page 333)
Setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: LoadReduct1 (page 336)
Setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: LoadReduct2 (page 337)
Setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: LoadReduct3 (page 337)
Setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: LoadReduct4 (page 337)
LBI: LOADREDUCT 1 (PAGE 475)
LBI: LOADREDUCT 2 (PAGE 475)
LBI: LOADREDUCT 3 (PAGE 475)
LBI: LOADREDUCT 4 (PAGE 475)
LBI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476)
LBO: EVENT - LOADREDUCT (PAGE 501)
LBO: LOAD REDUCT ON (PAGE 501)

Load reduction via Analog inputs

Controller enables remote power control of the Gen-set. This mechanism is dedicated for purposes when e.g.
utility company wants to control the Gen-set power on predefined power levels.
Load reduction ramp is based on setting of Setpoint: ActPwrRamps:LoadReductPr (page 329)
andLoadReduct (page 333) based on the RampEvntType adjust correspond ramp time.

Reduction is based on combination of:

Power levels are changed according to actual value of configured LAI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 537).
LAI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 537) can be configured in GenConfig either as standard analog input or as
analog value in PLC logic

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 140

 Activation of LBI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476)
this LBI is general condition for activation of power limitation.
Required load reduction is lower than actual power
this is mainly in situations when other "loading ramp" is activated and Gen-set ramps from 0 or low power
and then would Load reduction not reduce but increase the actual power.
Example: There was Mains fail and after synchronization to the Mains Gen-set starts to increase the
load via slow load ramp. If there comes requirement for Load reduction 60% when the actual power is
10%, the actual loading ramp is active till the actual power comes over the required Load reduction. If
the Load reduction is deactivated and there is still active previous ramp timer, gen-set is loaded due to
previous ramp.

Note: If there is also configured LBI: Load reduct 1-4, the lower requested value is required.

IMPORTANT: In case the power reduction based on LAI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 537) is active the
power reduction statistic is not fulfilled.

Load reduction via Analog inputs related setting

Setpoint: Bus Settings: LoadReductPr (page 329)
Setpoint: Bus Settings: LoadReduct (page 333)
LAI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 537)
LBI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476)
LBO: EVENT - LOADREDUCT (PAGE 501)
LBO: LOAD REDUCT ON (PAGE 501)
GenConfig: User Sensors: PWRGENMNGM

Moving average values

10-minutes average from gen P
Means the window from which the average is counting is moving all the time
Will be started to calculate in the moment, when the first gen-set is on the bus and will be stopped to be
calculated in the moment when the last gen-set left the bus.
When the last gen-set left the bus, the value will be reset to 0
ActPwr10minAvg (page 407)

10-minutes average from gen Q

Means the window from which the average is counting is moving all the time
Will be started to calculate in the moment, when the first gen-set is on the bus and will be stopped to be
calculated in the moment when the last gen-set left the bus.
When the last gen-set left the bus, the value will be reset to 0
RctPwr10minAvg (page 408)

10-minutes average from gen S

Means the window from which the average is counting is moving all the time
Will be started to calculate in the moment, when the first gen-set is on the bus and will be stopped to be
calculated in the moment when the last gen-set left the bus.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 141

 When the last gen-set left the bus, the value will be reset to 0
AppPwr10minAvg (page 408)

10-minutes average from mains V

Means the window from which the average is counting is moving all the time
Will calculate all the time when controller is powered on
When controller is switched off, the value will be reset to 0
MainsV10L1-L2 (page 399), MainsV10L2-L3 (page 399), MainsV10L3-L1 (page 400)

1-minutes average from mains V

Means the window from which the average is counting is moving all the time
Will calculate all the time when controller is powered on
When controller is switched off, the value will be reset to 0
MainsV1L1-L2 (page 400), MainsV1L2-L3 (page 401), MainsV1L3-L1 (page 401)

Mains protections
Mains protections transfer point
Protective disconnection devices are installed at the transfer point.
Using of transfer point "and/or" generator unit is specified by the network operator.
Required protections at the transfer point:
Reactive power / under-voltage protection Q→&U<
Rise-in-voltage protection U>> and U>
Under-voltage protection U<
Recommended tripping values and times based on the following table:

Setting range of the Recommended settings of

Function
protection relay protection relays
rise-in-voltage protection U>> 1.00 - 1.30 Un 1.15 Uc ≤ 100ms
rise-in-voltage protection U> 1.00 - 1.30 Un 1.08 Uc 1 min
under-voltage protection U< 0.10 - 1.00 Un 0.8 Uc 2.7s
reactive power / under-voltage
0.70 - 1.00 Un 0.85 Uc t=0.5s
protection (Q→ & U<)

Table 4.1 Recommended setting of protection equipment at the network point of connection of a
generating plant for connection to the bus-bar of a transformer station

Q&U Protection
Q-U protection watches the behavior of gen-set in case of the drop of the mains voltage.
In case the voltage drops the capacitive mode of generator units in the network could still deteriorate the whole
situation.
Gen-set must be disconnected from the mains in case the mains voltage drops below the certain value of
nominal mains voltage AND the simultaneously is generated the capacitive reactive power from the gen-set
(generator is under excited).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 142

 Breaker must be disconnected after the required delay.
When the protection is evaluated alarm in alarm list and in history is activated.
While the alarm is active the closing of the breaker is disabled, the mains or generator parameters will be forced
as "not OK".
User could decide whether wants to open the MGCB or MCB breaker (only for MGCB application - Q&U Prot
CBsel (page 340).

Image 4.42 Q&U Protection

Note: In the norm is mentioned, that the protection is activated if the Q is above the adjusted level, but we have
to be aware, that the requirement is written in load point of view, but we adjust the protection from generator
point of view, that's why we recognize when the Q is bellow the adjusted level.

In case the protection is active the breaker MGCB or MCB get's opened and the Q&U protection alarm message
is activated.

Dynamic mains support (VRT)

Under Dynamic mains support means keeping the generator voltage during short mains failures on medium or
high voltage site for an unwished disconnection of big power sources which could reduce mains unbalances.
To activate both protections new setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl:DynamicSupport (page 340) has to be in position
Enabled.
We have 3 types of evaluated VRT (Voltage ride through).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 143

 Image 4.43 Required VRT curves

In case the VRT protection is evaluated the Log Bout VRT Prot Trip is active for 3s and the history record is
written.
Note: Standard mains protections are still evaluated even the Dynamic support is enabled.

3-pole undervoltage failure ride through

The Mains under voltage protection is evaluated as soon as the Mains voltage drops below the curve made in
the curve LVRT-3phase. In such a case Mains is supposed to be faulty and MCB is initiated to trip and
disconnect gen-set from Mains.
In case the voltage is above the curve, the Mains is evaluated as healthy.
In case the Mains voltage evaluation via this curve is adjusted (by configuring the curve LVRT-3phase) there is
not active the Mains <V and Mains <<V protection.

2-pole undervoltage failure ride through

The Mains under voltage protection is evaluated as soon as the 2 phases of Mains voltage drops below the
curve made in the curve LVRT-2phase. In such a case Mains is supposed to be faulty and GCB/MCB is
initiated to trip and disconnect gen-set from Mains.
In case the voltage is above the curve, the Mains is evaluated as healthy.
In case the Mains voltage evaluation via this curve is adjusted (by configuring the curve LVRT-2phase) there is
not active the Mains <V and Mains <<V protection.

Overvoltage failure ride through

The Mains under voltage protection is evaluated as soon as the Mains voltage drops above the curve made in
the curve OVRT. In such a case Mains is supposed to be faulty and GCB/MCB is initiated to trip and disconnect
gen-set from Mains.
In case the voltage is under the curve, the Mains is evaluated as healthy.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 144

 In case the Mains voltage evaluation via this curve is adjusted (by configuring the curve OVRT there is not
active the Mains >V and Mains >>V protection.

Undervoltage/Overvoltage after 5 s of VRT

If the mains voltage is 5s after the begining of VRT still stay out of the voltage band ±10%Umains there could be
still the circuit breaker threaten by release of their protection evaluated unit.
In that case we have to correct the situation by changing the actual power to keep the circuit breaker closed.
Controller activates the LBO: EVENT - POST VRT (PAGE 512) and base on the setting the
setpoint:PostVRTonIM (page 341) will be provided following action:
DISABLED - controller only activates the LBO when the voltage is more than ±10%Umains for a maximal
time of 60s.
Note: In this situation is expected cooperation with appropriate FW on gen-set side, where the controller on the
gen-set side will control his generator power according the nominal generator current.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 145

 Note:

ENABLED - controller activates the LBO with same condition as above but simultaneously watches the
current exported to mains. If the current is higher than nominal, the Active power req is reduced according
the appropriate ramp so long until the current equal or lower than nominal.
If the voltage is outside the band for the time longer than 60s we have to evaluated the standard mains
protection.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 146

 Image 4.44 Mains voltage after VRT situation

Reduction of the power during this state is provided by new EVENT - POST VRT (PAGE 512) with all the
consequent settings PostVRTPr (page 331) and PostVRT (page 335).

Reactive power control

PF control based on actual Gen-set power

PF(Pm) regulation
Reactive power shall be able to adjust itself automatically in correspondence to predefined PF upon a change in
the active power.
For activation of this function Setpoint: Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205)has to be switched to PF
(Pm). In this case the power factor is controlled based on actual generator power. In this case the required
power factor will be controlled via User sensor curve PF(P) prepared in GenConfig.
If there is requirement for control the power factor from imported/exported power to the mains, Setpoint:
Process Control: PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page 206)has to be switched to ENABLED.
Actual required value of power factor is visible in Value: Bin outputs CU: PF(P) Curve (page 423) and
Voltage/PF Control: Required PF3dc (page 421).
The curve is defined as:
x-axe – TotRunPact (page 417)/TotRunPnomAll (page 417)*100
y-axe – PFrequired

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 147

 Image 4.45 PF(Pm) curve example

Note: In case the Setpoint PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) is switched to ENABLED the Wrn PF(P)Fail is
immediately activated because the PF'(Pm) mode is not able to control via LAI.

Note: The Wrn PF(P)Fail gets active also when the PF(P) curve is not configured.

PF-Import/Export(Pm) regulation
If there is requirement for control of the power factor based on imported/exported power to the mains, Setpoint:
Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205)has to be switched to PF(Pm) and the PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page
206)has to be switched to ENABLED.
Because this function works for imported and exported power as well, x-axis is used in range -100 % – +100 %
of nominal power to mains (MainsImport (page 391)).
Y-axis shows power factor measured on the mains site Mains PF (page 393).
Actual required value of power factor is visible in Values: PF(P) Curve (page 423) and Required PF3dc (page
421) PF(P) Curve (page 423) and Required PF3dc (page 421).

Image 4.46 PF-IM/EX(Pm) curve example

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 148

 In case import/export mode is chosen and the setting is not correct or the Mains import is not measured. The
alarm Wrn PFQ IE Fail gets active and the requested value is taken from setpoint Base PF.

Q control

Q control – fixed Q required

There is requirement for capacitive or inductive required reactive power.
For activation of this function Setpoint: Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205)has to be switched to Q
control.
Required reactive power can be adjusted with Setpoint: Process Control: #SysBaseQ (page 197)and actual
relative value of required reactive power is visible in Value: Voltage/PF Control: Required Q (page 421).

Fixed Q required via analog input

Required reactive power can be also adjusted via analog value.
For activation of this function Setpoint: Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) has to be switched to Q
control and PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206)has to be switched to ENABLED.
Required reactive power can be adjusted with LAI: ANEXSYSBASEQ (PAGE 535).
In case the LAI: ANEXSYSBASEQ (PAGE 535)is not configured or contains invalid value than BASEQ control is
used and the Wrn QctrlFail is activated.

Q – Import/Export
In the mode Setpoint: Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) - Q control, PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page 206) -
ENABLED the controller controls reactive power to maintain constant imported or exported reactive power.
Required reactive power is set by fixed Setpoint: Process Control: Import Q (page 200).
Note: In case of Import/Export functions has to be measured the active and reactive power on mains site with
either LAI: MLC:I/E-PM (PAGE 538) and MPF:I/E-QM (PAGE 539) or with CT Inputs. Both Setpoints: Process
Control: I/E-Pm meas (page 207) and I/E-Qm meas (page 208) must be set accordingly otherwise the alarm
Wrn PFQ IE Fail gets active and the requested value is taken from setpoint #SysBaseQ (page 197).

Analog External Q – Import/Export

In the mode Setpoint: Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) – Q control, PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page 206) -
ENABLED, PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) – ENABLED the controller controls reactive power to maintain
constant imported or exported reactive power given by analog input.
Required reactive power is set by external value configured in GenConfig: LAI: ANEXMQI/E (PAGE 534).
Note: In case of Import/Export functions has to be measured the active and reactive power on mains site with
either LAI: MLC:I/E-PM (PAGE 538) and MPF:I/E-QM (PAGE 539) or with CT Inputs. Both Setpoints: Process
Control: I/E-Pm meas (page 207) and I/E-Qm meas (page 208) must be set accordingly otherwise the alarm
Wrn PFQ IE Fail gets active and the requested value is taken from setpoint #SysBaseQ (page 197).

Q(Um) control

Q(Um) – regulation
Gen-set reactive power is regulated based on actual mains voltage when the Setpoint: Process Control:
PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) is switched to Q(Um).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 149

 Image 4.47 Q(Um) regulation

Mains voltage can be measured on Mains Voltage terminals and specified by Setpoint: Basic settings:
MainsNomV (page 227) or Mains medium voltage measured via LAI: MainsMidVolt (page 537) configured in
GenConfig and specified by Setpoint: Basic settings: MainsNomMidV (page 244).
Increasing or decreasing of the mains voltage causes the change of required reactive power, this value is visible
in Values: Bin outputs CU: Q(Um) Curve (page 422) which shows the immediate value.
Actual reactive power is changed according to ramp which is defined by Setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: Q Ramp
(page 342) and actual value is visible in Values: Voltage/PF Control: Required Q (page 421).
Note: In case the Q(Um) curve is not configured or is wrongly adjusted the Q control mode is used and the Wrn
Q(Um)Fail alarm is activated.

Q(Um) curve offset

The Q(Um) curve can be moved by adjusting the Setpoint: Q0(Um)ref (page 343), this Setpoint moves the
reference point of mains nominal voltage.
There is implemented Q(Um)DeadBand (page 344) which is deadband for measured mains voltage in case the
mains voltage changes to fast.

Q(Um) curve offset via analog input

By configuration LAI AnExQ0UmRef (page 534) can be the Q(Um) curve moved via analog input.
The PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) must be switched to Q(Um), PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) – must be switched to
ENABLED.

Q-Import/Export(Um) – regulation
Imported or exported mains reactive power Qm is changed based on actual mains voltage.
This mode is activated by the Setpoint: Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) - Q(Um), PF/Qctrl IM/EX
(page 206) - ENABLED.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 150

 Image 4.48 Q(Um) regulation by Import/Export enable

As mains voltage is used either nominal voltage measured on Mains Voltage terminals and specified by
Setpoint: Basic settings: MainsNomV (page 227) and Vm VT ratio (page 225) or nominal middle voltage
measured via LAI: MainsMidVolt (page 537) configured in GenConfig and specified by Setoint: Basic settings:
MainsNomMidV (page 244) and VmMid VT ratio (page 245).
Increasing or decreasing of the mains voltage cause the change of required reactive power, this value is visible
in Values: Bin outputs CU: Q(Um) Curve (page 422) which shows the immediate value.
Note: If the QUCurve is not configured, power factor is controlled as chosen mode Q control and the Wrn Q
(Um)Fail is activated.

Actual reactive power is changed according to ramp which is defined by Setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: Q Ramp
(page 342) and actual value is visible in Values: Mains: Mains Q (page 391).
Q(Um) import/export curve offset
The Q(Um) curve can be moved by adjusting the Setpoint: Q0(Um)ref (page 343), this Setpoint moves the
reference point of mains nominal voltage.
There is implemented Q(Um)DeadBand (page 344) which is deadband for measured mains voltage in case the
mains voltage changes to fast.
Q(Um) import/export curve offset via analog input
By configuration LAI PFCtrl:AnExQ0I/EUmRe can be the Q(Um) curve moved via analog input.
The PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) must be switched to Q(Um), PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) – must be switched to
ENABLED, PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page 206) - must be switched to ENABLED.

Q(P) – Q control based on actual Gen-set power

Q(P) regulation
Reactive power shall be able to adjust itself automatically in correspondence to predefined Q upon a change in
the active power.
For activation of this function Setpoint: Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) has to be switched to Q(P).
In this case the power factor is controlled based on actual generator power. In this case the required power
factor will be controlled via User sensor curve Q(P) prepared in GenConfig.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 151

 Image 4.49 Q(P) regulation

The curve is defined as:

x-axe – TotRunPact (page 417)/TotRunPnomAll (page 417)*100
y-axe – TotRun Q (page 406)/TotRunSamax (page 423)*100
Actual required value of power factor is visible in Bin outputs CU: Q(P) Curve (page 422) and in Voltage/PF
Control: Required Q (page 421).
Note: In case the Setpoint PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) is switched to ENABLED the Wrn Q(P)Fail is
immediately activated because the Q(Pm) mode is not able to control via LAI.

Note: The Wrn Q(P)Fail gets active also when the Q(P) curve is not configured.

Q-Import/Export(P) regulation
If there is requirement for control of the reactive power based on imported/exported power to the mains,
Setpoint: Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) has to be switched to Q(P) and the PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page
206) has to be switched to ENABLED.
Because this function works for imported and exported power as well, x-axis is used in range -100 % – +100 %
of nominal power to mains (P mains).
Y-axis shows reactive power measured on the mains site.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 152

 Image 4.50 Q(P) regulation in Import/Export mode

Actual required value of power factor is visible in Values: Q(P) Curve (page 422) and Mains Q (page 391).
In case import/export mode is chosen and the setting is not correct or the Mains import is not measured. The
alarm Wrn PFQ IE Fail gets active and the requested value is taken from setpoint Base PF.

Qref/Ulim

Qref/Ulim – regulation
Gen-set reactive power is regulated based on actual mains voltage when the Setpoint: Process Control:
PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) is switched to Qref/Ulim.

Image 4.51 Qref/Ulim regulation

Mains voltage can be measured on Mains Voltage terminals and specified by Setpoint: Basic settings:
MainsNomV (page 227) and Vm VT ratio (page 225) or Mains medium voltage measured via LAI:
MainsMidVolt (page 537) configured in GenConfig and specified by Setpoint: Basic settings: MainsNomMidV
(page 244) and VmMid VT ratio (page 245).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 153

 Increasing or decreasing of the mains voltage causes the change of required reactive power, this value is visible
in Values: Bin outputs CU: QrefUlim Curve (page 422) which shows the immediate value.
Actual reactive power is changed according to ramp which is defined by Setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: Q Ramp
(page 342) and actual value is visible in Values: Voltage/PF Control: Required Q (page 421).
Note: In case the Qref/Ulim curve is not configured or is wrongly adjusted the Base Q control mode is used and
the Wrn QrfUlimFail alarm is activated.

Qref/Ulim curve offset

The Qref/Ulim curve can be moved by adjusting the Setpoint: Qref/PnomShift (page 345), this Setpoint moves
the reference point of mains nominal voltage.
There is implemented QrefUlimDdBand (page 346) which is dead band for measured mains voltage in case
the mains voltage changes to fast.
Qref/Ulim curve offset via analog input
By configuration LAI AnExQref/Pnom (page 534) can be the Qref/Ulim curve moved via analog input.
The PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) must be switched to Qref/Ulim, PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) - must be switched
to ENABLED.

Qref/Ulim-Import/Export – regulation
Imported or exported mains reactive power Qm is changed based on actual mains voltage.
This mode is activated by the Setpoint: Process Control: PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) - Qref/Ulim, PF/Qctrl
IM/EX (page 206) - ENABLED.

Image 4.52 Qref/Ulim regulation in Import/Export mode

Mains voltage can be measured on Mains Voltage terminals and specified by Setpoint: Basic settings:
MainsNomV (page 227) and Vm VT ratio (page 225) or Mains medium voltage measured via LAI:
MainsMidVolt (page 537) configured in GenConfig and specified by Setpoint: Basic settings: MainsNomMidV
(page 244) and VmMid VT ratio (page 245).
Increasing or decreasing of the mains voltage causes the change of required reactive power on the mains side,
this value is visible in Values: Bin outputs CU: QrefUlim Curve (page 422) which shows the immediate value.
Actual reactive power is changed according to ramp which is defined by Setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: Q Ramp
(page 342) and actual value is visible in Values: Mains: Mains Q (page 391).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 154

 Note: If the QUCurve is not configured, power factor is controlled as chosen mode Q control and the Wrn
Qref/UlimFail is activated.

Qref/Ulim curve offset

The Qref/Ulim curve can be moved by adjusting the Setpoint: Qref/PnomShift (page 345), this Setpoint moves
the reference point of mains nominal voltage.
There is implemented QrefUlimDdBand (page 346) which is dead band for measured mains voltage in case
the mains voltage changes to fast.
Qref/Ulim import/export curve offset via analog input
By configuration LAI AnExQrfI/EPnom (page 534) can be the Qref/Ulim curve moved via analog input.
The PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) must be switched to Qref/Ulim, PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) - must be switched
to ENABLED, PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page 206) - must be switched to ENABLED.

Connection conditions and synchronization

Network reconnection conditions
Common requirements
Mains Voltage on the mains connection point must be between 90% and 110% Unom, value is based on the
lowest value of phase-phase voltage.
Mains frequency on the mains connection point must be between 47.5 Hz and 50.2 Hz.
This requirements are present in the configuration as following setpoints.
Sync/Load ctrl:MainsSyncVMax (page 347)[MainsSyncVMin – 130]% of Mains Nominal voltage.
Parameter defines maximum allowable Mains voltage to be able to allow connection to the grid.
Sync/Load ctrl:MainsSyncVMin (page 347) [10 – MainsSyncVMax]% of Mains Nominal voltage.
Parameter defines minimum allowable Mains voltage to be able to allow connection to the grid.
Sync/Load ctrl:MainsSyncFMax (page 348) [0.00 – 52.0] Hz. Parameter defines maximum allowable
Mains frequency to be able to allow connection to the grid.
Sync/Load ctrl:MainsSyncFMin (page 348) [47.5– 0.00] Hz. Parameter defines minimum allowable Mains
frequency to be able to allow connection to the grid.
In case the mains values are out of these limits, gen-set will not started (the system start/stop signal is
deactivated) and if the gen-set is already running the Alarm "SyncNotAllowed" is activated and the gen-set is
forced to stop (Start/stop signal is deactivated).
Note: Alarm is active only until the last gen-set is running on the bus, when the last gen-set is disconnected
from the bus the Alarm is deactivated.

Note: In parallel mode is this protection no more evaluated.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 155

 Image 4.53 MainsSyncAllow

Mains connection and synchronization after mains fail

When the mains fail happens (mains protection active) there is a requirement to prevent the connection to the
unstable mains.
In this situation there are another limits to evaluate the stability of the mains.
The limits are given by following setpoints:
Sync/Load ctrl:MP SyncVMax (page 348) [MainsSyncVMin – 130]% of Mains Nominal voltage.
Parameter defines maximum allowable Mains voltage to be able to allow reconnection to the grid.
Sync/Load ctrl:MP SyncVMin (page 349) [10 - MainsSyncVMax]% of Mains Nominal voltage. Parameter
defines minimum allowable Mains voltage to be able to allow reconnection to the grid.
Sync/Load ctrl:MP SyncFMax (page 349) [MainsSyncFMin – 52.0] Hz. Parameter defines maximum
allowable Mains frequency to be able to allow reconnection to the grid.
Sync/Load ctrl:MP SyncFMin (page 349) [47.5– MainsSyncFMax] Hz. Parameter defines minimum
allowable Mains frequency to be able to allow reconnection to the grid.
Sync/Load ctrl:MP SyncTLong (page 350) [0 - 600] s. Parameter defines minimum time the Mains
frequency and voltage has to be within above mentioned limits to start the Mains reconnection in case of
Long term mains failure. During the time when the timer is active and Mains parameters are OK, there is
activated alarm message: SyncNotAllowed.
After mains return the MP SyncTLong timer is counted down and during this time is active alarm
"SyncNotAllowed".
During this time are evaluated mains parameters according limits adjusted by these setpoint (MP Sync...).
When the mains values goes outside these limits, the MP SyncTLong time is reseted until the values are back
in the limits, then the timer starts to count again from beginning.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 156

 Image 4.54 Reconnection after mains fail MCB off and GCB on

Image 4.55 Reconnection after mains fail MCB on and GCB off

Alternator operation area

New power factor and reactive power limitation
The alternator operation area was so far restricted by fix borders and it was possible to require PF in range 0.6L
up to 0.8C.
It is possible to adjust the alternator operation area in more details, using the graphical curve in GenConfig: User
sensors – curve: CapabilityQ L (for inductive operation area) and CapabilityQ C (for capacitive operation area).
The curves represent inductive and capacitive halves of the PQ diagram, where on the x-axes there is the ratio:
TotRunPact/TotRunPnomAll and on the y-axis there is TotRun Q/TotRunSamax.
X-axes or Y-axes is in this case variable according to connected gen-sets to the bus and the result is sume of
their Installed power or Samax power.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 157

 The CapabilityQ L and CapabilityQ C curves have the following default shape, which correspond to the original
limits of 0.6L and 0.8C.
Note: These curves can be adjusted based on the alternator operation area.

Image 4.56 CapabilityQ L

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 158

 Image 4.57 CapabilityQ C

Image 4.58 Example of generator working area

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 159

 Active power reduction to achieve required reactive power
PforQ function
The Grid codes connection requirements, namely for the Medium voltage system, require a possibility of gen-
set active power reduction in order to achieve given, required Reactive power.
This function, restricting the Active power in order to achieve the required Reactive power is enabled by
setpoint: Sync/Load ctrl: PforQlimit (page 346) with options: ENABLED / DISABLED, by default set to
DISABLED.
As first we have to define the generator operating area.

Reactive power establishment in case of nominal power

Image 4.59 UQ area

Each unit has to be able to reach the above mentioned requirements.

The reactive power requirement is in dependent on the value of mains voltage in compare to nominal mains
voltage.
Active power could be reduced only in case the dependence of reactive power on the mains voltage will be
inside the grey area.
Area for function is defined by user curve configurable in GenConfig.
Nominal power is taken as 5% dead band around the setpoint nominal power.
We will have 2 curves, one for L part and one for C part
UQ-L curve – x is Umains (%), y is Q (%)
UQ-C curve – x is Umains (%), y is Q (%)
First part of value defines the required reactive power Q and second part defines the mains voltage reference to
nominal Umains.
This area defines which Q i have to be able to reach.
I have other inputs of Q regulation and this Q will be limited by this area.
Example: We have from some other function request to run the Gen-set with some capacitive value of Q
(over excited, übererregt). Afterwords the mains voltage changes to 1.1 of nominal Umains. In this case the
working area UQ limits the Q, that i am not allowed to run any capacitive value of Q.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 160

Reactive power establishment in case the actual power is below the nominal power
When the actual power is under the nominal power the actual power is allowed to reduce only in case the final
point will fulfill the P/Q diagram below:

Image 4.60 PQ curve

Note: When the actual power is below the 10 % of nominal power, the power reduction is not required but there
is possible to keep the hatched area. (This is in case of Gen-sets mostly irrelevant because most of Gen-sets
are limited on minimum running power).

The area is defined by next 2 user curves:

PQ-L curve – x is P (%), y is Q (%)
PQ-C curve – x is P (%), y is Q (%)
First part of value defines the required reactive power Q and second part defines the actual power value.
This area defines which Q i have to be able to reach.
I have other inputs of Q regulation and this Q will be limited by this area.
Generally the both areas are as limited areas to the adjusted generator working area in the configuration tool.
We can imagine the functionality as pictures bellow.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 161

 Image 4.61 Example of alternator area with PQ area

Image 4.62 Example of part of alternator area with UQ area

Image 4.63 PforQ functional diagram

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 162

 Here is clearly visible, that the area allow us to run with 0.33C or L of Q until the nominal power, but because of
the generator operating area it is not possible, we can reduce the power to reach the nearest point of Q by
highest P.
In other words, this limitation also says, that I am not strictly forced to run or limit my active power to reach the
Q which is higher than is in the grey area defined.
The power reduction ramp is defined by setpoint PforQ (page 334), the priority of this is defined by setpoint
PforQPr (page 330).
Following logical outputs are available to help with understanding the actual situation during the PforQ function:
PQ-C AREALIM (PAGE 512)
PQ-L AREALIM (PAGE 512)
UQ-C AREALIM (PAGE 522)
UQ-L AREALIM (PAGE 522)
PFORQACTIVE (PAGE 512)
GENCAPCLIM (PAGE 499)
GENCAPLLIM (PAGE 499)

PforQ dead band

To prevent the unwanted oscilation of active power due to fast change of requirement Q, there is available
setpoint PforQDeadBand (page 347). The P will be reduced only in case the change of Q will be higher than
the value of the setpoint. The range of the setpoint is 0...100% Q/TotRunSamax.

New ramps used for Gen-set loading/unloading

Active power ramps
Mainly because of the Grid codes requirements, there were added new ramps which are used for control of
active power.
The Grid codes requirements lead to need of different loading ramps in various situations based on current and
recent network values. In total there are implemented 3 ramps for Active power control which are used
accordingly in different situations.
The Active power ramps are called: Slow load ramp, Fast load ramp and Load ramp and are placed in a new
setpoint group: Bus Settings.
There are defined few scenarios related to Grid code requirements, with fixed conditions. These scenarios,
called Events are linked with dedicated loading ramps (Fast load ramp (page 327), Load ramp (page 327) or
Slow Load ramp (page 326)) and with Priority of such an event in case more events are active in the same
time.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 163

 Image 4.64 Active power ramps

Priorities of the events

For the cases, when more of the aforementioned Events are active at once, there were added Priorities of each
Event, which decides, what ramp (Fast load ramp (page 327), Load ramp (page 327) or Slow Load ramp
(page 326)) shall be used in such a case. Lower number of priority wins against higher number of priority
(Priority 1 is the highest one).
In total, there are the following parameters in setpoint group: Bus Settings.
[1 / 2 / 3 / … / 254 / OFF], default 4. Parameter describes the Priority of Event MainsFrqRisePr (page 328)
in case more events are active at once.
[1 / 2 / 3 / … / 254 / OFF], default 5. Parameter describes the Priority of Event MainsFrqFallPr (page 328) in
case more events are active at once.
[1 / 2 / 3 / … / 254 / OFF], default 3. Parameter describes the Priority of Event MainsTripPerPr (page 329)
in case more events are active at once.
[1 / 2 / 3 / … / 254 / OFF], default 7. Parameter describes the Priority of Event LoadReductPr (page 329) in
case more events are active at once.
[1 / 2 / 3 / … / 254 / OFF], default 6. Parameter describes the Priority of Event PforQPr (page 330) in case
more events are active at once.
[1 / 2 / 3 / … / 254 / OFF], default 1. Parameter describes the Priority of Event SoftUnloadPr (page 330) in
case more events are active at once.
[1 / 2 / 3 / … / 254 / OFF], default 2. Parameter describes the Priority of Event PostVRTPr (page 331) in
case more events are active at once.
[1 / 2 / 3 / … / 254 / OFF], default 2. Parameter describes the Priority of Event RetOvUnFreqPr (page 331)
in case more events are active at once.

Types of the event ramps

There is possibility to configure for every event different type of ramp.
In total, there are the following parameters in setpoint group: Bus Settings.
[SLOW LOAD RAMP / LOAD RAMP / FAST LOAD RAMP], default LOAD RAMP. Parameter defines what
load ramp will be used in case Event MainsFrqRise (page 332) is active.
[SLOW LOAD RAMP / LOAD RAMP / FAST LOAD RAMP], default SLOW LOAD RAMP. Parameter
defines what load ramp will be used in case Event MainsFrqFall (page 332) is active.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 164

 [SLOW LOAD RAMP / LOAD RAMP / FAST LOAD RAMP], default FAST LOAD RAMP. Parameter
defines what load ramp will be used in case Event LoadReduct (page 333) is active.
[SLOW LOAD RAMP / LOAD RAMP / FAST LOAD RAMP], default SLOW LOAD RAMP. Parameter
defines what load ramp will be used in case Event MainsTripPer (page 333) is active.
[SLOW LOAD RAMP / LOAD RAMP / FAST LOAD RAMP], default LOAD RAMP. Parameter defines what
load ramp will be used in case Event PforQ (page 334) is active.
[SLOW LOAD RAMP / LOAD RAMP / FAST LOAD RAMP], default LOAD RAMP. Parameter defines what
load ramp will be used in case Event SoftUnload (page 334) is active.
[SLOW LOAD RAMP / LOAD RAMP / FAST LOAD RAMP], default LOAD RAMP. Parameter defines what
load ramp will be used in case Event PostVRT (page 335) is active.
[SLOW LOAD RAMP / LOAD RAMP / FAST LOAD RAMP], default LOAD RAMP. Parameter defines what
load ramp will be used in case Event RetOvUnFreq (page 335) is active.

4.8.13 Automatic Mains Failure function

InteliMains-NT MCB or MGCB application contains complex AMF function. There are several setpoints that
allows user to adjust the function behavior.
When the Mains fail (Mains failure is determined based on existing fixed or custom protections that are set to be
Mains protect or Mains protect with Reset – for more information on protection types please refer to the chapter
Protections and Alarm management) the system is started with adjustable delay (AMF setting:EmergStart del)
– i.e. logical binary output SYS START/STOP activates. This output should be wired (or shared via CAN) to
gen-set controllers logical binary input SYS START/STOP.

In some cases it may be crucial to choose when the MCB opens after Mains failure (i.e. when there is protection
of Mains protect or Mains protect with Reset type active). It is possible to choose whether the breaker opens
directly when Mains failure is detected or when there is healthy bus voltage detected (MGCB only) or when
there is at least one gen-set running. This is done via setpoint AMF setting:MCB opens on.

When the Mains parameters become OK again it is possible to adjust the delay time which must elapse before
InteliMains-NT starts the return to Mains procedure. This delay is adjusted by AMF setting:Mains ret del. This
function is particularly useful when the Mains fail happens several times in a row with short period of Mains
being OK.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 165

 It is also possible to choose option that return to Mains needs manual confirmation before InteliMains-NT starts
the return procedure. You can choose this by setpoint AMF setting:RetFromIsland. For the full description of
manual confirmation of return procedure refer to the decription of the setpoint.

By default return to Mains (when the Mains parameters are OK again and AMF setting:Mains ret del elapses) is
done by reverse synchronization of gen-set group back to Mains, soft unload of gen-sets and opening of their
GCBs or by opening MGCB (in case of MGCB application).
When it is not possible to synchronize to Mains (Parallel operation is not enabled, Synchronization is not
enabled, Synchronization is unsuccesfull etc.), return with break may be enabled to ensure that the load returns
to Mains even though parallel operation is not possible. AMF setting:ReturnWithIntr enables the return with
break (the duration of the break is given by the setpoint AMF setting:FwRet break). If return with break is
disabled and it is not (for whatever reason) possible to synchronize back to Mains, the systems stays running in
Island operation even though the Mains is OK.

In some cases there may be no gen-sets running during the Mains fail (e.g. they are not able to start, not able to
start in time, there may be alarms on all the gen-sets, they are not in AUT mode etc.). In this case AMF function
recloses MCB back to healthy Mains after delay given by AMF setting:MCB close del elapses.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 166

 In MGCB application there is also setting for the duration of breaker overlap available. This time (given by the
setpoint AMF setting:BreakerOverlap) defines maximal time for run in parallel during return to once again
healthy Mains (even though soft unloading is not completed, after AMF setting:BreakerOverlap elapses the
MGCB is opened regardless of load on gen-sets).

In the version IM-NT-3.1.0, there has been change in the behaviour of logical binary output Sys start/stop in
AMF function. This behaviour prevents repetitive starting and stopping of gen-sets in case of fluctuating Mains
parameters. The following diagram shows what the behaviour is now.
The change influences the situation when the Mains parameters are not OK, AMF start sequence is initiated but
before gen-sets are capable to support the load Mains goes OK again. Previously the gen-sets were stopped
immediately and the AMF setting:MCB close delay was counted down. Now the gen-sets are kept in start
sequence until the MCB is really closed. This prevents prolongued periods of time when the no power was
delivered to the load if Mains parameters kept fluctuating, preventing continuous connection to Mains but also
succesfull start and run of a gen-set group.

4.8.14 Regulation loops

There are following regulation loops built-in in the controller. All of them are PI type except angle loop, which is P
type.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 167

 The frequency loop is active in the following situations depending on the application.
For more information see the table below.

Application Freq gain and Freg int setpopints are active during:
reverse synchronization of the gen-set group back to the
Frequency Loop MCB
mains
forward or reverse synchronization of the gen-set group
MGCB
to the mains

When the Sync/Load ctrl:Freq gain is set to zero, this control loop is switched OFF.
The differential angle control loop is active during the synchronization (see Frequency
loop above) when the "near to zero" slip frequency has been successfuly achieved and
Angle Loop then the differential angle between bus and mains voltage shall be controlled to the
value adjusted by the setpoint Sync/Load ctrl:BtoM AngleReq (Angle Gain (page
320)).
This regulation loop is active if setpoint ProcessControl:SysLdCtrl PtM is set to
LoadControl LDSHARING.
Loop Requested power is regulated depending on the setting of ProcessControl:MLoad ctrl
PtM.
The Voltage loop is active in the following situations dependending on the application.
For more information see the table below:

Application Freq gain and Freg int setpopints are active during:
reverse synchronization of the gen-set group back to the
MCB
Voltage Loop mains
forward or reverse synchronization of the gen-set group
MGCB
to the mains
BTB synchronization between “left” and “right” buses

When the Voltage gain is set to zero, this control loop is switched OFF.
This regulation loop is active if setpoint ProcessControl:SysPFCtrl PtM is set to
VSHARING.
ProcessControl:SysLdCtrl PtM should be swithed to LDSHARING.
The IM power factor control mode is selected by the setpoint ProcessControl:PF ctrl
PF Loop
PtM.
ProcessControl:MLoad ctrl PtM should be set to the same value as ProcessControl:PF
ctrl PtM. Due to this Cos-phi regulation loop can be active only in the Import/Export
mode.

PI regulation adjustment
The regulation loops have two adjustable factors: P-factor and I-factor (except angle regulation loop, which has
P-factor only). The P-factor (gain) influences the stability and overshoot of the regulation loop and the I-factor
influences the steady-state error as well as the settling time. See the picture below for typical responses of a PI
regulation loop.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 168

 Image 4.65 Typical responses of a PI regulator

For manual tunning of a control loop use following method:

Set both the I-factor and P-factor to 0.
Increase the P-factor slightly until the system starts to oscillate.
Adjust the P-factor back to approx. one half of the value where the oscillations started.
Increase the I-factor slightly to achieve optimal resulting response.

Note: It may be helpful to disable issuing the breaker close command when adjusting synchronization loops.
Adjust the setpoint Phase window to 0 to disable it. Adjust the setpoint back to its original value after the
adjustment is finished.

IMPORTANT: Be ready to press emergency stop button in case the regulation loop would start to
behave unacceptable while it is beeing adjusted.

4.8.15 Force value – step by step guide

In this chapter there is complete step by step guide which shows how to use Force value function of the
controller.
Forcing of values is used to change particular setpoint temporarily by activation of related Binary Input. This is
used to change function of controller under given conditions (e.g. there are two different periods during the day
when Export limit given by distribution network is required or not).
IMPORTANT: Setpoints must not be written continuously (e.g. via Modbus connection)! If
continuous change of setpoints is required, combination of External values and Force value
function needs to be used. The memory that holds setpoints is designed for up to 105 writings.
Than memory may be damaged!

Setpoints that are available for forcing may be identified by Force value button on the right side in GenConfig
(see the figure below).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 169

 When the button is clicked, Force value dialog appears:

For example if we add Force value:Force value 1 to be forced to ProcessControl:Export limit as value 0
(DISABLED) by Binary Input FORCEVALUEIN 1 we can change the function of Export limit from ENABLED to
DISABLED by activation of FORCEVALUEIN 1. It is possible to rename the setpoint to e.g. Force
value:ExportDisabled and Binary Input as well to e.g. DISABLEEXPLIM. The function will not change (only the
corresponding names).
It is possible to use several force value functions for one setpoint. If more than one forcing Binary Input is
active, the one with the highest position (lowest number in the Force value dialog) is used.
It is possible as well to use one Binary Input to force multiple setpoints (e.g. in case of complex function
change).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 170

 Note: It is possible only to force value or setpoint into other setpoint if their dimension and range are the same
(e.g. only value with dimension in hours and which is Integer 16 can be force valued to a setpoint with
dimension hours and which is as well Integer 16). You may use PLC block Convert to change the dimension
and range if needed.

4.8.16 Values for continuous writing from external sources

This function is especially designed for continuous writing of setpoints from external sources (e.g. via Modbus
connection).
IMPORTANT: Setpoints must not be written continuously (e.g. via Modbus connection)! If
continuous change of setpoints is required, combination of External values and Force value
function needs to be used. The memory that holds setpoints is designed for up to 105 writings.
Than memory may be damaged!

It is possible to use up to four different External values for continuous writing from external sources. The values
are adjusted by setpoints in Force value group. Default (also initial) value may be adjusted, rate of change of
ExtValueX (by Binary Inputs EXTVALUEX UP and EXTVALUEX DOWN) can be adjusted as well as high and
low limit of the value.
There are two way, how to adjust External values. One is using Binary Inputs mentioned above. Second one is
to write the value directly using e.g. Modbus. External values then may be converted using PLC block convert
and force into setpoint which is then continuously forced (note: NOT WRITTEN) by the value of ExtValueX.
This way internal memory is safe and no damage may occur.
External values are reverted back to their default (initial) value (given by corresponding setpoint) when Binary
Input for their reset is active (and they change to the previous value after Binary Input deactivates). When the
Binary Input is active the External value cannot be changed by Modbus writing or by using Binary Inputs for up
and down value.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 171

 Note: External values are not available for external writing when any Binary Input (up, down or reset) related to
them is active.
Note also that when the controller is reset (powered down and up again), all external values are reverted back to
their default (initial) values.

Note: For information on how to write (or read) objects from controller via Modbus, please refer to the latest
Communication guide for InteliGen and InteliSys.

4.8.17 General Purpose Timers

There are 16 general-purpose timers in the controller, each 4 of them are joined together to one output. That
means there are 4 fully independent timer blocks including 4 timer channels each. The combined outputs from
the timer blocks are TIMERACT 1-4, TIMERACT 5-8, TIMERACT 9- 12 AND TIMERACT 13-16.
The timers are intended for scheduling of any operations such as e.g. periodic tests of the gen-set, scheduled
transfer of the load to the gen-set prior to an expected disconection of the mains etc. Each timer channel can be
activated only once within a single day. The activation time and duration of each channel is adjustable (both as
hh:mm).

Timer modes
Available modes of each timer:

This is a single shot mode. The timer will be activated only once at preset date/time for
Once
preset duration.
The timer is activated every "x-th" day. The day period "x" is adjustable. Weekends can be
Daily
excluded. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd day excluding saturdays and sundays.
The timer is activated every "x-th" week on selected weekdays. The week period "x" is
Weekly
adjustable. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd week on monday and friday.
The timer is activated every "x-th" month on the selected day. The requested day can be
Monthly selected either as "y-th" day in the month or as "y-th" weekday in the month. E.g. the timer
can be adjusted to every 1st month on 1st tuesday.
The timer is repeated with adjusted period (hh:mm). The timer duration is included in the
Short period
period.

The mode of each timer channel is adjusted by an assigned setpoint. The setpoints are located int the Timer
settings group and can be adjusted via InteliMonitor and GenConfig.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 172

 Example: Below is an example how to use the timers for periodic tests of the gen-set performed every
sunday with duration of 30 minutes and also for scheduled transfer of the load before expected mains failure
announced by the local electricity distribution company to 1.5.2010 from 01:00 to 04:00.
The output TIMERACT 1-4 is configured internally in GenConfig (LBI tab) to the logical binary inputs
REMOTE TEST and TEST ON LOAD.
The setpoint Timer settings:TimerChannel 1 is adjusted to "repeated" mode, "weekly" period, only
sundays, starting date/time next sunday at 0:00, timer duration 0:30 min.

The setpoint Timer settings:TimerChannel 2 is adjusted to "once" mode, starting date/time 1.5.2010
at 01:00, timer duration 3:00 hrs.

4.8.18 History Related functions

History Records Adjustment
It is possible to change History records content. Each record contains date, time and cause of the record as
obligatory columns. The rest of columns are configurable.
The history record structure has two parts. The upper part is so-called fast and is written into the history memory
immediately in the moment when the written event occurs. The rest of the record may be written with a delay
max. 100 ms. The fast part is intended for fast changing values as e.g. currents, voltages or power. The parts
are separated by a line in the record content list.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 173

 1. Values selection tree
2. Buttons for adding / removing values into / from the record structure
3. Buttons for ordering of the values in the record structure
4. Fast history separator. The fast part is located above the separator
5. Estimated number of records depending on record size
6. Record capacity usage indicator
Note: Values that are displayed in green color are recommended to be placed in the fast part.
If the checkbox Add modules to history automatically.. in the Modules tab is checked then all values of a
module are automatically added into the history record when the module is inserted into the configuration.

Time Stamp function

The controller allows user to define when the history records are written even though there is no other reason for
history record (so called Time Stamp).
It is possible to disable time stamping function (for example when time stamping is not needed and just floods
the history). It may be conditioned by activation of logical Binary Input function (TIME STAMP ACT) or it may be
enabled always.
Period of time stamping may be adjusted from 1 to 240 minutes.
Note: Beware of History flooding by to many Time Stamps (vital information may be overwritten).

Time and Date Intercontroller Sharing

Time and Date are used mainly for History records. These values are shared between controllers that are
connected to CAN . When the value is changed in one controller, it sends its new value to all other controllers
that are connected to the same CAN bus and they update their time and date values and setpoints accordingly.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 174

 Summer Time Mode
Summer Time Mode function may be enabled and disabled by user. It is possible to set if the controller is
located in the northern or southern hemisphere as well.
SummerTim
eMode implemented in ComAp controllers is based on CET summer time which means:
Clock goes forward 1 hour at 2:00 a.m. on the last Sunday in March
Clock goes backwards 1 hour at 3:00 a.m. on the last Sunday in Octorber

Note: Please be aware that in other regions summer time adjustments may be done in different time.

4.8.19 User Buttons

There are several User Buttons available in the controller. It is possible to set them on Soft Buttons in
InteliVision 5 or 8.

Available functions for soft buttons are listed in the following table:

Pressing the button changes the state of log. Binary Output USER BUTTON X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. Binary Output USER BUTTON X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. Binary Output USER BUTTON X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. Binary Output USER BUTTON X to close for the time given by
setpoint Basic settings:UserBtn pulse (from 0.2 s to 10 s).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing other pulls of
length of the given length to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

Note: It is possible to lock User Button with password (go to tab Commands in GenConfig). User Buttons 1-5,
6-8 and 9-16 can be locked separately. It is also possible to use User Buttons in SCADA diagrams.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 175

4.8.20 Remote Control Function
It is possible to remotely control several Binary Outputs in the controller. You can either use Remote Switches
tool in InteliMonitor (select Remote switches in menu for corresponding controller), import Remote Switches
tool to a SCADA diagram in Line Diagram Editor or use external device via Modbus (register #46361 and
command #26 (1A hex), for more information on Modbus please refer to the InteliGen / InteliSys Communication
guide).
Remote Switch will activate or deactivate depending on remote control so it can be used to manually control
devices, simulate malfunctions while commissioning etc.

Image 4.66 Remote Switches tool in InteliMonitor,

Remote Switches tools in Line Diagram Editor and Modbus commands

Remote Switches may be easily used to trigger logical Binary Input function and all other related functions as
normal switch on Binary Input. Module VPIO (Virtual Peripheral Inputs- Outputs) can be added to configuration
and it will copy the state of Remote Switch on virtual output to its counterpart virtual input. Refer to the figure
below for example.

Image 4.67 Using of Remote Switches to trigger logical binary inputs

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 176

4.8.21 Virtual Peripheral Inputs-Outputs (VPIO) module
For InteliMains-NT there are several modules available. One of them is Virtual Peripheral Inputs-Outputs
module which is particularly useful for connection of logical Binary Output functions to logical Binary Input
functions. This way internal controller function may easily trigger other internal controller functions without
unnecessary wiring or usage of PLC functions.
Module is functioning the same way as normal module with 8 outputs and 8 inputs, but the difference is, that
each input copies its counterpart output. It is possible to select any logical Binary Output function for one of the
outputs of VPIO module. Inputs on VPIO module work the same way as standard input of the controller (i.e. it
can be assigned function and protection).
For example of this function please refer to the chapter Remote Control function.

4.8.22 Shared Inputs and Outputs

InteliMains-NT uses the same type of Shared Inputs and Outputs (SHBOUT, SHBIN, SHAIN and SHAOUT
modules) as InteliGen and InteliSys. Thanks to this, it is possible to share Binary and Analog values between all
the controllers via CAN bus, thus saving physical Inputs and Outputs and excess wiring.

Image 4.68 Adding of various modules

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 177

 Image 4.69 Principal Scheme (same for shared Binary I/O and shared Analogue I/O)

Shared Binary Inputs and Outputs may be used exactly in the same way as standard physical Inputs and
Outputs. If SHBIN or SHAIN modules are configured, at least one corresponding module of SHBOUT or
SHAOUT (respectively) is needed. If it is not configured, corresponding protection appears because SHBIN or
SHAIN will be missing. See the figure below for more information.
Note: If SHUTDOWN (RED) protection is chosen, it is interpreted in InteliMains-NT as Mains Protect with
Reset type protection. For more information on Protection types and alarms please refet to the chapter
Protection and Alarms management.

IMPORTANT: For proper function of Shared Binary and Analog Inputs and Outputs, only one
source of Shared Binary or Analog Outputs must be configured (i.e. it is not possible to configure
in one controller SHBOUT1 and to another one as well SHBOUT1).

Note: Controller sends Shared Binary Outputs each 100ms if there are any changes in any bit position. If there
are no changes, controller sends the information with period 1s.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 178

4.8.23 Distributed Binary Inputs and Outputs
InteliMains-NT uses the same type of Distributed Binary Inputs and Outputs (DISTBIN and DISTBOUT
modules) as InteliGen and InteliSys. Thanks to this, it is possible to share Binary and Analog values between all
the controllers via CAN bus, thus saving physical Inputs and Outputs and excess wiring.
DISTBIN and DISTBOUT work in a different way than SHBIN and SHBOUT. Each controller has one pack of
eight DISTBOUT available (if not configured or no function is assigned to any output, it does not broadcast
them). The number of DISTBOUT module is not shown in the configuration and it is always corresponding to the
CAN address of the controller (e.g. the controller with address 5 will be broadcasting DISTBOUT-05 which can
be received if module DISTBIN-05 is configured in another controller. Up to 32 DISTBIN modules can be
configured (meaning that the controller will be receiving all DISTBOUT from all the controller, even his own).
It is not possible to change the name of DISTBIN inputs or add protections.
Example: In the example below you can see 4 controllers with various DISTBIN and DISTBOUT
configuration:

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 179

 Note: If SHUTDOWN (RED) protection is chosen, it is interpreted in InteliMains-NT as Mains Protect with
Reset type protection. For more information on Protection types and alarms please refer to the chapter
Protection and Alarms management.

Note: Controller sends Distributed Binary Outputs each 100 ms if there are any changes in any bit position. If
there are no changes, controller sends the information with period 1 s.

Note: DISTBIN and DISTBOUT function is not available for IM-NT GC controller.

4.8.24 MODBUS
Modbus Reading and Writing
Controller supports Modbus Slave functions (an external device may write or read from a controller). Modbus
registers corresponding to objects in the controller can be exported to text form in GenConfig.

Image 4.70 Exporting of Modbus registers

If Modbus Master function is required extension module I-CB/Modbus connected via CAN1 can be used. For
more information on how to use this module please refer to InteliGen / InteliSys Communication Guide and to I-
CB Edit manual.

User MODBUS
Users can define Modbus registers from 42873 to 43000. Values, setpoints and Alarm states can be specified
for these new Modbus registers to prepare the Modbus protocol for batch reading and writing or to standardize
Modbusprotocol between FW versions or branches.
It is not possible to read or write both standard registers and User Modbus registers in one request (e.g. batch
reading of registers 42998 to 43007 is not possible). It is perfectly fine to separate the request and read User
Modbus registers and standard registers individually.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 180

 Note: User Modbus function is not available for IM-NT GCs controller.

Modbus Switches
The “Modbus Switches” are two Modbus registers dedicated for continuous writing of binary information via
Modbus. Both registers are available on Modbus for simple writing (using command 6 or 16). The particular bits
of these registers are available as binary status for universal use in logical binary outputs of the controller as
“MODBUSSW1 .. MODBUSSW32”. No password is required for writing of those registers (if there is no general
password for Modbus writing). There are two Values “ModbusSw1” and “ModbusSw2” in group “Log Bout”
available for back-reading.

Register for writing Modbus register number Value for back-reading Modbus register number
ModbusSw1 46337 ModbusSw1 40547
ModbusSw2 46338 ModbusSw2 40548

Note: The LSB of ModbusSw1 (46337) coresponds with LBO “ModbusSw1”

The LSB of ModbusSw2 (46338) coresponds with LBO “ModbusSw17”

Example:
Register port for writing Writen value LBO ModbusSw16 ………………….ModbusSw1
ModbusSw1 000F 0000 0000 0000 1111
(46337) HEX

Register port for writing Writen value LBO ModbusSw32 ………………….ModbusSw17

ModbusSw2 (46338) F000 HEX 1111 0000 0000 0000

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 181

4.8.25 Analog Input Sensors and User Sensors
Controller and/or some extension modules allow connection of sensor outputs to Analog Inputs. There is whole
variety of common sensor output characteristics prepared in configuration by default. Although if there is sensor
that is not in the list, it is possible to prepare custom characteristics (up to 16) with up to 31 definition points.

Image 4.71 Sensor adjustment in GenConfig

Note: There is “electronic” type of sensor available for Shared Analog GenConfig which can be used to interpret
shared data over CAN bus.

Image 4.72 User Sensor definition

4.8.26 Languages and Translator tool in GenConfig

For detailed description of Languages and Translator tool please refer to GenConfig interactive help (press F1
when in corresponding tab or open Help -> GenConfig Help).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 182

 Multi language support
NT Family controllers support up to three languages that can be switched during controller duty. Every terminal
(i.e. Remote display or PC InteliMonitor) can be switched to different language. Use PC GenConfig - Translator
tool to translate texts to another language.
Default application archives contain all texts in English only.

4.8.27 System Start/Stop

Many functions in InteliMains-NT are directly connected to the standard functions of InteliGen and InteliSys that
form complete system together with InteliMains-NT. For proper function of the system, System start and stop
signal needs to be used properly. Below there is scheme that shows how to use the Binary Output SYS
START/STOP in the system using just CAN wiring (no physical wiring is needed to share the starting and
stoping signal into all controllers in the system).

Image 4.73 Preparation of correct system start/stop function for two logical groups

4.8.28 Power Formats

InteliMains-NT allows user to choose from several Power Formats that affect dimensions in which values and
some setpoints are interpreted or adjusted. Power formats may be changed in Miscellaneous tab in GenConfig.
There are following Power Formats available:
1 kW kVAr kVA kX V
0.1 kW kVAr kVA kX V
0.01 MW MVAr MVA MX kV
0.01 MW MVAr MVA MX V
It is necessary to use power formats in MX when the sum of nominal power of gen-sets or any power in the
system (e.g. power imported from Mains) is expected to be above 32000 kW.
Note: Range of some setpoints and values is changed significantly when different Power Formats are
selected.
Last Power Format is designed to be used in combined Power/High Voltage and Low Voltage installations. High
voltage is then interpreted in Volts (e.g. 33256 V instead of 33 kV).
Last two Power Formats can be used in combination on one CAN bus.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 183

4.8.29 Soft Unload with support of I Aux measurement
When one group of gen-sets is connected to several Mains incomers in AMF function, the built-in Soft Unload
with I Aux function can be used to do the soft unload in steps. This prevents powering of all loads from one
Mains incomer for happening. There are two possible settings, that allow connecting of the auxiliary current
measurement (one phase measurement on phase L3) to be connected either on bus or on the load line directly.
Position of the measurement connection for both settings is shown below.

Image 4.74 ProcessControl:Soft Unload = Image 4.75 ProcessControl:Soft Unload =

AuxCTGen AuxCTLoad

Study the following example if you need to know more about this function. The first schematics shows what
happens if the function is not used. Loads are returning from Island operation after Mains is OK again. This
results in powering of all loads via first Mains incomer that is synchronized to the gen-set group.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 184

 If the Soft Unload is used, once the power measured using the auxiliary current measurement (multiplied by 3)
goes below Sync/Load ctrl:MGCB open level the MGCB is opened and InteliMains-NT controlling the second
Mains incomers starts the procedure. Finally the third InteliMains-NT transfers its load and gen-set is stopped.
This correct behaviour is shown in the next schematics.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 185

4.8.30 System Isolated
There are two logical binary inputs that can be used as feedbacks from secondary circuit breakers that isolated
the system in case there is primary CB failure. If MCBIsolated or MGCBIsolated gets active, the controller will
consider the corresponding breaker to be opened regardless of the position of feedback (and feedback
negative).
The example of this function is described below:
The system is in normal operation. The load is connected to the Mains via MCB and MGCB is opened. Mains
fails and the controller tries to open MCB. It does not open (because of faulty breaker or feedback). MCB fail
alarm is issued and the controller does not start gen-sets since there is direct connection to the faulty Mains (to
prevent connection of gen-sets to the faulty Mains). Automatic sequence (or the operator) opens the secondary
(emergency) breaker that is next to the MCB. Its feedback is configured on the function MCBISOLATED. When
this input gets activated (negative logic) the MCB is considered opened and the controller starts gen-sets,
closes MGCB and the load is powered again.
IMPORTANT: Be aware that when there is a faulty breaker (or even feedback only), such situation
needs to be resolved carefully and only emergency run of the equipment should be allowed.
To recover from this state you should always repair or replace faulty circuit breaker or feedback and
then recover the system completely. Before closing of the secondary breaker the primary breaker
must be always opened to prevent hazardous closing of two voltages out of synchronization.

4.8.31 User Mask function

In GenConfig you can easily set any object in ScreenEditor to show or hide based on activation of particular
Logical Binary Input available for users. Below, there is diagram showing the setup of User Mask function in
ScreenEditor.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 186

 Note: Masking of screens in InteliVision 5 supports only Show function
Use also other masking functions (masking can react on several internal states, e.g. activation of Timers).

4.8.32 Switchable Current measurement ratio

The value of the setpoint Basic settings:MainsCTprim can be change using the force value function. This allows
users to switch the transformer ratio of the current measurement on the fly. If a measurement transformer with
switchable transforming ratio or amplifier with a switchable amplification is used, the range of the current
measurement can be extended to accommodate measurement of very high values as well as required
measurement of very low values. The principle of this function is shown in the following graph. For more
information on Force value refer to a related chapter.

IMPORTANT: Never exceed the maximum allowed current at the controller CTs. Adjust the
amplification properly with hysteresis to prevent fluctuations and excesive current at controller
CTs!

4.8.33 PLC functions

Number of PLC functions is the same for InteliMains-NT and InteliSys-NT. See description in IGS-NT
Application guide-05-2013.pdf.
6 back to Functions
6 back to Controller setup

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 187

5 Appendix

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 188

 Controller objects

5.1 List of controller objects types

5.1.1 Setpoints 190
5.1.2 Values 388
5.1.3 Logical binary inputs 448
5.1.4 Logical binary outputs 489
5.1.5 Logical analog inputs 532

6 back to Table of contents

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 189

5.1.1 Setpoints
List of setpoint groups
Password Protection 195
Group: Process Control 196
Group: Basic settings 225
Group: Communication Settings 245
Group: ComProtSettings 261
Group: Analog protect 264
Group: Mains protect 265
Group: Bus protect 282
Group: AMF settings 288
Group: Power Management 294
Group: Synchronisation 316
Group: ActPwrRamps 325
Group: ActPwrRamps 326
Group: Grid Codes 336
Group: Force value 351
Group: Load Shedding 365
Group: Timer settings 373
Group: Act. Calls/SMS 379
Group: Date/Time 385

For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 191).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 190

 List of setpoints MinPwr PtM 225 Group of setpoints:
Communication
Group of setpoints: Group of setpoints: Settings
Process Control Basic settings
Controller name 245
#SysBaseLoad 196 Vm VT ratio 225
LB/UART Log 246
#SysBaseQ 197 Vm InpRangeSel 226
Contr. address 246
#SysPwrFactor 197 Bus VT ratio 226
RS232(1) mode 247
#SysLdCtrl PtM 197 BusInpRangeSel 227
RS232(2) mode 247
#SysPFCtrl PtM 199 MainsNomV 227
RS232(1)MBCSpd 249
Import load 199 MainsNomVph-ph 228
RS232(2)MBCSpd 249
Import PF 200 BusNomV 229
RS232(1)MdmIni 249
Import Q 200 BusNomVph-ph 230
RS232(2)MdmIni 250
MLoad ctrl PtM 201 DeadBusLevel 230
CAN bus mode 250
Soft Unload 202 DeadBusLLevel 231
CAN2emptDetect 251
PF/Qctrl PtM 205 DeadBusRLevel 231
SHxOcol detect 251
PF/Qctrl ANEXT 206 Nomin current 231
CANAddrSwitch1 252
PF/Qctrl IM/EX 206 NominMainsImp 232
CANAddrSwitch2 252
I/E-Pm meas 207 MainsCTprim 232
CANnegotiation 253
I/E-Qm meas 208 MainsCTsec 232
IP Addr mode 254
PeakLevelStart 208 AuxCurrCTprim 233
IP address 255
PeakLevelStop 209 AuxCurrCTsec 233
Net mask 255
PeakAutS/S del 209 FixVoltProtSelect 234
Gateway IP 256
Peak kVA Start 210 Nominal Freq 234
ComApProtoPort 256
Peak kVA Stop 210 Nom frq offset 235
AirGate 257
PeakKVAS/S del 211 ControllerMode 235
AirGate IP 257
Export limit 212 ContrInitMode 237
SMTP authent 258
TempByPwr Treq 213 Local buttons 237
SMTP user name 258
TempByPwr gain 213 DispBaklightTO 240
SMTP password 258
TempByPwr int 213 UserBtn pulse 241
SMTP address 259
Overheat prot 214 ImpCountDef1 241
Contr mailbox 259
Island enable 215 ImpCountDef2 241
Time zone 260
ParallelEnable 216 ImpCountDef3 242
DNS IP 260
Synchro enable 216 ImpCountDef4 242
MFStart enable 217 ConvCoefPulse1 242 Group of setpoints:
MGCBparalClose 220 ConvCoefPulse2 243 Engine parameters
Mains coupling 222 ConvCoefPulse3 243 Horn Timeout 261
BrkCtrl in MAN 223 ConvCoefPulse4 244 BinInp delay 1 261
MultiSoftStart 224 MainsNomMidV 244 BinInp delay 2 261
WatchedContr 224 VmMid VT ratio 245 BinInp delay 3 262

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 191

 ForceBlockDel1 262 Mains I unbal 278 #PriorAutoSwap 294
ForceBlockDel2 262 ROCOF prot 278 Priority ctrl 296
ForceBlockDel3 263 VectorS limit 279 #SysAMFstrtDel 296
ResetActAlarms 263 ROCOF df/dt 279 #SysAMFstopDel 297
ROCOF Win 280 #LoadResStrt 1 297
Group of setpoints: VectorS prot 280 #LoadResStop 1 298
Engine protection VS/ROCOF CBsel 281 #LoadResStrt 2 299
Batt >V 264 Mns2POvrldProt 281 #LoadResStop 2 300
Batt <V 264 Mns2Inom prot 281 #LoadResStrt 3 301
Batt volt del 264 MainsAv10>V MP 282 #LoadResStop 3 302
#LoadResStrt 4 303
Group of setpoints: Group of setpoints: #LoadResStop 4 304
Load sharing RPMdep protection #%LdResStrt 1 304
OverldStrtEval 265 (PRP only) #%LdResStop 1 305
2POvrldStEvDel 266 Bus >V 282 #%LdResStrt 2 305
Mains2Inom del 267 Bus <V 282 #%LdResStop 2 306
Mains >V MP 267 Bus V del 283 #%LdResStrt 3 306
Mains >V Hys 268 Bus >f 283 #%LdResStop 3 307
Mains V del 268 Bus <f 283 #%LdResStrt 4 307
Mains >>V MP 269 Bus f del 284 #%LdResStop 4 308
Mains >>V Hys 269 BusMeasError 285 #NextStrt Del 308
Mains >>V Del 270 Bus V unbal 287 #OverldNext Del 309
Mains <V MP 270 Bus V unb del 287 #NextStopDel 309
Mains <V Hys 270 #SlowStopDel 310
Mains <V Del 271 Group of setpoints: #MinRunPower 1 310
Mains <<V MP 271 AMF settings #MinRunPower 2 311
Mains <<V Hys 272 EmergStart del 288 #MinRunPower 3 311
Mains <<V Del 272 FwRet break 288 #RunHrsMaxDiff 312
Mains >f MP 273 MCB close del 289 #PwrBandContr 1 312
Mains >f Hys 273 MCB opens on 289 #PwrBandContr 2 313
Mains f del 274 ReturnWithIntr 290 #PwrBandContr 3 313
Mains >>f MP 274 BreakerOverlap 290 #PwrBandContr 4 314
Mains >>f Hys 275 RetFromIsland 292 #PwrBnChngDlUp 314
Mains >>f Del 275 ReturnTo mains 292 #PwrBnChngDlDn 315
Mains <f MP 276 Mains ret del 293 Control group 315
Mains <f Hys 276 MGCB Close Del 293 GroupLinkLeft 315
Mains <f Del 277 GroupLinkRight 316
Mains Vunb del 277 Group of setpoints:
Mains V unbal 277 Power Management
Mains Iunb del 278 #Pwr mgmt mode 294

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 192

 Group of setpoints: LoadReduct 333 ExtValue4deflt 365

Synchronisation MainsTripPer 333

PforQ 334 Group of setpoints:
Voltage window 316
SoftUnload 334 Load Shedding
BtoM AngleReq 317
PostVRT 335 Ld shed active 365
Phase window 317
RetOvUnFreq 335 LdShedBased on 366
Dwell time 318
Ld shed mode 366
Freq gain 319
Group of setpoints: Ld shedStages 366
Freq int 319
Analog inputs Ld shedLevel1 367
Angle Gain 320
Force value 1 351 Ld shedLevel2 367
Load Ramp 321
Force value 2 351 Ld shedLevel3 367
Load gain 322
Force value 3 352 Ld shed f lvl1 368
Load int 322
Force value 4 352 Ld shed f lvl2 368
RampStartLevel 323
Force value 5 353 Ld shed f lvl3 368
MGCB open lev 323
Force value 6 353 Ld shedDelay1 369
MGCB open del 324
Force value 7 354 Ld shedDelay2 369
Sync timeout 324
Force value 8 354 Ld shedDelay3 369

Group of setpoints: Force value 9 355 Ld reconLevel1 370

Voltage/PF Control Force value 10 355 Ld reconLevel2 370

Voltage gain 325 Force value 11 356 Ld reconLevel3 371

Voltage int 325 Force value 12 356 LdRecon f lvl1 371

PF gain 326 Force value 13 357 LdRecon f lvl2 371

PF int 326 Force value 14 357 LdRecon f lvl3 372

Force value 15 358 Ld reconDelay1 372
Group of setpoints: Force value 16 358 Ld reconDelay2 372
Bus Settings ExtValue1LoLim 359 Ld reconDelay3 373

Slow Load ramp 326 ExtValue2LoLim 359 AutoLd recon 373

Load ramp 327 ExtValue3LoLim 360

Fast load ramp 327 ExtValue4LoLim 360 Group of setpoints:

MainsFrqRisePr 328 ExtValue1HiLim 361 Time functions
MainsFrqFallPr 328 ExtValue2HiLim 361 TimerChannel 1 373

LoadReductPr 329 ExtValue3HiLim 362 TimerChannel 2 374

MainsTripPerPr 329 ExtValue4HiLim 362 TimerChannel 3 374

PforQPr 330 ExtValue1 rate 362 TimerChannel 4 374

SoftUnloadPr 330 ExtValue2 rate 363 TimerChannel 5 375

PostVRTPr 331 ExtValue3 rate 363 TimerChannel 6 375

RetOvUnFreqPr 331 ExtValue4 rate 363 TimerChannel 7 375

MainsFrqRise 332 ExtValue1deflt 364 TimerChannel 8 376

MainsFrqFall 332 ExtValue2deflt 364 TimerChannel 9 376

ExtValue3deflt 364 TimerChannel 10 376

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 193

 TimerChannel 11 377
TimerChannel 12 377
TimerChannel 13 377
TimerChannel 14 378
TimerChannel 15 378
TimerChannel 16 378

Group of setpoints: ID-

SCM unit
History record 379
Alarm only 379
Warning 379
Mains protect 380
MainsP w/Reset 380
AcallCH1-Type 380
AcallCH1-Addr 381
AcallCH2-Type 381
AcallCH2-Addr 381
AcallCH3-Type 382
AcallCH3-Addr 382
AcallCH4-Type 382
AcallCH4-Addr 383
AcallCH5-Type 383
AcallCH5-Addr 383
NumberRings AA 384
ActCallAttempt 384
Acall+SMS lang 384

Group of setpoints:
Act. Calls/SMS
Time stamp act 385
Time Stamp Per 385
#SummerTimeMod 386
#Time 386
#Date 387

6 back to Controller
objects

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 194

 Password Protection
Any setpoint can be password protected - 7 levels of password protection are available. The password is up to
five-digit number (maximum is 65535). Only setpoints associated with the entered password level can be
modified.
Even though one level may have been set from the front panel, the affected setpoints are not accessible from
InteliMonitor (direct or Modem) until this level is set in InteliMonitor.
Setpoints opened from front panel are automatically closed 15 minutes after the last key has been pressed or
when wrong value of password is set.
Any password can be changed once that level password or higher has been entered. The controller
programming (configuration) requires the highest password – only Administrator.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 195

 Group: Process Control
#SysBaseLoad
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 65000 [kW]
Force value
Default value 1000 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8775 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the baseload level for the whole gen-set group in parallel-to-mains operation.
There are two methods of baseload control:

Each gen-set takes proportionally equal

part of the system baseload and then
Distributed #SysLdCtrl PtM (page use load control loop (like in SPtM) to
Mode 197) = BASELOAD maintain the load. Load sharing is not
performed, the InteliMains-NT does not
play active role.
#SysLdCtrl PtM (page
Loadsharing 197) = LDSHARING, The system baseload is maintained by
Mode MLoad ctrl PtM (page the IM-NT over the load sharing.
201) = SYSBLD->LS

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 196

 #SysBaseQ
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 - 32000 [kVAr]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16407 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
#SysBaseQ is used in case the #SysPFCtrl PtM (page 199) is switched either to BASEQ or
VSHARING. In case of VARSHARING the setpoint PF/Qctrl PTM must be switched to Q control.
The setpoint is used for adjusting the requested reactive power of the gen-sets in the parallel to mains
operation.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#SysPwrFactor
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,60 - 1,20 [-]
Force value
Default value 1,00 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,01
Comm object 8776 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used for adjusting the requested base power factor of the gen-sets in the parallel-to-mains
operation. The setpoint #SysPFCtrl PtM (page 199) must be set to BASEPF for constant power factor
control. The power factor of each gen-set is controlled by it's own PF control loop and InteliMains-NT does
not play active role in this type of control.
Settings 0.60 – 0.99 correspond to inductive PF (0.60L - 0.99L), 1.01 – 1.20 correspond to capacitive PF
(0.99C - 0.80C).
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#SysLdCtrl PtM
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] BASELOAD, LDSHARING [-]
Force value Alternative
Default value BASELOAD NO
config
Step -

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 197

 Comm object 8774 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load control type in parallel-to-mains operation.
BaseLoad
The gen-sets are controlled by their load control loops (i.e. as in SPtM) to provide constant
proportional part of the requested system baseload (see #SysBaseLoad). The InteliMains-NT
does not play active role regarding load control in parallel-to-mains operation (see Baseload on
page 198).
LdSharing
The gen-sets are controlled by the InteliMains-NT through the load sharing line. The InteliMains-
NT load control mode is selected by the setpoint MLoad ctrl PtM (page 201) (see LoadSharing
Mode on page 198.)
Note: # sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers
connected by CAN2 bus.

Image 4.76 Baseload Image 4.77 LoadSharing Mode

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 198

 #SysPFCtrl PtM
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] BASEPF, VSHARING, BASE Q [-]
Force value Alternative
Default value BASEPF NO
config
Step -
Comm object 8779 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the power factor control type in parallel-tomains operation.

The gen-sets are controlled by their power factor control loops (i.e. as in SPtM) to
provide constant power factor adjusted by the setpoint #SysPwrFactor (page 197).
BasePF
The InteliMains-NT does not play active role regarding power factor control in
parallel-to-mains operation.
The gen-sets are controlled by the InteliMains-NT through the VAr sharing line
VSharing (CAN2 bus). The InteliMains-NT power factor control mode is selected by the
setpoint PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205).
Gen-sets are controlled by their pf control loops to provide the correct reactive
BASE Q power adjusted by setpoint #SysBaseQ (page 197). The InteliMains-NT does not
play active role regarding power factor control in parallel to mains operation.

Note: If the power factor control mode is switched to VSHARING the load control type must be
switched to LDSHARING and the equivalent load control mode must be used.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

Import load
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 - 32000 [kW]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8641 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting of the requested mains import if the load control mode is set to IMP/EXP (
#SysLdCtrl PtM (page 197) = LDSHARING and MLoad ctrl PtM (page 201) = IMP/EXP)
This setpoint is also used for adjusting of the maximum allowed export if export limit function is active
(Export limit (page 212) = ENABLED).
Note: Negative value of import is export, i.e. the power flows into the mains.

Note: The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format in GenConfig.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 199

 Import PF
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,001 - 1,999 [-]
Force value
Default value 1,00 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,001
Comm object 8642 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to adjust the requested power factor at the mains in import/export mode (i.e.
#SysPFCtrl PtM = VSHARING and PF/Qctrl PtM = PF control and PF/Qctrl IM/EX = ENABLED).
Values over 1.00 mean capacitive load character, i.e. setting 0.95 means 0.95L and setting 1.05 means
0.95C.

6 back to List of setpoints

Import Q
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 - 32000 [kVAr]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14143 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to adjust the requested reactive power at the mains in import/export mode (i.e.
#SysPFCtrl PtM = VSHARING and PF/Qctrl PtM = Q control and PF/Qctrl IM/EX = ENABLED).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 200

 MLoad ctrl PtM
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] SYSBLD->LS, ANEXSYSBLD->LS, IMP/EXP, ANEXT IMP/EXP, T BY PWR [-]
Force value
Default value SYSBLD->LS YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 8638 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used for selection of the load control mode in parallel to mains operation if the load is
controlled by the InteliMains-NT (i.e. #SysLdCtrl PtM (page 197) = LDSHARING).

The load of the gen-set group is maintained at constant level adjusted by the
SysBld->LS
setpoint #SysBaseLoad (page 196).
The load of the gen-set group is maintained at constant level given by the
AneySysBld->LS
analog input MLC:ANEXSYSBLD (PAGE 538).
The load of the gen-set group is controlled so, that the mains import is
IMP/EXP maintained constant at the level adjusted by setpoint Import load (page
199).
The load of the gen-set group is controlled so, that the mains import is
Anext IMP/EXP maintained constant at the level given by the analog input MLC:ANEXI/E
(PAGE 538).
The load of the gen-set group is controlled so, that the analog input
MLC:TBYPWR (PAGE 538) is maintained at constant level given by setpoint
T BY PWR
TempByPwr Treq (page 213). The regulation loop is adjusted by setpoints
TempByPwr gain (page 213) and TempByPwr int (page 213).

Note: If the system baseload value needs to be changed remotely via a communication interface select
the ANEXSYSBLD->LS mode and then configure one of the objects ExtValue1 (page 431) - ExtValue4
(page 432) as the source for the analog input MLC:ANEXSYSBLD (PAGE 538). These objects can be
written remotely via communication (e.g. via MODBUS).

IMPORTANT: Do not use cyclic write of the baseload setpoint for remote load control. It may
cause the internal EEPROM memory damage.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 201

 Soft Unload
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] STANDARD, AuxCTGen, AuxCTLoad [-]
Force value
Default value STANDARD NO
Alternative config
Step -

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 202

 Comm object 12201 Related applications MGCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the way MGCB opening is evaluated in case of unloaded gen-sets. Non-standard
functions presented by this setpoint are especially useful for multimains systems where a group of gen-sets
supplies more loads.

The MGCB is opened at the moment when TotRunPact (page 417) value is lower
than MGCB open lev (page 323) or after MGCB open del (page 324) elapsed.
Because of preventing potential oveloading of gen-sets (see example below) there are
two different settings for MGCB-opening behavior which utilize auxiliary current
measurement and thus prevent potentialy dangerous situations.
Example: For this example we will use Figure below. The upper mains incomer
Standard
is feeding both loads and gen-set G1 is unloading (MCB1 is closed, MGCB1 is
closed, GCB1 is closed, MCB2 is opened, MGCB2 is closed, GCB2 is
opened). If standard SOFT UNLOAD behavior is used than MGCB1 is opened
(after conditions mentioned above are fulfilled) and this leads to direct
connection of G1 (unloaded but running gen-set) to the second load suddenly
(very high load step may occur).
Auxiliary current measurement (AUX CURRENT terminal) can be used to measure
actual current through MGCB. This enables regulation of the incoming power from the
Mains and from the gensets in the way that gensets stop supplying respective load
but continue supplying other load in the system. The CT is expected to be placed
between MGCB and bus and must be connected to L3. The MGCB is opened when
the power over MGCB counted from this auxiliary current and voltage is lower than
MGCB open lev (page 323) or after MGCB open del (page 324) elapsed.

AuxCTGen

Auxiliary current measurement (AUX CURRENT terminal) can be used to measure

actual current to the load. This enables regulation of the incoming power from the
Mains and from the gensets in the way that gensets stop supplying respective load
AuxCTLoad but continue supplying other load in the system. The CT is expected to be placed on
load connection and must be connected to L3. The MGCB is opened when the power
to the load counted from this auxiliary current and voltage is lower than Mains import
power plus MGCB open lev (page 323) or after MGCB open del (page 324)

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 203

 elapsed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 204

 PF/Qctrl PtM
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] PF control, PF(Pm), Q control, Q(Um), Q(P), Qref/Ulim [-]
Force value Alternative
Default value PF control YES
config
Step -
Comm object 10120 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Setpoint switches the modes of power factor or reactive power in paralel to mains operation.
PF control (original BASEPF) - regulation on fixed PF value
PF(Pm) - regulation of PF in depending on the actual active power based on the configured user curve
PF(Pm)
Q control (original BASEQ) - regulation on fixed Q value
Q(Um) - regulation of Q in depending on the actual mains voltage based on the configured user curve
Q/Um)
Q(P) - regulation of Q in depending on the actual active power based on the configured user curve Q
(P)
Qref/Ulim - specific type of Q(Um) mode where is the Q part in constant level in case the U mains
changes
The whole evaluation of Q or PF depends also on the adjustment of setpoints PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page
206) and PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page 206).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 205

 PF/Qctrl ANEXT
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 16130 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Setpoint switches the functionality of PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) to the analog mode when the required
value is given by analog external value presented in the configuration by particular LAI.
IMPORTANT: Analog extern does not work for mode PF(Pm) and Q(P).

IMPORTANT: In case one of these two modes are chosen and setpoint PF/Qctrl ANEXT is
chosen, mode is evaluated the same way as the this setpoint would be DISABLED.

6 back to List of setpoints

PF/Qctrl IM/EX
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 16131 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Setpoint switch the functionality of PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) in to the import/export mode.
IMPORTANT: In case one the IM/EX mode is ENABLED and the conditions for mains import
measurement are not fulfilled the Warning PFQ I/EFail is activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 206

 I/E-Pm meas
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] NONE, CT INPUTS, ANALOG INPUT [-]
Force value
Default value CT INPUTS NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10599 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used to select, which method is used for measurement of the active power (P) imported from
the mains.
NONE: Active power from the mains is not measured.
CT INPUTS: Active power from the mains is calculated from the mains L-N voltages and mains
currents measured at the controller CT terminals.
ANALOG INPUT: Active power from the mains is measured by an external device and passed the
controller via analog input MLC:I/E-PM (PAGE 538).
Note: If the active power is measured, then the measurement method should match the method used for
reactive power measurement, i.e. if the setpoint I/E-Pm meas is set to CT INPUTS, the I/E-Qm meas
should not be set to ANALOG INPUT and vice versa. If the setting differs, the measurement for both
active and reactive power are both taken from CT input. Setting NONE can be used in any combination
without changing the setting of the second measurement.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 207

 I/E-Qm meas
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] NONE, CT INPUTS, ANALOG INPUT [-]
Force value
Default value CT INPUTS NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10598 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used to select, which method is used for measurement of the reactive power (Q) imported
from the mains.
NONE: Reactive power from the mains is not measured.

Note: It is possible to perform import/export load control without reactive power measurement, i.e.
based on active power measuement only. The gen-set power factor will be maintained at constant level
given by #SysPwrFactor (page 197) setpoint. However, this kind of operation in certain conditions may
cause bad power factor values at the mains.

CT INPUTS: Reactive power from the mains is calculated from the mains L-N voltages and mains
currents measured at the controller CT terminals.
ANALOG INPUT: Rective power from the mains is measured by an external device and passed the
controller via analog input MPF:I/E-QM (PAGE 539).
Note: If the reactive power is measured, then the measurement method should match the method used
for active power measurement, i.e. if the setpoint I/E-Pm meas (page 207) is set to CT INPUTS, the
I/E-Qm meas (page 208) should not be set to ANALOG INPUT and vice versa. If the setting differs, the
measurement for both active and reactive power are both taken from CT input. Setting NONE can be
used in any combination without changing the setting of the second measurement.

6 back to List of setpoints

PeakLevelStart
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] PeakLevelStop (page 209) - 32000 [kW]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8643 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
If the object consumption (Object P) exceeds this setpoint for time longer than PeakAutS/S del (page 209),
the gen-set group is started. Adjusting the PeakAutS/S del (page 209) to 0 (OFF) disables the autostart.
See also the setpoint PeakLevelStop (page 209).
Note: The IM-NT output Sys Start/Stop must be connected to the inputs Sys Start/Stop of all controllers
in the group. This can be done either physically by wires or by CAN bus using shared peripherial
modules. See the GenConfig help for more information about shared modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 208

 PeakLevelStop
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - PeakLevelStart (page 208) [kW]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8644 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
If the object consumption (Object P) drops below this setpoint for time longer than PeakAutS/S del (page
209), the gen-set group is stopped (if there isn't any other reason to keep the group running, such as binary
input REM START /STOP (PAGE 482)). See also the setpoint PeakLevelStart (page 208).

6 back to List of setpoints

PeakAutS/S del
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] OFF, 1 - 3200 [s]
Force value
Default value OFF YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9989 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoints adjusts the delay for automatic Peak start/stop function. Set 0 (OFF) to disable Peak
automatic start function. See also the setpoints PeakLevelStart (page 208) and PeakLevelStop (page
209).
Note: The delay for this function is counted down in any mode if the conditions are fulfilled (i.e. in OFF
when the Mains Import in kW is higher than PeakLevelStart (page 208)).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 209

 Peak kVA Start
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Peak kVA Stop (page 210) - 32000 [kVA]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 13223 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
If the object apparent consumption (Object P to the power of 2 + Object Q to the power of 2) exceeds this
setpoint for time longer than PeakKVAS/S del (page 211), the gen-set starts automatically (in SPtM
application) or group of gen-sets is started by InteliMains-NT. Adjusting the PeakKVAS/S del (page 211) to
0 (OFF) disables the autostart. See also the setpoint Peak kVA Stop (page 210).

Note: The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format in GenConfig.

6 back to List of setpoints

Peak kVA Stop

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - Peak kVA Stop (page 210) [kW]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 13224 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
If the object apparent consumption (Object P to the power of 2 + Object Q to the power of 2) drops below this
setpoint for time longer than PeakKVAS/S del (page 211), the gen-set stops automatically (in SPtM
application) or gen-set group is stopped by InteliMains-NT . See also the setpoint Peak kVA Start (page
210).
Note: The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format in GenConfig.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 210

 PeakKVAS/S del
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] OFF, 1 - 3200 [s]
Force value
Default value OFF YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 13225 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoints adjusts the delay for automatic Peak kVA start/stop function. Set 0 (OFF) to disable Peak
kVA automatic start function. See also the setpoints Peak kVA Start (page 210) and Peak kVA Stop
(page 210).
Note: The delay for this function is counted down in any mode if the conditions are fulfilled (i.e. in OFF
when the Mains Import in kVA is higher than Peak kVA Start).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 211

 Export limit
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9592 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to enable and disable the Export limit function. If the function is enabled, the group
power is limited so that mains import is always higher or equal to the setpoint Import load (page 199).

Image 4.78 Principle of the export limit function

This function can be used if the setpoint MLoad ctrl PtM (page 201) is set to SYSBLD->LS,
ANEXSYSBLD->LS or T BY PWR.
Note: If the import value/setpoint is negative, it actually means export. This function can be used to
protect the system from unwanted export. You may set maximum export value or you can set it possitive
to keep some import even in cases that there are abrupt load changes.

Note: See the setpoint I/E-Pm meas (page 207) for details about mains import measurement methods.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 212

 TempByPwr Treq
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 - +32000[°C]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9607 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used for adjusting the requested temperature for the Temperature-By-Power control loop.
The Temperature-By-Power is active if the setpoint MLoad ctrl PtM (page 201) is set to T BY PWR
position and the logical analog input MLC:TBYPWR (PAGE 538) is attached to the physical analog input
where the temperature is measured.
See also the setpoints TempByPwr int (page 213) and TempByPwr gain (page 213).
Note: As the "regulating action" of the Temperature-By-Power control loop is changing of the group
power the regulated value (i.e. some temperature) must depend on the group power. Typical usage of
this function is regulation of the output temperature of the heating water in a group of CHP units.

6 back to List of setpoints

TempByPwr gain
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,00 - 100,00 [%]
Force value
Default value 10,00 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,01
Comm object 9608 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the gain factor for the Temperature-By-Power control loop. See also the
setpoints TempByPwr Treq (page 213) and TempByPwr int (page 213).

6 back to List of setpoints

TempByPwr int
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,00 - 100,00 [%]
Force value
Default value 10,0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,1
Comm object 9609 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the integration factor for the Temperature-By- Power control loop. See also the
setpoints TempByPwr Treq (page 213) and TempByPwr gain (page 213).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 213

 Overheat prot
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9619 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to enable/disable the Overheat protection, which is used for limitation of the group
power when there is not enough heat outlet from the gen-set group to avoid shutdown due to oveheating.
If the Overheat protection is enabled and the temperature at the logical analog input MLC:TBYPWR (PAGE
538):
Increases over the setpoint TempByPwr Treq, the Temperature-By- Power load control loop is
temporarily activated to reduce the power and consequently the temperature.
Returns back under the setpoint TempByPwr Treq (page 213), the Temperature- By-Power
regulation loop is deactivated and previous load control mode (e.g. Baseload) takes place.
See more information about the Temperature-By-Power load control mode in the description of the setpoint
TempByPwr Treq (page 213).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 214

 Island enable
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] NO, YES [-]
Force value
Default value YES YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9236 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to enable/disable the island operation, i.e. supplying the load while the mains is
disconnected.
Island mode is recognized if the mains breaker is open, e.g. the feedback input MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 477) is not active.
Parallel mode is recognized if the mains breaker is closed, e.g. the feedback input MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 477) is active.
If the island mode is recognized and island operation is disabled the controller will open the master generator
breaker, and system will be stopped (i.e. gen-sets will cooldown and stop, GCBs will open). While this
situation persists the controller behavior is following:
The gen-sets may be started in MAN mode but they will not start in AUT mode due to MGCB not
closing.
The MGCB can't be closed.
The message StartBlck is present in the alarm list.

Note: See table with examples in the description of the setpoint MFStart enable (page 217).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 215

 ParallelEnable
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] NO, YES [-]
Force value
Default value YES YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9237 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to enable/disable the parallel operation, i.e. supplying the load in parallel with the mains.
Island mode is recognized if the mains breaker is open, e.g. the feedback input MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 477) is not active.
Parallel mode is recognized if the mains breaker is closed, e.g. the feedback input MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 477) is active.
If the parallel mode is recognized and parallel operation is disabled the controller will open the master
generator breaker, and the system will be stopped (gen-sets will cooldown and stop, their GCBs will open).
While this situation persists the controller behavior is following:
The gen-sets may be started in MAN mode but they will not start in AUT mode due to MGCB not
closing.
The MGCB can't be closed (if there is voltage on the bus).
The message OfL StartBlck is present in the alarm list.

Note: See table with examples in the description of the setpoint MFStart enable.

6 back to List of setpoints

Synchro enable
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] NONE, FORWARD, REVERSE, BOTH [-]
Force value
Default value BOTH YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9235 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used for enable/disable forward and reverse synchronization.
NONE: No synchronizing is enabled.
ONLY IN MGCB APPL: FORWARD: MGCB synchronizing is enabled.
REVERSE: MCB synchronizing is enabled.
ONLY IN MGCB APPL: BOTH: MGCB and MCB synchronizing are enabled.

Note: Although synchronizing of the particular breaker is disabled the breaker can be closed to a "dead"
(voltage-free) bus.

Note: See table with examples in the description of the setpoint MFStart enable (page 217).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 216

 MFStart enable
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] NO, YES [-]
Force value
Default value YES YES
Alternative config
Step -

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 217

 Comm object 9238 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to enable/disable automatic start of the gen-set group when a mains failure occurs.

Example of settings
Description Behavior Required Adjustement
The group is activated by the input Island enable (page 215)=NO
Sys Start/Stop. Then MGCB is ParallelEnable (page 216)=YES
Pure parallel operation.
closed to power the genset bus.
No island operation, no Synchro enable (page
After that the gen-sets are started
AMF function. Neither 216)=NONE
and sychronized to the already
MCB nor MGCB is MFStart enable (page 217)=NO
powered bus and continue in
synchronized.
parallel operation until the group is MGCBparalClose (page
deactivated or mains is failed. 220)=YES
The group is activated
automatically after the mains
Pure island operation Island enable = YES
failed. As soon as the system
with AMF feature. No
reserve is reached the MGCB is ParallelEnable = NO
parallel operation, neither
closed and the group supplies the Synchro enable = NONE
MCB nor MGCB is
load. When the mains returned MFStart enable = YES
synchronized.
MGCB is opened and the group is
stopped.
The group is activated by the input
Sys Start/Stop. Closing of MGCB
while in parallel operation depends
on the position of the setpoint
MGCBparalClose. In island
operation the MGCB is closed
when the group has reached the Island enable = YES
Parallel and island adjusted system reserve. When ParallelEnable = YES
operation without AMF the group is deactivated first the
Synchro enable = NONE
function. MCB is not MGCB is opened and then the gen-
synchronized. sets are stopped. If a mains failure MFStart enable = NO
occurs while the group is in parallel MGCBparalClose = YES
operation the MCB is opened and
the group continues in island
operation. When the mains returns
the group remains in island
operation as reverse synchronizing
is disabled.

Parallel and island The group is activated either by the Island enable = YES
operation with AMF input SYS START /STOP (PAGE 519) ParallelEnable = YES
function and test on load or by a mains failure. Closing of Synchro enable = BOTH
feature. Both MCB and
MFStart enable = YES

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 218

 Example of settings
Description Behavior Required Adjustement
MGCB while in parallel operation
depends on the position of the
setpoint MGCBparalClose (page
220). In island operation the MGCB
is closed when the group has
reached the adjusted system
reserve. When the group is
deactivated first the MGCB is
opened and then the gen-sets are
MGCB are stopped. If a mains failure occurs
synchronized. while the group is in parallel
operation the MCB is opened and
the group continues in island
operation. When the mains returns
the group is reverse-synchronized
to the mains and either deactivated
or continues in parallel operation
(depending on the input SYS
START /STOP (PAGE 519)). The Test
on load function is possible.
The group is activated
automatically when a mains failure
Island mode with AMF occurs. The MGCB is closed when Island enable = YES
function and test on load the group has reached the adjusted
ParallelEnable = NO
feature. Both MCB and system reserve. When the mains
Synchro enable = BOTH
MGCB are returns the group is
synchronized. reversesynchronized to the mains MFStart enable = YES
and then deactivated. The Test on
load function is possible.

IMPORTANT: These instructions is used in case for ‘synchro fail’ but if you disable synchr.
You can stay on gen-set without to know why !!!
Island enable = YES
Synchro enable = NONE
ParalleleEnable = NO
The setpoint ReturnWithIntr (page 290) has to be checked:
If DISABLED, with Mains OK, the controller keep gen-sets running, MGCB closed : no
warning
IF ENABLED, the unit work like ATS

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 219

 MGCBparalClose
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] NO, YES, MCB CLOSED [-]
Force value
Default value NO YES
Alternative config
Step -

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 220

 Comm object 10921 Related applications MGCB
Description
MGCB application only

Disables automatic MGCB closing in the case that the Sys start/stop output is
NO
activated.
Enables automatic MGCB closing in the case that the Sys start/stop output is
activated.
Note: In AUT mode, if the gen-set group is about to be started to mains-parallel
operation, it is suitable to close the MGCB first (i.e. before any GCB is closed).
The first gen-set then synchronizes with the generator bus and directly with the
mains (both MCB and MGCB are closed) and other gen-sets as well. If this is
not desired (for whatever reason), the function can be blocked by adjusting this
YES setpoint to NO. In that case, the first gen-set is connected to the generator bus
(without load), and only after that the MGCB synchronizing starts. Other
gensets are then synchronized through the bus to mains directly (the same
behavior as in YES setting).

Note: MCBparalClose = YES is a forbidden state if setpoint MCB opens on

(page 289) is set to BUS VOLTAGE. The second adjusted setpoint is reverted
back to NO (MGCBparalClose (page 220)) or GEN RUNNING (MCB opens
on).
Enables automatic MGCB closing after MCB is closed with 5s delay (in AUT
mode).
Note: MGCB is closed if there is zero voltage on bus and GCBs are open.
Starting gen-sets are than directly synchornized to mains voltage. If Mains fails
MCB Closed MGCB is opened after MCB is opened (if there is no bus voltage).

Note: MCBparalClose = MCBclosed is a forbidden state if setpoint MCB

opens on (page 289) is set to BUS VOLTAGE. The second adjusted setpoint
is reverted back to NO (MGCBparalClose (page 220)) or GEN RUNNING
(MCB opens on).

IMPORTANT: IM-NT cannot influence behavior of another control unit that is in MAN mode.
It is dangerous to close GCB on gen-set in MAN mode while parallel operation is disabled.
IM-NT react on this with opening MGCB but it could take short time till it received feedback
from GCB and MGCB breaker is automatically opened.

Connecting of a genset with non-ComAp controller to a common bus:

In version 2.5 it was not possible to close MGCB in case that all ComAp genset controllers were
switched off and there was another (hire) genset supplying voltage to the bus bar.
From version 2.6 the IM-NT closes MGCB based on voltage present on the bus (provided that load
reserve is fulfilled) and is not checking the presence of IGS-NTs. For proper functionality in parallel to
Mains operation it is then necessary that the MGCBparalClose setpoint is set to YES.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 221

 Mains coupling
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] ENABLED, DISABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 11037 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint selects how the IM-NT cooperates with other IM-NT in systems where one common busbar is
supplied from many mains incomers, which are controlled by many IM-NT controllers.

If there is voltage on Bus, however it is supplied from other mains incomer controlled by
Enabled other IM-NT, the respective IM-NT may also close its MCB and MGCB and it will couple
the two mains incomers together.
The IM-NT will not close it's MCB and MGCB if there is other IM-NT with closed MCB
Disabled and MGCB detected on the CAN2 bus (in the same control group - control groups may be
connected together via Group Link).

Note: Passive phase/voltage check is performed before mains coupling.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 222

 BrkCtrl in MAN
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] NORMAL, FOLLOW [-]
Force value
Default value NORMAL YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 13278 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint selects how the MCB and MGCB are handled in MAN mode.

The MCB and MGCB are controlled by IM-NT (close and open breakers based on MCB and
Normal
MGCB buttons) and it's internal sequences and adjusted timers.
The MCB and MGCB can be still controlled by MCB and MGCB buttons but moreover it is
possible to close and open breakers by external device or manually without controller
issuing any alarms and taking any actions. It is also possible to start synchronization by
activating Force sync. After Force sync is activated the controller synchronizes and keeps
Follow
Mains and Bus synchronized until Force sync gets deactivated again (Sync timeout is not
considered when Force sync is activated). Synchronization is also activated if the MCB or
MGCB button are pressed as in NORMAL Breaker Control Mode. In this case Sync
timeout applies.

There are several situations and controller's reaction in FOLLOW mode in MAN:
If LBI Force sync is active and the forced synchronization takes place, pressing the corresponding
CB button (even repeatidely) causes closing of the corresponding breaker when the synchronism
conditions are met.
When the controller synchronizes because the corresponding CB button was closed, activating and
deactivating of LBI Force sync does not influence the synchronization.
When the controller synchronizes because the LBI Force sync is activated, the controller will no
issue any alarms even though the corresponding CB button is pressed during the forced
synchronization and the breaker cannot close because synchronism conditions were not met in Sync
timeout.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 223

 MultiSoftStart
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 14041 Related applications MGCB
Description
This setpoint enables StartUpSynchronization of a group of gen-sets with closed MGCB prior to getting
healthy voltage measurement on the bus.

Disabled There is no change in the controller behavior.

The controller will close MGCB in AUT and MAN right after at least one of gen-set
Enabled controllers in its control group closes GCB and indicates StartUpSynchro sequence.
MGCB is not closed if MCB is closed (e.g. due to healthy Mains).

6 back to List of setpoints

WatchedContr
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 16 [min]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11719 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used at redundant controller to specify the address of the related main controller in CAN-
based rendundant systems. Adjust this setpoint to 0 if the controller is not used as redundant or if wired
rendundancy system is used.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 224

 MinPwr PtM
Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 - 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 10 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9241 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This function is active when #SysLdCtrl PtM (page 197) is set to LDSHARING (i.e. InteliMains-NT is
controlling the load sharing of the gen-set group). The value ofMinPwr PtM (page 225) is related to the
nominal power of each gen-set (i.e. if one genset in the group has nominal power of 500 kW and another has
200 kW and MinPwr PtM (page 225) is set to 50%, first gen-set will produce minimally 250 kW and the
other will produce at least 100 kW). This function works regardless of selected import/export limit or selected
IMP/EXP control in parallel to Mains operation. However, the Export limit function has higher priority and
gensets may operate with output lower than MinPwr PtM (page 225), if Export limit is set to ENABLED.
Note: If the setpoint #SysLdCtrl PtM (page 197) is set to BASELOAD, the load sharing is done by
gen-set controller individually without any control from InteliMains-NT. In this case setpoint Gener
protect:Min power PtM in gen-set controller is considered individually for each gen-set (i.e. it is possible
to set different minimal running power for each gen-set).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Basic settings

Vm VT ratio
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,10 - 500,00 [V/V]
Force value
Default value 1,00 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,01
Comm object 9579 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to adjust the mains voltage transformers ratio.
Note: Adjust the setpoint to the value of 1.00 if the mains voltage is connected directly to the controller
terminals, i.e. without transformers.

Note: Example: if you have transformers with ratio 6000/100V adjust the setpoint to the value of 60.00.

Note: The range of the mains voltage inputs must be adjusted properly. See the setpoint Vm
InpRangeSel (page 226).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 225

 Vm InpRangeSel
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 277V, 120V [-]
Force value
Default value 277 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10662 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint selects the range of the mains voltage terminals. The 120 V range is available only in IM-NTC
hardware. The IM-NT has the range adjusted fixedly to 277 V regardless of this setpoint.
Note: The 277 V range is suitable for both European (230 V) and American (277 V) measurement. The
range 120 V is intended for high-voltage applications where voltage transformers with 100 V secondary
range are used or for alternative American (120 V) measurement.

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus VT ratio
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,10 - 500,00 [V/V]
Force value
Default value 1,00 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,01
Comm object 9580 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to adjust the bus voltage transformers ratio.
Note: Adjust the setpoint to the value of 1.00 if the bus voltage is connected directly to the controller
terminals, i.e. without transformers.

Example: Example: if you have transformers with ratio 6000/100V adjust the setpoint to the value of
60.00.

Note: The range of the bus voltage inputs must be adjusted properly. See the setpoint BusInpRangeSel
(page 227).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 226

 BusInpRangeSel
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 277V, 120V [-]
Force value
Default value 277 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10663 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint selects the range of the bus voltage terminals. The 120V range is available only in IM-NTC
hardware. The IM-NT has the range adjusted fixedly to 277V regardless of this setpoint.
Note: The 277V range is suitable for both European (230V) and American (277V) measurement. The
range 120V is intended for high-voltage applications where voltage transformers with 100V secondary
range are used or for alternative American (120V) measurement.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsNomV
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 10 - 30000[V]
Force value
Default value 231 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8277 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the nominal mains voltage (phase to neutral). If you do not know the phase-
neutral nominal voltage, you can adjust the phase-phase nominal voltage MainsNomVph-ph (page 228).
The controller will then recalculate the phase-neutral nominal voltage automatically.
Note: The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format in GenConfig.

Note: If different voltage on Mains and on Bus is required the following procedure is required:
required:
Both setpoints (BusNomV (page 229) and MainsNomV (page 227)) must be adjusted to the same
values according to the value of actual Bus nominal voltage. E.g. Busnominal is 231 V but Mains
nominal is 240 V.
In this case both setpoints need to be adjusted to 231 V and setpoints of corresponding protections for
Mains need to be set assymetrically. For 240 V on Mains it is typical to open MCB when voltage reaches
254 V or 225 V. Since the setpoint is adjusted to 231 V corresponding protection setpoints need to be
adjusted to Bus >V = 106% and Bus <V = 97 % (hence the desired values are reached).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 227

 MainsNomVph-ph
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 17 - 60000 [V]
Force value
Default value 400 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9673 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the nominal mains voltage (phase to phase). This setpoint is also recalculated
automatically when the phase-neutral nominal voltage MainsNomV (page 227) is changed.
This setpoint can be used if you know the phase-phase nominal voltage only. The controller will recalculate
the phase-neutral nominal voltage automatically when this setpoint is changed.
Note: The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format in GenConfig.

Note: If different voltage on Mains and on Bus is required the following procedure is required:
Both setpoints (MainsNomVph-ph (page 228) and BusNomVph-ph (page 230)) must be adjusted to
the same values according to the value of actual Bus nominal voltage. E.g. Bus nominal is 400 V but
Mains nominal is 415 V.
In this case both setpoints need to be adjusted to 400 V and setpoints of corresponding protections for
Mains need to be set assymetrically. For 415 V on Mains it is typical to open MCB when voltage reaches
440 V or 390 V. Since the setpoint is adjusted to 400 V corresponding protection setpoints need to be
adjusted to Bus >V = 106% and Bus <V = 97 % (hence the desired values are reached).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 228

 BusNomV
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 10 - 30000 [V]
Force value
Default value 231 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9888 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the nominal bus voltage (phase to neutral). If you do not know the phase-
neutral nominal voltage, you can adjust the phase-phase nominal voltage BusNomVph-ph (page 230). The
controller will then recalculate the phase-neutral nominal voltage automatically.
Note: The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format in GenConfig.

Note: If different voltage on Mains and on Bus is required the following procedure is required:
Both setpoints (BusNomV (page 229) and MainsNomV (page 227)) must be adjusted to the same
values according to the value of actual Bus nominal voltage. E.g. Bus nominal is 231 V but Mains
nominal is 240 V.
In this case both setpoints need to be adjusted to 231 V and setpoints of corresponding protections for
Mains need to be set assymetrically. For 240 V on Mains it is typical to open MCB when voltage reaches
254 V or 225 V. Since the setpoint is adjusted to 231 V corresponding protection setpoints need to be
adjusted to Bus >V = 106% and Bus <V = 97 % (hence the desired values are reached).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 229

 BusNomVph-ph
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 17 - 60000[V]
Force value
Default value 400 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9907 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the nominal bus voltage (phase to phase). This setpoint is also recalculated
automatically when the phase-neutral nominal voltage BusNomV (page 229) is changed.
This setpoint can be used if you know the phase-phase nominal voltage only. The controller will recalculate
the phase-neutral nominal voltage automatically when this setpoint is changed.
Note: The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format in GenConfig.

Note: If different voltage on Mains and on Bus is required the following procedure is required:
Both setpoints (MainsNomVph-ph (page 228) and BusNomVph-ph (page 230)) must be adjusted to
the same values according to the value of actual Bus nominal voltage. E.g. Bus nominal is 400 V but
Mains nominal is 415 V.
In this case both setpoints need to be adjusted to 400 V and setpoints of corresponding protections for
Mains need to be set assymetrically. For 415 V on Mains it is typical to open MCB when voltage reaches
440 V or 390 V. Since the setpoint is adjusted to 400 V corresponding protection setpoints need to be
adjusted to Bus >V = 106% and Bus <V = 97 % (hence the desired values are reached).

6 back to List of setpoints

DeadBusLevel
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 - 50.0 [%]
Force value
Default value 6.5 % YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1 % of BusNomV (page 229)
Comm object Related applications MGCB, MCB, FDR
Description
The limit is floored to a whole number (@power format in V), the limit is floored to a number with two decimal
places (@power format in kV).
Dead bus breaker closing is disabled by this setpoint if the limit is floored to zero value (e.g. when there is
only 0% or 0.1% set and the calculated limit is 0V). The voltage has to be lower than the calculated limit to
allow dead bus breaker closing.
Mains voltage measurement is not affected by this change in any way.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 230

 DeadBusLLevel
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 - 50.0 [%]
Force value
Default value 6.5 % YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1 % of BusNomV (page 229)
Comm object Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
All the rules for the limit calculation apply to this setpoint in the same way as for DeadBusLevel (page 230).

6 back to List of setpoints

DeadBusRLevel
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 - 50.0 [%]
Force value
Default value 6.5 % YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1 % of BusNomV (page 229)
Comm object 14473 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
All the rules for the limit calculation apply to this setpoint in the same way as for DeadBusLevel (page 230).

6 back to List of setpoints

Nomin current
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 - 10000[A]
Force value
Default value 300 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8275 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the maximal allowed current at the mains feeder.
The nominal current is used as the basis (100 %) for mains thermal over current protection (2POvrldStEvDel
(page 266)), and for short current protection (Mains2Inom del (page 267)).
Note: The setpoints MainsCTprim (page 232) and MainsCTsec (page 232) must be adjusted properly
to obtain correct mains current readings.

IMPORTANT: The maximum measurable input current to the controller current terminals is
11 A.

IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the CT terminals from the controller while there is nonzero
current in the CT primary circuit!

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 231

 NominMainsImp
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 - 32000[kW]
Force value
Default value 200 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8276 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the maximal allowed power imported from the mains. It is used as the
100% for the IDMT overload protection (Mns2POvrldProt (page 281)) as well as for some regulation loops.
Note: The actual setpoint units and range depend on setting of the Power format in GenConfig.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsCTprim
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 - 15000 [A]
Force value
Default value 300 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8274 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Nominal current of the primary side of the mains current transformers. The secondary side is adjusted by
setpoint MainsCTsec (page 232).

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsCTsec
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] /5A, /1A [-]
Force value
Default value /5A NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10556 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Nominal current of the secondary side of the mains current transformers. The primary side is adjusted by
setpoint MainsCTprim (page 232).
Note: The CT secondary nominal current is adjustable only in IM-NTC. The IM-NT has the CT
secondary nominal current adjusted fixedly to 5A regardless of this setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 232

 AuxCurrCTprim
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 - 15000 [A]
Force value
Default value 300 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8566 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Auxiliaries Current Transformer ratio – primary side.
Note: For more information on usage of auxiliary measurement of current see Soft Unload (page 202).

6 back to List of setpoints

AuxCurrCTsec
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] /1A, /5A [A]
Force value
Default value /5A NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10557 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Auxiliaries Current Transformer ratio – secondary side.
Note: Restricted to selection of /5A or /1A.

Note: For more information on usage of auxiliary measurement of current please refer to Soft Unload
(page 202).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 233

 FixVoltProtSelect
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] PHASE-NEUTRAL, PHASE-PHASE, BOTH+PH-N, BOTH+PH-PH[-]
Force value
Default value PHASE-NEUTRAL NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10647 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description

Phase-
The mains/bus voltage protections are based on phase-to-neutral voltages.
Neutral
Phase-
The mains/bus voltage protections are based on phase-to-phase voltages.
Phase
The Mains/Bus voltage protections are based both on phase-neutral and phase-phase
BOTH +
voltages. Generator voltage protections are based on phase to neutral voltage together
PH-N
with Mains average voltage and Mains undervoltage given by a curve.
The Mains/Bus voltage protections are based both on phase-neutral and phasephase
BOTH +
voltages. Generator voltage protections are based on phase to phase voltage together
PH-PH
with Mains average voltage and Mains undervoltage given by a curve.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Freq
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 50 Hz, 60 Hz [-]
Force value
Default value 50 Hz YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 13220 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint adjusts nominal system frequency (choose 50 Hz or 60 Hz).
Setpoint Nom frq offset is used for setting offset to the chosen nominal frequency (±2 Hz with step 0.01 Hz).
Controller regulates to the Nominal Freq + Nom frq offset frequency.
The value Nominal Freq + Nom frq offset is used as 100 % for frequency protections.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 234

 Nom frq offset
Setpoint group Basic Settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -2.00..2.00[Hz]
Force
Default value 0 valueAlternative YES
config
Step 0.01
Comm object 13221 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts offset of nominal system frequency () with step 0.01 Hz.
Controller regulates to the + frequency.
The value + is used as 100% for generator and mains/bus frequency protections.

6 back to List of setpoints

ControllerMode
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] OFF, MAN, AUT [-]
Force value
Default value OFF YES
Alternative config
Step -

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 235

 Comm object 8315 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint can be used to select the controller mode. It is equivalent to selecting the mode by the buttons
on the front panel or IntelliVision. Currently active mode is displayed on the controller main screen.
Note: If any of the mode forcing inputs REMOTE: REMOTE OFF (PAGE 483), REMOTE: REMOTE MAN
(PAGE 483), REMOTE: REMOTE AUT (PAGE 482) or REMOTE: REMOTE TEST (PAGE 483) is active,
then the currenly active mode can be different than the mode selected by the setpoint (resp. panel
buttons).

IM-NT does not influence gen-set group in this mode.

If Mains is healthy and no mains alarm is active, MCB is closed after MCB close del
if MCB opens on is set to MAINSFAIL. If MCB opens on is set to GEN RUNNING,
MCB stays closed all the time, regardless of the Mains condition.
In MCB application - if the controller is switched to OFF mode while the gen-sets are
OFF running and there is voltage on the bus, MCB is not closed before bus voltage
disappears.
In MGCB application - if the controller is switched to OFF mode while the Gen-sets
are running and there is voltage on the bus, MGCB is opened and after AMF
settings:FwRet break MCB is closed (if there is Mains voltage).
Binary output SYS START /STOP (PAGE 519) is not active.
It is possible to close/open breakers manually under supervision of IM-NT controller
which doesn’t allow to close simultaneously breakers without synchronizing (e.g.
MCB and MGCB ).
If the Mains fails, controller opens MCB if MCB opens on is set to MAINSFAIL. After
the Mains returns, MCB stays opened. Otherwise MCB is controlled manually by
MAN pressing MCB ON/OFF button or closing MCBButton binary input.
In MGCB application – if the Mains fails and group of gen-sets is started and there is
voltage on the bus, then MGCB can be closed anytime by pressing MGCB ON/OFF
button.
Pressing of Start/Stop buttons closes/opens binary output Sys start/stop, i.e. cause
start/stop of the gen-set group.
Controller performs automatically sequences after Mains failure, closing/opening MCB and
MGCB , Peak shaving function, closing of Sys start/stop binary output.
MCB is opened according to setpoint MCB opens on after Mains failure or after the
Gen-sets are running.
MGCB is closed after the start of gen-set group as soon as an appropriate load
AUT reserve is achieved (Syst Res OK binary output closed). If Mains fails and MCB is
opened then MGCB stays closed unless voltage on the bus goes out of the limits.
Controller reacts on binary input REM START /STOP (PAGE 482) – if this input is
closed, controller activates binary output SYS START /STOP (PAGE 519) in order to
start gen-set group. In MGCB application MGCB can be closed before the output
activation (see also setpoint MGCBparalClose).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 236

 MCB application
Test on load - automatic start of the gen-sets (activation of binary output Sys
start/stop), load takeover and opening of MCB is performed. If the Mains fails during
test, load is transferred to the gen-sets.
MGCB application
Engine Start Only - start of the gen/sets and their synchronization on generator bus is
TEST
performed. After pressing MGCB button, it is synchronized and load is transferred to
gen-sets. After pressing MCB button MCB is opened and MGCB stays closed, gen-
sets are running in Island operation.
Test on load - MGCB is closed, gen-sets synchronized to the bus, load transferred to
Gen-sets and MCB opened. Return of the load to the Mains is adjusted via setpoint
ReturnTo mains.

6 back to List of setpoints

ContrInitMode
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] PREVIOUS, OFF, MAN, AUT, [-]
Force value
Default value PREVIOUS NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 13000 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts which mode will be activated when the controllers is powered on.

6 back to List of setpoints

Local buttons
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] PANEL, EXTBUTTONS, BOTH [-]
Force value
Default value PANEL NO
Alternative config
Step -

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 237

 Comm object 10588 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint selects which set of control buttons is currently active. Its function depends on which type of
controller is used. Please refer to the section which suits your controller / display version.
First section deals with the case of IGS-NT with built-in monochrome display.
Second section deals with the case of IGS-NT-BB with IV5 display.
Third section deals with the case of IGS-NT-BB with IV8.

Note: If you have IGS-NT (built-in display) and you use additional IV display all the sections may be
relevant (depending on the type of additional displays).

IGS-NT (built-in monochrome display)

The built-in buttons on the controller front panel (IG-NT) or terminal #1 (IS-NT) are
Panel
enabled, the binary inputs for external buttons are disabled.
The built-in buttons are disabled and the binary inputs for external buttons are
EXTButtons
enabled.
Both Both built-in buttons and binary inputs for external buttons are enabled.

Note: In case that additional IV display is connected to a controller it behaves in the way described
below.

IGS-NT-BB with IV-5 display

These settings are applicable to IV5 or IV8 connected as NT terminal 1 only.
Situation is depicted in the following figure.
Buttons in red box are inactive when EXTBUTTONS option is selected and active when PANEL or
BOTH option is selected.
Buttons in green box are active when any option is selected.
Behavior of buttons in orange box depends on functions assigned to each button individually. If any
function in the list in the note below is assigned to these buttons then it behaves as buttons in the red
box, if any other function is assigned to these buttons it behaves as buttons in the green box.
The binary inputs for external buttons are affected in the same way as in the case of IGS-NT (built-in
monochrome display) by this setpoint.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 238

 Note: In the case that more IV displays are connected they all behave the same (they are all clones of
each other).

Note: The binary inputs for external buttonst may be the following (depending on used application):
GCBButton, MCBButton, MGCBButton, FDRButton, BTBButton, FaultResButton, HornResButton,
StartButton, StopButton etc.

IGS-NT-BB with IV-8 display

These settings are applicable to IV5 or IV8 connected as NT terminal 1 only.
Situation is depicted in the following figure.
Buttons in red box are inactive when EXTBUTTONS option is selected and active when PANEL or
BOTH option is selected.
Buttons in green box are active when any option is selected.
Behavior of buttons in orange box depends on functions assigned to each button individually. If any
function in the list in the note below is assigned to these buttons then it behaves as buttons in the red
box, if any other function is assigned to these buttons it behaves as buttons in the green box.
The binary inputs for external buttons are affected in the same way as in the case of IGS-NT (built-in
monochrome display) by this setpoint.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 239

 Note: In the case that more IV displays are connected they all behave the same (they are all clones of
each other).

Note: The binary inputs for external buttonst may be the following (depending on used application):
GCBButton, MCBButton, MGCBButton, FDRButton, BTBButton, FaultResButton, HornResButton,
StartButton, StopButton etc.

6 back to List of setpoints

DispBaklightTO
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] OFF, 1-240 min, NO TIMEOUT [min]
Force value
Default value NO TIMEOUT YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10121 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts timeout after which the display (internal display or IS display #1) backlight is switched
off.
Note: When IntelliVision is used this setpoint does not adjust its behavior. Its backlight is adjusted by
internal IntelliVision "setpoint".

OFF The backlight is off all the time

NO TIMEOUT The backlight is on all the time

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 240

 UserBtn pulse
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.2 .. 10.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 0.2 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 14020 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the duration of User Button 1..16 pulse. For more information read the description of
LBO USER BUTTON 1 (PAGE 523).

6 back to List of setpoints

ImpCountDef1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 65535 [-]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14277 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the value to which the corresponding Impulse counter statistic is set when the binary
input IMPCOUNT SET 1 (PAGE 465).

6 back to List of setpoints

ImpCountDef2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 65535 [-]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14278 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the value to which the corresponding Impulse counter statistic is set when the binary
input IMPCOUNT SET 2 (PAGE 466).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 241

 ImpCountDef3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 65535 [-]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14279 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the value to which the corresponding Impulse counter statistic is set when the binary
input IMPCOUNT SET 3 (PAGE 466).

6 back to List of setpoints

ImpCountDef4
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 65535 [-]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14280 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the value to which the corresponding Impulse counter statistic is set when the binary
input IMPCOUNT SET 4 (PAGE 466).

6 back to List of setpoints

ConvCoefPulse1
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 - 65000 [/X]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10994 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The conversion ratio between incoming pulses at binary inputs PulseCounter 1/2/3/4 and output statistic
values PulseCounter 1/2/3/4. The ratio defines how many pulses (rising edges) have to be sensed at the
input in order to increase the output value. Unfinished “invisible” parts are stored in the controller even in the
case of power supply failure. Physical unit of the output statistic value has to correspond to the ratio unit
“/X”.
Note: Pulse width (both high/low levels) must be at least 100 ms in order to be correctly sensed!
Conversion ratio can be selected using the setpoints ConvCoefPulse1/2/3/4. The converted values are
visible in statistics – values PulseCounter 1/2/3/4. These values can be reset using Statistics window in
InteliMonitor.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 242

 ConvCoefPulse2
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 - 65000 [/X]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10995 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The conversion ratio between incoming pulses at binary inputs PulseCounter 1/2/3/4 and output statistic
values PulseCounter 1/2/3/4. The ratio defines how many pulses (rising edges) have to be sensed at the
input in order to increase the output value. Unfinished “invisible” parts are stored in the controller even in the
case of power supply failure. Physical unit of the output statistic value has to correspond to the ratio unit
“/X”.
Note: Pulse width (both high/low levels) must be at least 100 ms in order to be correctly sensed!
Conversion ratio can be selected using the setpoints ConvCoefPulse1/2/3/4. The converted values are
visible in statistics – values PulseCounter 1/2/3/4. These values can be reset using Statistics window in
InteliMonitor.

6 back to List of setpoints

ConvCoefPulse3
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 - 65000 [/X]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10996 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The conversion ratio between incoming pulses at binary inputs PulseCounter 1/2/3/4 and output statistic
values PulseCounter 1/2/3/4. The ratio defines how many pulses (rising edges) have to be sensed at the
input in order to increase the output value. Unfinished “invisible” parts are stored in the controller even in the
case of power supply failure. Physical unit of the output statistic value has to correspond to the ratio unit
“/X”.
Note: Pulse width (both high/low levels) must be at least 100 ms in order to be correctly sensed!
Conversion ratio can be selected using the setpoints ConvCoefPulse1/2/3/4. The converted values are
visible in statistics – values PulseCounter 1/2/3/4. These values can be reset using Statistics window in
InteliMonitor.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 243

 ConvCoefPulse4
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 65000 [/X]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10997 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The conversion ratio between incoming pulses at binary inputs PulseCounter 1/2/3/4 and output statistic
values PulseCounter 1/2/3/4. The ratio defines how many pulses (rising edges) have to be sensed at the
input in order to increase the output value. Unfinished “invisible” parts are stored in the controller even in the
case of power supply failure. Physical unit of the output statistic value has to correspond to the ratio unit
“/X”.
Note: Pulse width (both high/low levels) must be at least 100 ms in order to be correctly sensed!
Conversion ratio can be selected using the setpoints ConvCoefPulse1/2/3/4. The converted values are
visible in statistics – values PulseCounter 1/2/3/4. These values can be reset using Statistics window in
InteliMonitor.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsNomMidV
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 80 - 34641[V]
Force value
Default value 231 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 13117 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint defines the nominal Mains Medium Voltage.
There is supposed, that the medium voltage will be measured via LAI:MainsMidVolt.
In case the LAI: MainsMidVolt is configured, is this value also used as reference value Mains Voltage in
e.g. Q(Um) regulation.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 244

 VmMid VT ratio
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,10 - 500,00 [V/V]
Force value
Default value 1,00 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,01
Comm object 13118 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used to adjust the mains medium voltage transformers ratio.
Note: Adjust the setpoint to the value of 1.00 if the mains voltage is connected directly to the controller
terminals, i.e. without transformers.

Note: Example: if you have transformers with ratio 6000/100V adjust the setpoint to the value of 60.00.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Communication Settings

Controller name
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value IM-NT NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 8637 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is intended for a custom name of the controller, which is used for identification of the controller
in saved archives or remote connections. Maximal length of the name is 15 characters.
The setpoint can't be modified via the IG-NT built-in terminal.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 245

 LB/UART Log
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 11327 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint enables/disables logging of remote communication activity. If logging is enabled connection
and disconnection of each remote terminal as well as entering access code are recorded into the history.
Note: The terminal is disconnected automatically after 5 min of inactivity and next communication
request from the same terminal is considered as a new connection. When logging is enabled in certain
conditions the history may be filled up with large number of records related to the communication and
important records may be overwritten quite fast.

6 back to List of setpoints

Contr. address
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 24537 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the address of the particular controller at the CAN2 and / or RS485 bus. Each Gen-sets
connected to the same bus must have unique address.
If the setpoint CANnegotiation (page 253) is in AUT position, the address is assigned automatically. The
setpoint Contr. address (page 246) is preferred then, however if it is in conflict with other controller present
on the CAN2 bus other address will be assigned to avoid address collision.
Note: Address 1 is recommended for standalone Gen-sets.

Note: If you are connecting to the controller remotely you have to adjust the proper controller address in
connection settings of the remote client (InteliMonitor, GenConfig, Modbus client etc.)

Note: Address of the controller is also used for Modbus communication via RS485 etc. Address
adjusted by this setpoint is therefore universal address of the controller.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 246

 RS232(1) mode
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
DIRECT, MODEM (HW), MODEM (SW), MODBUS-DIRECT, MODBUSMDM( HW),
Range [units]
ECU LINK [-]
Force value
Default value DIRECT NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24522 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint selects the connection type for the serial port COM1.
Available as RS232 in all controller types.
Available also as RS485 in the IG-NT if the external display bus is not used. Selectable by the
setpoint (not available in IG-NT-BB, IG-NTC-BB, IS-NTC-BB and IS-NT - see ).

Connection to a local PC via RS232 or RS485 (with internal or external

Direct converter) interface. Use this option also for IG-IB connected via RS232
cable. The internal RS485 converter is enabled/disabled by the setpoint
Modem point-to-point connection to a remote PC with hardware data flow
Modem (HW)
control using signals RTS/CTS. Full modem cable is required for this option.
Modem point-to-point connection to a remote PC with software data flow
Modem (SW) control. 3-wire cable (RX, TX, GND) is sufficient for this option. Use this
option only if your modem does not provide RTS/CTS signals.
Modbus RTU connection in slave mode via RS232 or RS485 (with internal or
external converter) interface. The internal RS485 converter is
Modbus enabled/disabled by the setpoint , the communication speed is adjustable by
the setpoint RS232(1)MBCSpd. See the latest communication guide for more
information about Modbus protocol.
Modbus RTU connection in slave mode via modem with hardware data flow
control. The communication speed is adjustable by the setpoint RS232
Modbus-MDM(HW)
(1)MBCSpd (page 249). See the latest communication guide for more
information about MODBUS protocol.
Connection to an electronic-controlled engine which uses non-J1939 ECU.
Ecu-Link
The proper ECU type must be also configured with GenConfig.

6 back to List of setpoints

RS232(2) mode
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
DIRECT, MODEM (HW), MODEM (SW), MODBUS-DIRECT, MODBUSMDM( HW),
Range [units]
ECU LINK [-]
Force value
Default value DIRECT NO
Alternative config

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 247

 Step -
Comm object 24451 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint selects the connection type for the serial port COM2.
Available as RS232 or RS485 in the IG-NTC and IS-NT controllers. Selectable by the setpoint .
Available only as RS485 in the IG-NTC-BB and IS-NTC-BB controllers.
Not available in IG-NT.

Connection to a local PC via RS232 or RS485 (with internal or external

Direct converter) interface. Use this option also for IG-IB connected via RS232
cable. The internal RS485 converter is enabled/disabled by the setpoint
Modem point-to-point connection to a remote PC with hardware data flow
Modem (HW)
control using signals RTS/CTS. Full modem cable is required for this option.
Modem point-to-point connection to a remote PC with software data flow
Modem (SW) control. 3-wire cable (RX, TX, GND) is sufficient for this option. Use this
option only if your modem does not provide RTS/CTS signals.
Modbus RTU connection in slave mode via RS232 or RS485 (with internal or
external converter) interface. The internal RS485 converter is
Modbus enabled/disabled by the setpoint , the communication speed is adjustable by
the setpoint RS232(2)MBCSpd (page 249). See the latest communication
guide for more information about Modbus protocol.
Modbus RTU connection in slave mode via modem with hardware data flow
control. The communication speed is adjustable by the setpoint RS232
Modbus-MDM(HW)
(2)MBCSpd (page 249). See the latest communication guide for more
information about Modbus protocol.
Connection to an electronic-controlled engine which uses non-J1939 ECU .
Ecu-Link
The proper ECU type must be also configured with GenConfig.

Note: The COM2 prot is not available in the basic IG-NT version.

Note: The RS232 connector is no more available in hardware version 2.0 and above. The COM2 port is
redirected to the RS485(2) terminals all the time. That means modem is not supported at COM2 in these
hardware versions. For modem use the COM1 port instead.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 248

 RS232(1)MBCSpd
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 [bps]
Force value
Default value 9600 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24477 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the communication speed on the COM1 connector when it is switched to Modbus or
Modbus-MDM(HW) mode. See also the setpoint RS232(1) mode (page 247).

6 back to List of setpoints

RS232(2)MBCSpd
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 [bps]
Force value
Default value 9600 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24420 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the communication speed on the COM2 connector when it is switched to Modbus or
Modbus-MDM(HW) mode. See also the setpoint RS232(2) mode (page 247).

6 back to List of setpoints

RS232(1)MdmIni
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24436 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint can be used to add extra AT commands at the end of the initialization sequence of the modem
connected to the COM1 port. The command can be entered with as well as without the "AT" prefix, are
separated with semicolon and maximal length is 31 characters.
The setpoint can't be modified via the IG-NT built-in terminal.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 249

 RS232(2)MdmIni
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24449 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint can be used to add extra AT commands at the end of the initialization sequence of the modem
connected to the COM2 port. The command can be entered with as well as without the "AT" prefix, are
separated with semicolon and maximal length is 31 characters.
The setpoint can't be modified via the IG-NT built-in terminal.
Using a modem at the COM2 port is not supported since the hardware version 2.0. For modem use the
COM1 port instead.

6 back to List of setpoints

CAN bus mode

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] 32C,8C [-]
Force value
Default value 32C NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24499 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
CAN bus speed selection.
32C: High speed CAN (250 kbps) applicable up to 32 controllers, CAN bus length limited up to 200
meters.
8C: Low speed CAN (50 kbps) applicable up to 8 controllers, CAN bus length limited up to 900
meters.
Change of this setpoint is applied after the controller is switched off and on again.
Note: Use low speed for long distance connection only. Set all connected controllers to the same speed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 250

 CAN2emptDetect
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9921 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Enables the detection of missing other controllers on the CAN2 bus. If the setpoint is in ENABLED position
and there aren't any other controllers detected on the CAN2 bus (the complete bus, not only within the logical
group) the alarm CAN2Empty is issued.

6 back to List of setpoints

SHxOcol detect
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value ENABLED NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 11024 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable evaluation of collisions of virtual shared peripheral modules. A
collision means that there is more than one source (shared outputs module) active on the CAN2 bus.
Note: In certain situations multiple sites with bus tie breakers may need to have more shared outputs
sources as the CAN bus line is in some points interrupted according to bus tie breakers position.
Normally a collision would be indicated if there were more sources on the bus and this setpoint can be
used to disable the evaluation of collisions in this special case.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 251

 CANAddrSwitch1
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value MODEM NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24399 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint selects function of the terminal address 122 at the CAN2 line. See the latest communication
guide for details about this topic.

Modem The address is used for modem connection via I-LB

Other The address is used for direct connection to any other device as e.g. IV8 or I-RD.

6 back to List of setpoints

CANAddrSwitch2
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OTHER NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24398 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint selects function of the terminal address 125 at the CAN2 line. See the latest communication
guide for details about this topic.

Modem The address is used for modem connection via I-LB.

Other The address is used for direct connection to any other device as e.g. IV8 or I-RD.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 252

 CANnegotiation
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] OFF, AUT [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 11866 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint defines if CAN address is used in the standard way or CAN addresses are reconfigured
internally.

The control unit has the same address which is necessary for communication. The address
OFF
can be changed only from InteliMonitor or controller screen.
Controllers can change their addresses when are interconnected via CAN2 bus to prevent
CAN bus collision. Controller address is set up to different address if another unit with the
same address is detected on the CAN bus.
IMPORTANT: Make sure all controllers have this setpoint set to AUT. It does
AUT not work properly if there are controllers with this setpoint adjusted to OFF and
others with AUT setting.

IMPORTANT: This function is not designed to cooperate with controllers which

do not support it. Make sure it is adjusted to OFF if there are other controllers
on the CAN without this setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 253

 IP Addr mode
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value AUTOMATIC NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24259 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted.

The ethernet connection is adjusted fixedly according to the setpoints IP address

(page 255), Net mask (page 255), Gateway IP (page 256), DNS IP (page 260).
Fixed This method should be used for classic ethernet or Internet connection. When this
type of connection is opening the controller is specified by it's IP address. That
means it would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static).
The ethernet connection settings is obtained automatically from the DHCP
server. The obtained settings is then copied to the related setpoints (it is not
possible to set those setpoints manually in this setting, for more information please
see the following setpoints IP address (page 255), Net mask (page 255),
Gateway IP (page 256), DNS IP (page 260)). If the process of obtaining the
settings from DHCP server is not successful the value 000.000.000.000 is copied
Automatic
to the setpoint IP address (page 255) and the module continues trying to obtain
the settings.
This method is beneficial for AirGate (page 257) connection as it makes the
connection very easy, in fact "plug and play". When this type of connection is
opening the controller is specified by it's AirGate ID and the IP address does not
play any role.

IMPORTANT: If you need to use fixed ethernet settings you should consult the proper setting
with your IT specialist.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 254

 IP address
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 192.168.1.254 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24376 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
In fixed settings mode this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet interface of the
controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
In Automatic settings mode this setpoint is used to display the IP address, which has been assigned
by the DHCP server. It is not possible to change the setpoint value manually in this setting (the value
is immediately reverted back by controller communication module IB-COM).

6 back to List of setpoints

Net mask
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 255.255.255.0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24375 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
In fixed settings mode this setpoint is used to adjust the network mask of the network segment where
the controller is connected.
In Automatic settings mode this setpoint is used to display the network mask which has been
assigned by the DHCP server. It is not possible to change the setpoint value manually in this setting
(the value is immediately reverted back by controller communication module IB-COM).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 255

 Gateway IP
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 192.168.1.1 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24373 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
In fixed settings mode this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the gateway of the network
segment where the controller is connected.
In Automatic settings mode this setpoint is used to display the gateway IP address which has been
assigned by the DHCP server. It is not possible to change the setpoint value manually in this setting
(the value is immediately reverted back by controller communication module IB-COM).
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and / or Internet.

6 back to List of setpoints

ComApProtoPort
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] 1 - 255 [-]
Force value
Default value 23 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 24374 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the port, which is used for ethernet connection to a PC with any of ComAp PC
program (i.e. InteliMonitor, GenConfig). This setpoint should be adjusted to 23, which is the default port used
by all ComAp PC programs. A different value should be used only in special situations as e.g. sharing one
public IP address among many controllers or to overcome a firewall restrictions.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 256

 AirGate
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value ENABLED NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24365 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint selects the ethernet connection mode.

This is a standard mode, in which the controller listens to the incoming traffic and
answers the TCP/IP queries addressed to him. This mode requires the controller to be
Disabled
accessible from the remote device (PC), i.e. it must be accessible at a public and static
IP address if you want to connect to it from the Internet.
This mode uses the "AirGate" service, which hides all the issues with static/public
address into a black box and you do not need to take care about it. You just need only a
Enabled
connection to the Internet. The AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint
AirGate IP (page 257).

6 back to List of setpoints

AirGate IP
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] max. 32 characters [-]
Force value
Default value airgate.comap.cz NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24364 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free AirGate
server provided by ComAp at address airgate.comap.cz if your company does not operate it's own AirGate
server.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 257

 SMTP authent
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24371 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Switch this setpoint to ENABLED position if your SMTP server requires authenticated access. You have
also adjust SMTP user name and SMTP password. Ask your internet provider or IT manager for this
information.
Note: Most of public free SMTP servers require authentication. You will get instructions when you
register to the freemail service.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP user name

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] max. 32 characters [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24370 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the user name for the SMTP server if SMTP authent (page 258) is enabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP password
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] max. 32 characters [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24369 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server if SMTP authent (page 258) is enabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 258

 SMTP address
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] max. 32 characters
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24368 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
IMPORTANT: Proper setting of SMTP-related setpoints as well as controller mailbox are
essential for sending alerts via e-mails.

This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) of the SMTP server. Please ask your internet provider or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may also use one of free SMTP servers, e.g. smtp.gmail.com. However, please note that
some free SMTP servers may cause delays (in hours..) when sending e-mails.

Note: If you do not want to send active e-mails, you may leave this setpoint blank, as well as other
setpoints related to SMTP server and e-mail settings.

6 back to List of setpoints

Contr mailbox
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] max. 32 characters [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24367 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Enter an existing e-mail address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller. Do not enter your or other recipient's e-mail address. Recipient's
addresses are to be entered into the setpoints AcallCH1-Addr (page 381), AcallCH2-Addr (page 381) and
AcallCH3-Addr (page 382).
Note: Most of SMTP server will reject sending e-mails that contain non-existing address in the sender
address field.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 259

 Time zone
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value GMT+1:00 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24366 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS IP
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 3.8.0
Settings
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 8.8.8.8 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24362 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
In fixed settings mode this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which is needed
to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
In Automatic settings mode this setpoint is used to display DNS server, which has been assigned by
the DHCP server. It is not possible to change the setpoint value manually in this setting (the value is
immediately reverted back by controller communication module IB-COM).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 260

 Group: ComProtSettings
Horn Timeout
Setpoint group ComProtSettings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] OFF, 1s .. 3600s, NO TIMEOUT [-]
Force value
Default value 10 YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 8264 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts time after which the HORN (PAGE 499) is automatically deactivated although the alarms
still haven't been reset. If the setpoint is adjusted to OFF the horn output is not activated at all, the NO
TIMEOUT position means the horn output is not deactivated until the alarms are reset.

6 back to List of setpoints

BinInp delay 1
Setpoint group ComProtSettings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 1.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 10131 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay #1 which can be assigned to an input configured as alarm input (protection).
Note: Protections configured at a binary inputs can have either fixed 0.5 s evaluation delay or there are
three independent delay setpoints and one of them can be assigned to each particular binary input
protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

BinInp delay 2
Setpoint group ComProtSettings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 5.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 10132 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay #2 which can be assigned to an input configured as alarm input (protection).
Note: Protections configured at a binary inputs can have either fixed 0.5 s evaluation delay or there are
three independent delay setpoints and one of them can be assigned to each particular binary input
protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 261

 BinInp delay 3
Setpoint group ComProtSettings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 10.0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 10133 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay #3 which can be assigned to an input configured as alarm input (protection).
Note: Protections configured at a binary inputs can have either fixed 0.5 s evaluation delay or there are
three independent delay setpoints and one of them can be assigned to each particular binary input
protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

ForceBlockDel1
Setpoint group ComProtSettings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 60.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 5.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 10569 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay after the binary input FORCE BLOCK 1 (PAGE 458) has been deactivated,
when the alarms configured as Force block #1 are started to be evaluated.

6 back to List of setpoints

ForceBlockDel2
Setpoint group ComProtSettings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 60.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 5.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 10570 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay after the binary input FORCE BLOCK 2 (PAGE 458) has been deactivated,
when the alarms configured as Force block #2 are started to be evaluated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 262

 ForceBlockDel3
Setpoint group ComProtSettings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 60.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 5.0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 10571 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay after the binary input FORCE BLOCK 3 (PAGE 458) has been deactivated,
when the alarms configured as Force block #3 are started to be evaluated.

6 back to List of setpoints

ResetActAlarms
Setpoint group ComProtSettings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value ENABLED NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10665 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description

Pressing of the fault reset button (at any terminal or external button) resets only
Disabled inactive alarms. Active alarms remain in the alarmlist unchanged and must be reset
again when they become inactive.
Pressing of the fault reset button (at any terminal or external button) resets all alarms
that are currently present in the alarm list. Inactive alarms disappear from the alarm
Enabled
list immediately, active alarms are changed to "confirmed" state and disappear when
the alarm condition disappear or the alarm starts to be blocked.

Note: ENABLED position corresponds to the method how the IG-classic and IS-classic controllers
handled the alarms.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 263

 Group: Analog protect
Batt >V
Setpoint group Analog protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 8.0 .. 40.0 [V]
Force value
Default value 30.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 9262 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the warning level for battery overvoltage alarm.

6 back to List of setpoints

Batt <V
Setpoint group Analog protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 8.0 .. 40.0 [V]
Force value
Default value 20.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 9265 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the warning level for battery undervoltage alarm.

6 back to List of setpoints

Batt volt del

Setpoint group Analog protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Force value
Default value 5.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 9264 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for battery overvoltage and undervoltage alarms.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 264

 Group: Mains protect
OverldStrtEval
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 100 .. 200 [%]
Force value
Default value 150 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8280 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint specifies the power level relative to the nominal power, where the mains overload (IDMT)
protection starts to be evaluated. See the setpoint 2POvrldStEvDel (page 266) for more information about
the mains overload (IDMT) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 265

 2POvrldStEvDel
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 5.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8281 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the reaction time of the mains overload (IDMT) protection if the load level is 200% of
the base level given by the setpoint OverldStrtEval.
The reaction time of the thermal overload protection is not fixed; it depends on how much is the load above
the limit (base level). The higher is the load the shorter the reaction time will be.

Image 4.79 Example of thermal overload protection curve

Note: When the IDMT protection is activated the MCB is opened and the event is recorded in the
Alarmlist and History. The further MCB closing is blocked until Fault Reset has been pressed to clear the
alarm.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 266

 Mains2Inom del
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 60.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 10.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8283 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the reaction time of the IDMT overcurrent protection if the overcurrent level is 200% of
the Nomin current (page 231).
The reaction time of the IDMT overcurrent protection is not fixed; it depends on how much is the actual
current above the limit (nominal). The higher is the overcurrent the shorter the reaction time will be.

Image 4.80 Example of IDMT overcurrent

Note: When the IDMT protection is activated the MCB is opened and the event is recorded in the
Alarmlist and History. The further MCB closing is blocked until Fault Reset has been pressed to clear the
alarm.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains >V MP
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Mains <V MP (page 270) .. 150 [%]
Force value
Default value 110 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8291 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts threshold for mains overvoltage protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 267

 Mains >V Hys
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 50.0 [%]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 16403 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for deactivation of mains overvoltage protections. The thresholds for this
protection is adjusted by setpoint Mains >V MP (page 267).
Note: Hysteresis is calculated as % value from nominal voltage.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains V del
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.00 .. 600.00 [s]
Force value
Default value 5.00 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 8292 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the delay for mains under- and overvoltage protections. The thresholds for these
protections are adjusted by setpoints Mains >V MP (page 267) and Mains <V MP (page 270).
Note: Although the resolution of this setpoint is 0.01 s, in fact the adjusted delay is rounded to the next
higher multiple of the period of the mains voltage. The period is either 0.02 s for 50 Hz systems or
0.0166s for 60 Hz systems. E.g. if the delay is set to 0.03 s at 50 Hz system the real delay will be 0.04 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 268

 Mains >>V MP
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Mains <<V MP (page 271) ..1300.0 [%]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 16409 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the threshold level for the second level of mains overvoltage protection. The
threshold is adjusted in % of the nominal mains voltage, which is either MainsNomV (page 227) or
MainsNomVph-ph (page 228), depending on the position of the setpoint FixVoltProtSelect (page
234).
The protection activates if the voltage in at least one phase gets over the threshold for time longer than
Mains >>V Del (page 270).
Note: The asociated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens either MCB (in applications where the MCB is controlled) or GCB (in
applications where the MCB is not controlled).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains >>V Hys

Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 50.0 [%]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 16404 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for deactivation of mains over-overvoltage protections. The thresholds
for this protection is adjusted by setpoint Mains >>V MP (page 269).
Note: Hysteresis is calculated as % value from nominal voltage.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 269

 Mains >>V Del
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 60000.00 [s]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16416 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the delay for second level of mains overvoltage protections. The thresholds for this
protection is adjusted by setpoints Mains >>V MP (page 269).
Note: Although the resolution of this setpoint is 0.01 s, in fact the adjusted delay is rounded to the next
higher multiple of the period of the mains voltage. The period is either 0.02 s for 50Hz systems or
0.0166 s for 60Hz systems. E.g. if the delay is set to 0.03 s at 50Hz system the real delay will be 0.04 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains <V MP
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 50 .. Mains >V MP (page 267) [%]
Force value
Default value 90 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8293 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts threshold for mains undervoltage protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains <V Hys

Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 50.0 [%]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 16405 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for deactivation of mains undervoltage protections. The thresholds
for this protection is adjusted by setpoints Mains <V MP (page 270).
Note: Hysteresis is calculated as % value from nominal voltage.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 270

 Mains <V Del
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 60000.00 [s]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16417 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the delay for mains undervoltage protections. The thresholds for this protection is
adjusted by setpoint Mains <V MP (page 270).
Note: Although the resolution of this setpoint is 0.01 s, in fact the adjusted delay is rounded to the next
higher multiple of the period of the mains voltage. The period is either 0.02 s for 50Hz systems or
0.0166 s for 60Hz systems. E.g. if the delay is set to 0.03 s at 50Hz system the real delay will be 0.04 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains <<V MP
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 100.0 .. Mains >>V MP (page 269) [%]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 16410 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the threshold level for the second level of mains undervoltage protection. The threshold
is adjusted in % of the nominal mains voltage, which is either or , depending on the position of the setpoint .
The protection activates if the voltage in at least one phase drops under the threshold for time longer than
Mains <<V Del (page 272).
Note: The associated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens either MCB (in applications where the MCB is controlled) or GCB (in
applications where the MCB is not controlled).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 271

 Mains <<V Hys
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 50.0 [%]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 16406 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for deactivation of mains under-undervoltage protections. The
thresholds for this protection is adjusted by setpoints Mains <<V MP (page 271).
Note: Hysteresis is calculated as % value from nominal voltage.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains <<V Del

Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 60000.00 [s]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16418 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the delay for mains undervoltage protections. The thresholds for this protection is
adjusted by setpoint Mains <<V MP (page 271).
Note: Although the resolution of this setpoint is 0.01 s, in fact the adjusted delay is rounded to the next
higher multiple of the period of the mains voltage. The period is either 0.02 s for 50Hz systems or
0.0166 s for 60Hz systems. E.g. if the delay is set to 0.03 s at 50Hz system the real delay will be 0.04 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 272

 Mains >f MP
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 500.00 [Hz]
Force value
Default value YES
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 8296 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the threshold level for the mains overfrequency protection. The threshold is adjusted in
offset of the system frequency ( + ).
The protection activates if the frequency in phase L3 gets over the threshold for time longer than Mains f del
(page 274).
Note: The associated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens either MCB (in applications where the MCB is controlled) or GCB (in
applications where the MCB is not controlled).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains >f Hys

Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100.00 [Hz]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16419 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for deactivation of mains overfrequency protections. The thresholds for
this protection is adjusted by setpoint Mains >f MP (page 273).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 273

 Mains f del
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600.00 [s]
Force value
Default value 5.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8297 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoints determines the delay for mains under- (defined by Mains >f (page 1)) and overfrequency
(defined by Mains <f (page 1)) protections.
Note: Although the resolution of this setpoint is 0.01 s, in fact the adjusted delay is rounded to the next
higher multiple of the period of the generator voltage. The period is either 0.02 s for 50 Hz systems or
0.0166 s for 60Hz systems. E.g. if the delay is set to 0.03 s at 50Hz system the real delay will be 0.04 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains >>f MP
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 500.00 [Hz]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16402 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the threshold level for the mains overfrequency protection. The threshold is adjusted in
offset of the system frequency ( + ).
The protection activates if the frequency in phase L3 gets over the threshold for time longer than Mains >>f
Del (page 275).
Note: The associated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens either MCB (in applications where the MCB is controlled) or GCB (in
applications where the MCB is not controlled).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 274

 Mains >>f Hys
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100.00 [Hz]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16420 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for deactivation of mains overfrequency protections. The thresholds for
this protection is adjusted by setpoint Mains >>f MP (page 274).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains >>f Del

Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 60000.00 [s]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16421 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the delay for mains under and overfrequency protections. The thresholds for this
protection is adjusted by setpoint Mains >>f MP (page 274) .
Note: Although the resolution of this setpoint is 0.01 s, in fact the adjusted delay is rounded to the next
higher multiple of the period of the mains voltage. The period is either 0.02 s for 50Hz systems or
0.0166 s for 60Hz systems. E.g. if the delay is set to 0.03 s at 50Hz system the real delay will be 0.04 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 275

 Mains <f MP
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -500.00 .. 0 [Hz]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 14588 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the threshold level for the mains underfrequency protection. The threshold is adjusted
in offset of the system frequency ( + ).
The protection activates if the frequency in phase L3 gets under the threshold for time longer than Mains <f
Del (page 277)).
Note: The associated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens either MCB (in applications where the MCB is controlled) or GCB (in
applications where the MCB is not controlled).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains <f Hys

Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100.00 [Hz]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16422 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the hysteresis for deactivation of mains underfrequency protections. The thresholds for
this protection is adjusted by the setpoint Mains <f MP (page 276).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 276

 Mains <f Del
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 60000.00 [s]
Force value
Default value NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16423 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the delay for mains underfrequency protections. The thresholds for this protection is
adjusted by setpoint Mains <f MP (page 276).
Note: Although the resolution of this setpoint is 0.01 s, in fact the adjusted delay is rounded to the next
higher multiple of the period of the mains voltage. The period is either 0.02 s for 50Hz systems or
0.0166 s for 60Hz systems. E.g. if the delay is set to 0.03 s at 50Hz system the real delay will be 0.04 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains Vunb del

Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 6000.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 1.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 9267 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay for mains voltage unbalance alarm (see Mains V unbal (page 277)).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains V unbal
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10548 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint defines the threshold level for Mains voltage unbalance protection. The voltage unbalance is
calculated as a maximum difference between phase voltages. This protection is evaluated with delay given
by Mains Vunb del (page 277).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 277

 Mains Iunb del
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 6000.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 3.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 9270 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Delay for Mains current asymmetry (unbalance). This protection treshold is adjusted by Mains I unbal
(page 278).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mains I unbal
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Force value
Default value 50 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9268 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint defines the threshold for Mains current asymmetry (unbalance). The current unbalance is
calculated as a maximum difference between phase currents. This protection is tripped with delay set by
setpoint Mains Iunb del (page 278).

6 back to List of setpoints

ROCOF prot
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, PARALLEL ONLY, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9840 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint activates or deactivates ROCOF protection.
See also setpoints ROCOF prot (page 278), ROCOF df/dt (page 279) and VS/ROCOF CBsel (page
281).
Note: Parallel operation is in this case considered only if there is at least one ComAp controller with
closed GCB to the bus. If MCB and MGCB are closed and there is no ComAp controller on the Bus
connected via CAN2 to the InteliMains-NT and with closed GCB, this situation cannot be considered as
parallel operation because of the function of MGCBparalClose (page 220).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 278

 VectorS limit
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 45 [°]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9843 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the threshold level for the vectorshift protection.
Note: To adjust this setpoint properly, check the value Max VectorS. The value is available on the
controller screen, contains the maximal measured vectorshift value since the bus has been
synchronized to the mains and after opening of MGCB or MCB it is "frozen". In normal conditions the
value should not be higher than 3 º and the most common setting of the threshold is about 7 º.

6 back to List of setpoints

ROCOF df/dt
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.1 .. 10.0 [Hz/s]
Force value
Default value 1.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 9844 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the trip level for ROCOF protection (Rate Of Change Of Frequency). The "filtration
level" for the ROCOF protection is adjusted by setpoint ROCOF Win (page 280).
Note: If measured value of df/dt exceeds ROCOF df/dt, ROCOF protection is activated. The message
ROCOF is writen in history of controller and corresponding logical binary output is activated ROCOF
TRP (PAGE 517). Value of df/dt is evaluated from mains voltage.

Note: To activate or deactivate ROCOF protection, please use ROCOF prot (page 278). Choose
proper breaker which will be opened if ROCOF protection activates by adjusting setpoint VS/ROCOF
CBsel (page 281).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 279

 ROCOF Win
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 3 .. 30 [-]
Force value
Default value 5 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9990 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the averaging level for the ROCOF protection. It defines number of periods of the
mains voltage in which the ROCOF protection is evaluated. The higher is the ROCOF Win the less sensitive
is the protection for short oscillations of the frequency to both directions from the nominal value and the
higher is the delay of evaluation.

6 back to List of setpoints

VectorS prot
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, PARALLEL ONLY, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value PARALLEL ONLY YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10551 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint selects the function of the built-in vectorshift protection.

Disabled The vectorshift protection is disabled.

The vectorshift protection is enabled only while the both MCB and GCB (and MGCB
Parallel Only
for applications with MGCB) are closed.
The vectorshift protection is active always while the MCB is closed, regardless of
Enabled
the GCB (and MGCB for applications with MGCB) position.

Note: The vectorshift protection is recorded into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm
list. When it occurs the controller opens either MCB or MGCB depending on the setpoint VectorS CB
sel. If the MCB is not controlled in the particular application then MGCB is opened.

Note: If a vectorshift is detected and consequently the MCB is opened, however mains voltage and
frequency remain in limits, the MCB is then reclosed again after Mains ret del (page 293), as the mains
is evaluated as healthy.

Note: Parallel operation is in this case considered only if there is at least one ComAp controller with
closed GCB to the bus. If MCB and MGCB are closed and there is no ComAp controller on the Bus
connected via CAN2 to the InteliMains-NT and with closed GCB , this situation cannot be considered as
parallel operation because of the function of MGCBparalClose (page 220).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 280

 VS/ROCOF CBsel
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MCB, MGCB [-]
Force value
Default value MCB YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10552 Related applications MGCB
Description
This setpoint selects which breaker will be opened when the VECTORSHIFT TRP (PAGE 531) and ROCOF
prot (page 278) is detected.
Note: If the MGCB is selected and a mains failure occurs the MGCB will be opened immediately when
the vectorshift or ROCOF is detected, however also MCB will be opened consequently due to other
mains protection as underfrequency or undervoltage.

6 back to List of setpoints

Mns2POvrldProt
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value ENABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10922 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Enables or disables the mains overload (IDMT) protection. This protection is evaluated with variable delay.
For more information see setpoint 2POvrldStEvDel (page 266).

6 back to List of setpoints

Mns2Inom prot
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value ENABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10923 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Enables or disables the mains overcurrent (IDMT) protection. This protection is evaluated with variable
delay. For more information see setpoint Mains2Inom del (page 267).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 281

 MainsAv10>V MP
Setpoint group Mains protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 100 .. 150 [%]
Force value
Default value 120.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 13795 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint defines the trip level for mains overvoltage protection based on 10-minutes moving average of
mains phase voltage. This protection is evaluated in each phase and is activated immediately when the
moving average value exceeds limit adjusted by this setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Bus protect

Bus >V
Setpoint group Bus protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Bus <V (page 282) - 150 [%]
Force value
Default value 110 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8305 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint determines treshold for bus overvoltage protection. This protection is evaluated with delay
given by setpoint Bus V del (page 283). Protection type is history record.
Note: All three phases are checked for bus voltage detection. Maximum out of those three is used.
For high voltage applications, the BusNomVph-ph can be used for nominal voltage setting.

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus <V
Setpoint group Bus protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 50 - Bus >V (page 282) [%]
Force value
Default value 90 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8307 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint determines treshold for bus undervoltage protection. This protection is evaluated with delay
given by setpointBus V del (page 283). Protection type is history record.
Note: All three phases are checked for bus voltage detection. Minimum out of those three is used.
For high voltage applications, the BusNomVph-ph can be used for nominal voltage setting.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 282

 Bus V del
Setpoint group Bus protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,00 - 600,00 [s]
Force value
Default value 5,00 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,01
Comm object 9105 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay for under- (Bus >V (page 282)) and overvoltage (Bus <V (page 282))
protections.
Note: Although the resolution of this setpoint is 0.01s, in fact the adjusted delay is rounded to the next
higher multiple of the period of the bus voltage. The period is either 0.02s for 50Hz systems or 0.0166s
for 60Hz systems. E.g. if the delay is set to 0.03s at 50Hz system the real delay will be 0.04s.

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus >f
Setpoint group Bus protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Bus <f (page 283) - 150,0 [%]
Force value
Default value 102,0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0,1
Comm object 8310 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint determines the treshold for bus overfrequency protection. This protection is evaluated with
delay given by setpoint Bus f del (page 284) and it is history record type.

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus <f
Setpoint group Bus protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 50,0 - Bus >f (page 283) [%]
Force value
Default value 98,0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0,1
Comm object 8312 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint determines the treshold for bus underfrequency protection. This protection is evaluated with
delay given by setpoint Bus f del (page 284) and it is history record type.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 283

 Bus f del
Setpoint group Bus protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,00 - 600,00 [s]
Force value
Default value 5,00 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,01
Comm object 11351 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay for under- (Bus <f (page 283)) and overfrequency (Bus >f (page 283))
protections.
Note: Although the resolution of this setpoint is 0.01s, in fact the adjusted delay is rounded to the next
higher multiple of the period of the bus voltage. The period is either 0.02s for 50Hz systems or 0.0166s
for 60Hz systems. E.g. if the delay is set to 0.03s at 50Hz system the real delay will be 0.04s.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 284

 BusMeasError
Setpoint group Bus protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 285

 Comm object 10558 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description

Disabled Bus measure error protection is disabled.

Bus measure error protection is enable and the corresponding alarm is of level 2 (RED).
Bus measure error is detected in MCB/MGCB application when the voltage on
controller‘s bus terminals is out of limits for 20 seconds under these conditions:
MCB application
MCB (feedback)was closed in AUT mode.
Any GCB in power management group (on CAN bus) was closed. The alarm is
Red activated after 20 s, however the MCB closing is blocked immediately for safety
reasons.
MGCB application
MCB and MGCB (feedbacks) were closed in AUT mode.
Any GCB in power management group (on CAN bus) was closed. The alarm is
activated after 20 s, however the MGCB closing is blocked immediately from
safety reasons.
Bus measure error protection is enable and the corresponding alarm is of level level 1
(YELLOW). Bus measure error is detected in MCB / MGCB application when the
voltage on controller‘s bus terminals is out of limits for 20 seconds under these
conditions:
MCB application
MCB (feedback)was closed in AUT mode.
Any GCB in power management group (on CAN bus) was closed. The alarm is
Yellow
activated after 20 s, however the MCB closing is blocked immediately for safety
reasons.
MGCB application
MCB and MGCB (feedbacks) were closed in AUT mode.
Any GCB in power management group (on CAN bus) was closed. The alarm is
activated after 20 s, however the MGCB closing is blocked immediately from
safety reasons.

Example Situation Setpoint Setting Resulting Behavior

MGCB stays closed even if bus
Island operation, no Mains voltage Not important
voltage goes out of the limits
Bus voltage limits are active,
Island operation, Mains voltage present,
Not important i.e. MGCB opens if bus voltage
e.g. during MainsRetDel
goes out of the limits
Gen-sets go to
Reverse synchronizing, load jump over/underfrequency state and
DISABLED
occurs are disconnected from the bus,
InteliMains-NT keeps

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 286

 Example Situation Setpoint Setting Resulting Behavior
synchronizing and at the end of
synchro timeout it opens MGCB
and closes MCB issuing alarm
“Wrn Rsync timeout“
After activation of bus
Reverse synchronizing, load jump protections InteliMains-NT
ENABLED
occurs starts to count down
MainsRetDel

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus V unbal
Setpoint group Bus protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 200 [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10549 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts threshold for bus voltage unbalance alarm. The voltage unbalance is calculated as a
maximum difference between phase voltages. This protection is history record type and its delay is set by
setpoint Bus V unb del (page 287).

6 back to List of setpoints

Bus V unb del

Setpoint group Bus protect Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,0 - 600,0 [s]
Force value
Default value 3,0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,1
Comm object 9273 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint determines the delay which is used in evaluation of Bus V unbal protection (threshold for this
protection is set by setpoint Bus V unbal (page 287)).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 287

 Group: AMF settings
EmergStart del
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 600 [s]
Force value
Default value 10 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8301 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint sets the delay between the mains failure and the command to start the gen-set group, i.e.
closing the binary output Sys start/stop.
Note: Link the output Sys start/stop with the inputs Sys start/stop at the gen-set controllers to achieve
the automatic start. Gen-set controllers have to be in AUT mode in order to react to this input.

6 back to List of setpoints

FwRet break
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 60,0 [s]
Force value
Default value 1,0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0,1
Comm object 8303 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description

This setpoint sets

The delay between MGCB opening and MCB closing during the
return to mains when reverse synchronizing (or mains parallel run) is
MGCB Aplication
not enabled.
The delay between MCB opening and MGCB closing in TEST Mode,
when ReturnTo mains = ENABLED and power cut comes.
This setpoint sets the delay between last GCB opening (from CAN2 bus)
MCB Application and MCB closing during the return to mains when reverse synchronizing (or
mains parallel run) is not enabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 288

 MCB close del
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,0 - 60,0 [s]
Force value
Default value 1,0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0,1
Comm object 8389 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint determines the delay for MCB closing after mains is restored. This delay is considered if no
gen-sets are running (i.e. output Sys start/stop not active).
Note: This setpoint is active in OFF and AUT mode.

6 back to List of setpoints

MCB opens on
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MAINSFAIL, GEN RUNNING, BUS VOLTAGE [-]
Force value
Default value MAINSFAIL YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9850 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint allows adjusting of condition of MCB opening after mains fail.

Controller opens the MCB when Mains fail is detected (24 VDC controlled circuit
MainsFail
breaker or contactor expected).
Controller opens the MCB only after at least one genset starts, i.e. the generator
Gen Running voltage is present to open the MCB (230 VAC controlled breaker expected). In OFF
mode, this means MCB stays closed all the time, regardless of the mains condition.
Controller opens the MCB only after there is voltage present on the bus to open the
Bus Voltage MCB (230 VAC controlled breaker expected). In OFF mode, this means MCB stays
closed all the time, regardless of the mains condition.

Note: Link the output Sys start/stop with the inputs Sys start/stop at the gen-set controllers to achieve
the automatic start. Gen-set controllers have to be in AUT mode in order to react on this input.

IMPORTANT: There are forbidden states for setting BUS VOLTAGE of this setpoint. If MCB
opens on = BUS VOLTAGE it is not possible to set MGCBparalClose to YES or MCB
CLOSED. This setting is always reverted to NO. If the setpoint MGCBparalClose is already
set to YES or MCB CLOSED than it is not possible to set MCB opens on to BUS VOLTAGE
(setting is always reverted to GEN RUNNING).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 289

 ReturnWithIntr
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9862 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description

Break transfer of the load back to the mains is enabled. If reverse synchronizing is not
Enabled
successful, MGCB is opened and after FwRet break (page 288) delay MCB is closed.
Gen-set stays running loaded in island when reverse synchronizing is not successful,
Disabled
even if mains is OK again. In this case warning Wrn RSync fail is issued.

Note: It is possible to use force values to change this setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

BreakerOverlap
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,0 - 300,0 [s]
Force value
Default value 1,0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0,1

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 290

 Comm object 8661 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
When limited time of running in parallel with mains is required, BreakerOverlap (page 290) defines max
time of running in parallel with mains. During this time soft transfer of load is activated. Used in AUT and
TEST modes.
When load is transferred from Mains to Gen-set (during the TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 485) procedure), MCB is
opened once level of Mains import reaches window <-5%;+5%> of the setpoint ProcessControl:
NominalMainsImp load, but latest when the timer given by the BreakerOverlap (page 290) elapsed.
When the load is transfered from the Gen-sets to Mains (during the TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 485) procedure),
the MGCB (MGCB application only) is opened once the generator power gets under value given by the
MGCB open lev (page 323) but latest when the timer given by the setpoint BreakerOverlap (page 290)
elapsed. In the MCB application, once the MCB is closed, the gen-sets load is started to be controlled
according to load control settings of the InteliMains (System Baseload or Import/Export) until the TEST
mode is active.
If the BreakerOverlap (page 290) = 0 (NO TIMEOUT) there is no time limitation of the load transfer. If the
load transfer was not finished until the timer Load Ramp (page 321) + 10% elapsed, the alarm
WrnTstOnLdFail is issued.
If the I/E-Pm meas (page 207) = NONE, then the duration of the load transfer is given exactly by the
BreakerOverlap (page 290).
When returning from the TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 485), the system remains in parallel operation until the gen-
sets are unloaded to MGCB open lev (page 323) or at maximum until BreakerOverlap (page 290) elapses.
Time count is set to 0.1 s
Controller immediately initiates corresponding breaker tripping to achieve as short as possible
parallel operation. Result is actual internal overlap time 0.1 s. It means that in total it takes about
0.3 s between a breaker feedback input activation and tripping output activation, if
BreakerOverlap (page 290) is set to 0.1 s.
Time count down is adjusted for settings 0.3 s and higher
Actual internal overlap time now matches the parameter setting, while it was about 0.1 s longer
before the adjustment. The adjustment does not apply to BreakerOverlap (page 290) setting to
0.2 s, the actual internal overlap time is still about 0.3 s with this setting. It is necessary to add
about 0.2 s to the internal time to get actual time between a breaker feedback input activation and
tripping output activation.
Note: Actual internal overlap time is time of internal parallel operation and does not match physical
time of parallel operation, which is always longer.
Physical time of parallel operation is time between closing of one breaker and opening of the other
one. It is longer than the internal time, because it takes controller time to detect that a breaker was
closed, then it takes controller time to activate tripping output and breaker itself needs some time to
open. E.g. Physical time of parallel operation is about 0.7 s + breaker reaction time, if
BreakerOverlap (page 290) is set to 0.5 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 291

 RetFromIsland
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MANUAL, AUTO [-]
Force value
Default value AUTO YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9590 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description

Controller remains in AUT mode and the manual return to Mains is done via MCB button.
"Manual Restore" message is displayed in alarmlist to notify operator - it will disappear
Manual automatically after MCB close button is pushed (i.e. reverse synchronizing is started). In
case that the gensets fail to supply the load, IM-NT automatically transfers load to the
Mains.
Auto Load is automatically transferred in AUT mode after mains is OK again.

Note: Select RetFromIsland = MANUAL when it is important at what time the load is transferred back to
the mains. Setting to MANUAL might be important only for applications with break transfers (with
synchronizing disabled).

6 back to List of setpoints

ReturnTo mains
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [V]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 8618 Related applications MGCB
Description
Note: This setpoint is relevant only for MGCB application only!

The setpoint influences the behavior of the TEST mode. If mains fail occurs during test (or is simulated using
Test on load function), the controller opens the MCB and switches the load to generators.

If the mains recovers, the generators stay running loaded until TEST mode is abandoned,
Disabled
typically to AUT mode where reverse synchronizing and soft unloading follows.
After the mains recovers, the generators will be reverse synchronized back to the mains,
Enabled softly unloaded and remain running without load (MGCB opens) until TEST mode is
abandoned or another mains failure occurs.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 292

 Mains ret del
Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 3600 [s]
Force value
Default value 60 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8302 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay after the mains return to the start of synchronizing of MCB.
Note: If synchronizing is disabled, a break transfer takes place after this delay elapses.

6 back to List of setpoints

MGCB Close Del

Setpoint group AMF settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 60 [s]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14040 Related applications MGCB
Description
This setpoint adjust the delay that is counted down before MGCB is closed in Island operation. This can be
used to postpone immediate closing of all MGCBs in complex system to prevent sudden load jump.
IMPORTANT: Once the controller is in the process of delay countdown it will not close MCB
even if the Mains goes OK again. The delay is counted down and then MGCB is closed and
standard transition sequence continues.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 293

 Group: Power Management
#Pwr mgmt mode
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] ABS(kW), ABS(kVA), REL (%) [-]
Force value
Default value ABS (kW) NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9874 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description

The power management is based on actual sum of active power of gen-sets

participating in the power management in particular control group (TotRunPact
(page 417)) and sum of active nominal power of gen-sets participating in the power
ABS (kW)
management in particular control group (TotRunPnom (page 418)). Setpoints
#LoadResStrt X (e.g. #%LdResStrt 1 (page 304)) and #LoadResStop X
(e.g.#LoadResStop 1 (page 298)) are set in absolute values in kW.
The power management is based on actual sum of apparent power of gen-sets
participating in the power management in particular control group (given by
TotRunPact and total reactive power, S^2 = P^2 + Q^2) and sum of apparent
nominal power of gen-sets participating in the power management in particular
ABS (kVA)
control group (this value is given for each gen-set as Nomin current multiplied by
GenNomV). Setpoints #LoadResStrt X (e.g. #%LdResStrt 1 (page 304)) and
#LoadResStop X (e.g. #LoadResStop 1 (page 298)) are set in absolute values in
kVA.
The power management is based on the relative load, i.e. ratio active power to
nominal power. Setpoints #%LdResStrt X (e.g. #%LdResStrt 1 (page 304)) and
REL (%) #%LdResStop X (e.g. #LoadResStop 1 (page 298)) are set in relative values in %.
Minimum allowable relative power reserve is evaluated from nominal power of all
running gen-sets combined in %.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#PriorAutoSwap
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, RUN HOURS EQU, LD DEMAND SWAP [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED NO
Alternative config
Step -

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 294

 Comm object 10593 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint selects the method of optimalization of priorities

IM-NT does not provide the AutoSwap functions for other controllers.
Disabled Priorities in gen-set controllers have their original values which do not
change.
Running Hours Equalization mode. All gen-sets in the logical group are
kept to work approximately the same number of running hours. See also
setpoints RunHoursBase (e.g. IGS-MINT application) and
Run Hours EQU
#RunHrsMaxDiff (page 312). Up to 32 engines can cooperate in this
mode. For more information on this function please refer to running hours
equalization.
For different sized engines, this mode allows to optimally select the
running engines according to the actual site load. Up to 3 engines can
cooperate in this mode (if more gen-sets are needed, please use IGS-NT-
LD Demand Swap PSC firmware in additional controller - more information about this FW
can be found on our webpage www.comap-control.com). Note that this
priority swapping function may be used only if #Pwr mgmt mode (page
294) is set to ABS (kW).
For different sized engines, this mode automatically select optimum
running gen-sets. This function supports up to 32 gen-sets (or less based
Efficiency
on how many other controllers are used in the installation). Not all
combinations of gen-sets are considered.

Note: Setpoint Priority in gen-set controllers is not actually changed by AutoSwap functions - the priority
is changed only locally during AutoSwap function is enabled. Note that after RHE is activated any
changes in the actual priority setpoints need to be confirmed by disabling and enabling RHE again to
take effect.

Note: If the optimization is enabled at least one gen-set in the group must be set as the master for the
optimization (Priority ctrl = MASTER). It is possible to have more than one master, the one with lowest
CAN address will play the role of the master and if it is switched off the next one will take the master
role.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

IMPORTANT: If the controller which is set to MASTER in PriorAutoSwap function is in

Emerg. manual, priority autoswapping will not work and no other controller will assume
MASTER role.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 295

 Priority ctrl
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, MASTER [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10592 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description

Disabled IM-NT does not provide the AutoSwap functions for other controllers.
At least one controller in the logical group has to be selected as MASTER if some
PriorityAuto Swapping mode is enabled. Only the controller with lowest CAN address
Master becomes an active master, the other are ignored by SLAVE controllers. The MASTER
controller evaluates the Priority changing for all other controllers in the group and sends
them the “forced” Priority values.

6 back to List of setpoints

#SysAMFstrtDel
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8549 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
System start delay between input Sys start/stop closing and start of Power Management System. When
input Sys start/stop is controlled by mains decoupling relay, this setpoint adjusts the delay among the mains
failure and the emergency start of the gen-sets. If the MCB feedback is closed, Power management is
started with 1 s delay after the input SYS START /STOP (PAGE 519) closing - parallel operation with the mains.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 296

 #SysAMFstopDel
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8550 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
System stop delay between input Sys start/stop opening and Power Management System deactivation.
When input SYS START /STOP (PAGE 519) is controlled by mains decoupling relay, this is a delay among the
end of mains failure and opening of GCB . If the MCB feedback is closed, Gen-sets are unloaded to mains
prior to GCB opening.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#LoadResStrt 1
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. #LoadResStop 1 (page 298) [kX]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8489 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start in absolute mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= ABS (kW) or ABS (kVA) if the reserve set #1 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter
Reserves, minimal running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: If the absolute power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints #%LdResStrt 2
(page 305), #%LdResStrt 3 (page 306) or #%LdResStrt 4 (page 307) depending on which load reserve
set is selected) determines also the number of Gen-sets (that are part of the power management) which
will start (according to their priority and nominal power).

Note: There is a possibility to assign this setpoint negative number. This can be used in some situations
to allow Gen-set start after SYS START /STOP (PAGE 519) gets active. It is not destined for normal
operation. Please refer to the Troubleshooting guide for more information (chapter "MGCB is not closed
although Gen-sets are running").

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 297

 #LoadResStop 1
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] #LoadResStrt 1 (page 297) .. 32000 [kX]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8491 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop in absolute mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= ABS (kW) or ABS (kVA) if the reserve set #1 is active.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 298

 #LoadResStrt 2
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. #LoadResStrt 2 (page 299)[kX]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8490 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start in absolute mode. i.e.#Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= ABS (kW) or ABS (kVA) if the reserve set #2 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter
Reserves, minimal running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: If the absolute power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints #LoadResStrt 1
(page 297), #LoadResStrt 3 (page 301) or #LoadResStrt 4 (page 303) depending on which load
reserve set is selected) determines also the number of Gen-sets (that are part of the power management)
which will start (according to their priority and nominal power).

Note: There is a possibility to assign this setpoint negative number. This can be used in some situations
to allow Gen-set start after Sys Start/Stop gets active. It is not destined for normal operation. Please
refer to the Troubleshooting guide for more information (chapter "MGCB is not closed although gensets
are running").

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 299

 #LoadResStop 2
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] #LoadResStop 2 (page 300) .. 32000 [kX]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8633 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop in absolute mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= ABS (kW) or ABS (kVA) if the reserve set #2 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter
Reserves, minimal running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 300

 #LoadResStrt 3
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. #LoadResStop 3 (page 302) [kX]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8831 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start in absolute mode. i.e.#Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= ABS (kW) or ABS (kVA) if the reserve set #3 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter
Reserves, minimal running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: If the absolute power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints #LoadResStrt 1
(page 297), #LOADRESSTRT 2 (PAGE 299) or #LoadResStrt 4 (page 303) depending on which load
reserve set is selected) determines also the number of Gen-sets (that are part of the power management)
which will start (according to their priority and nominal power).

Note: There is a possibility to assign this setpoint negative number. This can be used in some situations
to allow Gen-set start after Sys Start/Stop gets active. It is not destined for normal operation. Please
refer to the Troubleshooting guide for more information (chapter "MGCB is not closed although Gen-set
are running").

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 301

 #LoadResStop 3
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] #LoadResStrt 3 (page 301) .. 32000 [kX]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8833 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop in absolute mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= ABS (kW) or ABS (kVA) if the reserve set #3 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter
Reserves, minimal running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 302

 #LoadResStrt 4
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. #LoadResStop 4 (page 304) [kX]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8832 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start in absolute mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= ABS (kW) or ABS (kVA) if the reserve set #4 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter
Reserves, minimal running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: If the absolute power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints#LoadResStrt 1
(page 297), #LoadResStrt 2 (page 299) or #LoadResStrt 3 (page 301) depending on which load
reserve set is selected) determines also the number of Gen-sets (that are part of the power management)
which will start (according to their priority and nominal power).

Note: There is a possibility to assign this setpoint negative number. This can be used in some situations
to allow Gen-set start after Sys Start/Stop gets active. It is not destined for normal operation. Please
refer to the Troubleshooting guide for more information (chapter "MGCB is not closed although Gen-sets
are running").

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 303

 #LoadResStop 4
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] #LoadResStrt 4 (page 303) .. 32000 [kX]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8834 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop in absolute mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= ABS (kW) or ABS (kVA) if the reserve set #4 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter
Reserves, minimal running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#%LdResStrt 1
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. #%LdResStop 1 (page 305) [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10648 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start in relative mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= REL (%) if the reserve set #1 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter Reserves, minimal
running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: If the relative power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints #%LdResStrt 2
(page 305), #%LdResStrt 3 (page 306) or #%LdResStrt 4 (page 307) depending on which load reserve
set is selected) determines also the number of Gen-sets (that are part of the power management) which
will start (according to their priority and nominal power).

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 304

 #%LdResStop 1
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] #%LdResStrt 1 (page 304) .. 110 [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10652 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop in relative mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= REL (%) if the reserve set #1 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter Reserves, minimal
running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#%LdResStrt 2
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. #%LdResStop 2 (page 306) [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10649 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start in relative mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= REL (%) if the reserve set #2 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter Reserves, minimal
running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: If the relative power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints #%LdResStrt 1
(page 304), #%LdResStrt 3 (page 306) or #%LdResStrt 4 (page 307) depending on which load reserve
set is selected) determines also the number of Gen-sets (that are part of the power management) which
will start (according to their priority and nominal power).

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 305

 #%LdResStop 2
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] #%LdResStrt 2 (page 305) .. 110 [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10653 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop in relative mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= REL (%) if the reserve set #2 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter Reserves, minimal
running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#%LdResStrt 3
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. #%LdResStop 3 (page 307)[%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10650 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start in relative mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= REL (%) if the reserve set #3 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter Reserves, minimal
running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: If the relative power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints #%LdResStop 1
(page 305), #%LdResStop 2 (page 306) or #%LdResStop 4 (page 308) depending on which load
reserve set is selected) determines also the number of Gen-sets (that are part of the power management)
which will start (according to their priority and nominal power).

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 306

 #%LdResStop 3
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] #%LdResStrt 3 (page 306) .. 110 [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10654 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop in relative mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= REL (%) if the reserve set #3 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter Reserves, minimal
running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#%LdResStrt 4
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. #%LdResStop 4 (page 308) [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10651 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start in relative mode. i.e.#Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= REL (%) if the reserve set #4 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter Reserves, minimal
running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: If the relative power management is selected, this setpoint (or the setpoints #%LdResStop 1
(page 305), #%LdResStop 2 (page 306) or #%LdResStop 3 (page 307) depending on which load
reserve set is selected) determines also the number of gensets (that are part of the power management)
which will start (according to their priority and nominal power).

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 307

 #%LdResStop 4
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] #%LdResStrt 4 (page 307) .. 110 [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10655 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop in relative mode. i.e. #Pwr mgmt mode (page 294)
= REL (%) if the reserve set #4 is active. Learn more about reserves in the chapter Reserves, minimal
running power.
The currently active reserve set is selected by binary inputs LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473), LOAD RES 3 (PAGE
474) and LOAD RES 4 (PAGE 474). If none of these inputs is active the set #1 is selected.
Note: The reserve for stop must be always adjusted higher than the reserve for start.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#NextStrt Del
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 3600 [s]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8492 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the delay of starting the next Gen-set when the actual load reserve drops
below the adjusted reserve for start, but the group is still not overloaded.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 308

 #OverldNext Del
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 3600 [s]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8493 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
If the system reserve drops below the start limit for next Gen-set the delay #NextStrt del will begin to count
down. But if the load raises too quickly it might happen that the system gets overloaded already before the
delay #NextStrt del reaches zero.
This setpoint is used to prevent this situation. If the #NextStrt Del (page 308) timer is already counting
down (i.e. the condition for starting of next gen-set based on reserves is fullfiled), the total load of running
Gen-sets reach 90 % of their nominal capacity and the remaining time of the running timer is higher than
#OverldNextDel, the running timer is shortened to the value of #OverldNext Del (page 309) to speed up the
start-up of the next gen-set.
Note: The setpoint takes place only in island operation.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#NextStopDel
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 3600 [s]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8494 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the delay of stopping the next gen-set when the actual load reserve rises
above the adjusted load reserve for stop.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 309

 #SlowStopDel
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8495 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust how long the particular gen-set will suppress it's own Slow stop alarm to give
chance to another gen-set to start and replace the defective one.
If there isn't any available Gen-set to start, the alarm is not suppressed.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#MinRunPower 1
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 65000 [kW]
Force value
Default value 100 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9584 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust certain minimum value of the sum of nominal power of all running Gen-sets. If
the function is active, then the gen-sets would not be stopped, although the reserve for stop is fulfilled, if the
total remaining nominal power dropped below this minimal value.
There are 3 different MinRunPower setpoints, this particular one is activated by the input MinRun power 1
which is in MINT application (in InteliMains-NT it is for compatibility purposes only).
Note: When more than one binary input MinRunPower is activated then MinRunPower with the highest
number is active.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 310

 #MinRunPower 2
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 65000 [kW]
Force value
Default value 200 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9585 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust certain minimum value of the sum of nominal power of all running Gen-sets. If
the function is active, then the Gen-sets would not be stopped, although the reserve for stop is fulfilled, if the
total remaining nominal power dropped below this minimal value.
There are 3 different MinRunPower setpoints, this particular one is activated by the input MinRun power 2
which is in MINT application (in InteliMains-NT it is for compatibility purposes only).
Note: When more than one binary input MinRunPower is activated then MinRunPower with the highest
number is active.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#MinRunPower 3
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 65000 [kW]
Force value
Default value 300 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9586 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust certain minimum value of the sum of nominal power of all running Gen-sets. If
the function is active, then the Gen-sets would not be stopped, although the reserve for stop is fulfilled, if the
total remaining nominal power dropped below this minimal value.
There are 3 different MinRunPower setpoints, this particular one is activated by the input MinRun power 3
which is in MINT application (in InteliMains-NT it is for compatibility purposes only).
Note: When more than one binary input MinRunPower is activated then MinRunPower with the highest
number is active.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 311

 #RunHrsMaxDiff
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 65000 [h]
Force value
Default value 100 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 9919 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the "deadband" for the running hours equalization function. The priorities are swapped
not until the relative engine hours (RHE) difference is higher than this deadband.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#PwrBandContr 1
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1, 2, 1+2, 3, 1+3, 2+3, 1+2+3 [-]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10594 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to select the gen-sets which will run within the power band #1 if the optimalization
according to Gen-set size is active. Learn more about this topis in the chapter Gen-set size optimalization.
The combinations of Gen-sets must be created so, that the total nominal power of the Power band #1 < #2 <
#3 < #4.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 312

 #PwrBandContr 2
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1, 2, 1+2, 3, 1+3, 2+3, 1+2+3 [-]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10595 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to select the gen-sets which will run within the power band #2 if the optimalization
according to Gen-set size is active. Learn more about this topis in the chapter Gen-set size optimalization.
Note: The combinations of Gen-sets must be created so, that the total nominal power of the Power band
#1 < #2 < #3 < #4.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#PwrBandContr 3
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1, 2, 1+2, 3, 1+3, 2+3, 1+2+3 [-]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10596 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to select the gen-sets which will run within the power band #3 if the optimalization
according to Gen-set size is active. Learn more about this topis in the chapter Gen-set size optimalization.
Note: The combinations of Gen-sets must be created so, that the total nominal power of the Power band
#1 < #2 < #3 < #4.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 313

 #PwrBandContr 4
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1, 2, 1+2, 3, 1+3, 2+3, 1+2+3 [-]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10597 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to select the gen-sets which will run within the power band #4 if the optimalization
according to Gen-set size is active. Learn more about this topis in the chapter Gen-set size optimalization.
Note: The combinations of Gen-sets must be created so, that the total nominal power of the Power band
#1 < #2 < #3 < #4.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#PwrBnChngDlUp
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 3600 [s]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8896 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of changing the power band if the load demand rose above the
upper limit of the current power band. Learn more about this topis in the chapter Gen-set size optimalization.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 314

 #PwrBnChngDlDn
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 3600 [s]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 10795 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of changing the power band if the load demand rose under the
lower limit of the current power band. Learn more about this topis in the chapter Gen-set size optimalization.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

Control group
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] COMMON (=1), 2 .. 32 [-]
Force value
Default value COMMON NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10589 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint selects the logical group to which the particular gen-set belongs. If there are no logical groups
at the site, adjust the setpoint to 1 (COMMON).

6 back to List of setpoints

GroupLinkLeft
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] COMMON (=1), 2 .. 32 [-]
Force value
Default value COMMON NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10590 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Note: In MCB / MGCB application both GroupLinkLeft (page 315) and GroupLinkRight (page 316)
should be set to 1 (=COMMON).

If the input GROUPLINK (PAGE 465) of this particular controller is used to provide the "group link" information
for two logical groups, then this setpoint is used to select which group is located at the left side of the group
link breaker (bus tie breaker). If this particular controller is not used for the group link function adjust this
setpoint to 1 (COMMON).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 315

 GroupLinkRight
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] COMMON (=1), 2 .. 32 [-]
Force value
Default value COMMON NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10591 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Note: In MCB / MGCB application both GroupLinkLeft (page 315) and GroupLinkRight (page 316)
should be set to 1 (=COMMON).

If the input GROUPLINK (PAGE 465) of this particular controller is used to provide the "group link" information
for two logical groups, then this setpoint is used to select which group is located at the right side of the group
link breaker (bus tie breaker). If this particular controller is not used for the group link function adjust this
setpoint to 1 (COMMON).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Synchronisation
Voltage window
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 100.0 [%]
Force value
Default value 10.0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8650 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts maximum difference between bus and mains voltage in respective phases for voltage
matching during synchronizing.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 316

 BtoM AngleReq
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -45 - 45 [°]
Force value Alternative
Default value 0 NO
config
Step 1
Comm object 9578 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Requested phase difference between mains and bus voltage during synchronizing. Use this setpoint for
phase correction of potential transformers connection.
Example: Bellow there is an example of the controller connection to a high voltage system.
T1 shifts phase +30° and no shift is on T2.
BtoM AngleReq = +30° needs to be set for this example.

6 back to List of setpoints

Phase window
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 90 [°]
Force value
Default value 10 YES
Alternative config
Step 1

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 317

 Comm object 8652 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts maximum absolute value of difference between actual phase angle between the bus
and mains voltages for synchronizing.
Note: To disable issuing the breaker close command (i.e. for test purpose) adjust this setpoint to 0.
Synchronizing will continue until timeout occurs or the breaker is closed externally.

Note: The setpoint works as a window surrounding the BtoM AngleReq setpoint. E.g. for BtoM
AngleReq = +30 ° and Phase window = 5 °, the breaker closure is allowed for phases +25 ° to +35 °.
If you want to lock out the breaker closing during synchronizing control loop test, set Phase window = 0.
This allows the control loop setpoints to be tuned while actual breaker closing is blocked.

6 back to List of setpoints

Dwell time
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 25.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 0.3 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8653 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the period of time that the phase angle difference must stay within ± Phase window
(page 317) and voltage difference within Voltage window (page 316) before the respective breaker, which
is actually beeing synchronized, is closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 318

 Freq gain
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 200.0 [%]
Force value
Default value 10.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8715 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the frequency control PI loop. The integration factor (I-
factor) for the frequency loop is adjusted by the setpoint Freq int (page 319).

Application Freq gain and Freq int setpoints are active during:
MCB reverse synchronization of the Gen-set group back to the mains
MGCB forward or reverse synchronization of the Gen-set group to the mains
BTB synchronization between “left” and “right” buses

Note: When this setpoint is set to zero, the corresponding control loop is switched OFF.

6 back to List of setpoints

Freq int
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 50 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8716 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the frequency control PI loop. The gain factor
(P-factor) for the frequency loop is adjusted by the setpoint Freq gain (page 319).

Application Freq gain and Freq int setpoints are active during:
MCB reverse synchronization of the Gen-set group back to the mains
MGCB forward or reverse synchronization of the Gen-set group to the mains
BTB synchronization between “left” and “right” buses

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 319

 Angle Gain
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 - 200.0 [%]
Force value
Default value 10.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8718 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting of the gain factor (P-factor) of the phase angle P-control loop.
The synchronizing process contains two following steps:
The first step is to match the bus frequency to the mains frequency. In this step the frequency
regulation loop is active.
The following step is to match the phase angle difference of the mains and bus voltages to the
setpoint BtoM AngleReq (page 317). The angle regulation loop is active in this step.
As soon as the phase angle difference stays within the window adjusted by Phase window (page 317) and
the voltage difference stays in the Voltage window (page 316), both for period Dwell time (page 318), the
circuit breaker closing command is issued.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 320

 Load Ramp
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 1800 [s]
Force value Alternative
Default value 5 YES
config
Step 1
Comm object 8658 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts loading/unloading rate. After time defined by this setpoint is reached NominMainsImp
(NominBusLImp in BTB application) is reached.
Note: You can achieve more different load ramps using Force Value function. E.g. for soft load in parallel
with mains use longer ramp than for soft load in island parallel (multi-stand-by).

IMPORTANT: Speed of load ramping to the Mains depends on setting of Load ramp in IM-NT
and also in gen-set controllers.
The Mains import increase/decrease behaves according to following images:

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 321

 Load gain
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,0 - 200,0 [%]
Force value
Default value 10,0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,1
Comm object 8659 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the load control PI loop. The integration factor (I-factor) for
the load control loop is adjusted by the setpoint Load int (page 322).

Application Load gain and Load int setpoints are active during:
MCB, parallel to mains operation in any mode where IM-NT load control loop is active (see
MGBC setpoint MLoad ctrl PtM), including load ramps
BusLeft or BusRight BaseLoad control in any mode where IM-NT load control loop is
BTB
active (see setpoint MultiLoad ctrl), including load ramps

When this setpoint is set to zero, the corresponding control loop is switched OFF

6 back to List of setpoints

Load int
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 50 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8713 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the load control PI loop. The gain factor (P-
factor) for the load control loop is adjusted by the setpoint Load gain (page 322).

Application Load gain and Load int setpoints are active during:
MCB, parallel to mains operation in any mode where IM-NT load control loop is active (see
MGCB setpoint MLoad ctrl PtM), including load ramps
BusLeft or BusRight BaseLoad control in any mode where IM-NT load control loop is
BTB
active (see setpoint MultiLoad ctrl), including load ramps

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 322

 RampStartLevel
Setpoint group Synchronization Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0..100[%]
Force valueAlternative
Default value 2 NO
config
Step 1
Comm object 10912 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the load level at which the Load ramp (page 327) starts after the GCB has been
closed. The intention of this setpoint is to give the gen-set certain "loading impulse" right after closing the
GCB to avoid possible oscillations around 0kW or even reverse power if the ramp begun at 0kW.

6 back to List of setpoints

MGCB open lev

Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8547 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the end point of the bus unloading ramp, i.e. power level at which the MGCB is opened.
If this level is not reached within time period adjusted by setpoint MGCB open del the MGCB is then opened
regardless of the bus power. The actual value is calculated as percentage given by this setpoint from
NominMainsImp (page 232).
Note: The speed of the ramp is adjusted by the setpoint Load Ramp (page 321).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 323

 MGCB open del
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Load Ramp (page 321) - 1800 [s]
Force value
Default value 30 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8548 Related applications MGCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximum duration of the bus unloading ramp. If the end point of the ramp MGCB
open lev (page 323)) is not reached within time period adjusted by this setpoint the MGCB is then opened
regardless of the bus power.
Note: The speed of the ramp is adjusted by the setpoint Load Ramp (page 321).

6 back to List of setpoints

Sync timeout
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 1800, NO TIMEOUT [s]
Force value
Default value 30 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8657 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximum duration of forward or reverse synchronization. If the synchronizing is not
successful within this period of time, the Sync Timeout or RevSyncTimeout alarm will be issued.
Note: If the synchronizing is not successful within 1/10 of the Sync timeout or 60 s (if Sync timeout
<600 s) the synchronization process is automatically restarted again, i.e. the speed governor output is
reset to bias value in gen-set controllers and then frequency regulation loop is started again. If NO
TIMEOUT is selected the automatic restart occurs every 180 s. This method helps to synchronize
successfully even in difficult conditions.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 324

 Group: ActPwrRamps
Voltage gain
Setpoint group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 200.0 [%]
Force value
Default value 10.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8501 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the voltage control PI loop. The integration factor (I-factor)
for the voltage control loop is adjusted by the setpoint Voltage int (page 325)
Note: If this setpoint is set to 0 the regulation loop is disabled.

Application Voltage gain and Voltage int setpoints are active during:
MCB reverse synchronization of the Gen-set group back to the mains
MGCB forward or reverse synchronization of the Gen-set group to the mains
BTB synchronization between “left” and “right” buses

Note: When this setpoint is set to zero, the corresponding control loop is switched OFF.

6 back to List of setpoints

Voltage int
Setpoint group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 50 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8720 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the voltage control PI loop. The gain factor (P-
factor) for the voltage control loop is adjusted by the setpoint Voltage gain (page 325).

Application Voltage gain and Voltage int setpoints are active during:
MCB reverse synchronization of the Gen-set group back to the mains
MGCB forward or reverse synchronization of the Gen-set group to the mains
BTB synchronization between “left” and “right” buses

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 325

 PF gain
Setpoint group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,0 - 200,0 [%]
Force value
Default value 10,0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0,1
Comm object 8503 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the cos-phi control PI loop. The integration factor (I-factor)
for the cos-phi control loop is adjusted by the setpoint PF int (page 326).
Note: If this setpoint is set to 0 the regulation loop is disabled.
PF gain and PF int setpoints are active only when gen-sets run in parallel to mains.

6 back to List of setpoints

PF int
Setpoint group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 - 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 50 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8721 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the cos-phi control PI loop. The gain factor (P-
factor) for the cos-phi control loop is adjusted by the setpoint PF gain (page 326).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: ActPwrRamps
Slow Load ramp
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Load ramp (page 327) .. 3600 [s]
Force value
Default value 600
Alternative config
Step
Comm object 13023 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Time for changing the load in case of activation this type of RampEvenType.
Lowest value of setpoint is limited with the setpoint Load ramp (page 327).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 326

 Load ramp
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. MGCB open del (page 324) [s]
Force value
Default value 10 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8658 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
All changes of requested gen-set load are not made as one step, but are ramped - i.e. the requested load
is changing slowly with the rate adjusted by this setpoint.
The rate is adjusted in seconds for 100% load change (from 0 to 100% of nominal power).
The ramp takes place in following situations:
The gen-set has been just synchronized and is ramping up to the target load level (e.g. baseload in
parallel to mains operation or average gen-set load in multiple loadsharing operation). The starting
point of the ramp for this case is adjustable by the setpoint RampStartLevel (page 323).
The gen-set is running parallel to the mains and #systembaseload is changed.
The gen-set is beeing unloaded before opening the MGCB and stop. In this case the end load level is
adjusted by setpoint MGCB open lev (page 323) and the timeout for unloading is adjusted by
setpoint MGCB open del (page 324).
Always, when the RampEventType Load ramp is used

6 back to List of setpoints

Fast load ramp

Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. MGCB open del (page 324) [s]
Force value
Default value 5
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14141 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Time for changing the load in case of activation this type of RampEvenType.
Highest value of setpoint is limited with MGCB open del (page 324).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 327

 MainsFrqRisePr
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [-]
Force value
Default value 4
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14488 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Event is activated in case the mains frequency is increasing in ranges 50,2 → 52,5Hz or from 47,5 →
49,8Hz.
Because more Events can occur at the same time, there is setpoint for definition of the priority.
Higher number means lower priority.
LBO EVENT - MAINSFRQRISE (PAGE 503) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsFrqFallPr
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [-]
Force value
Default value 5
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14489 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Event is activated in case the mains frequency has falling tendency in ranges 52,5Hz → 50,2Hz or from
49,8 → 47,5Hz.
Because more Events can occur at the same time, there is setpoint for definition of the priority.
Higher number means lower priority.
LBO EVENT - MAINSFRQFALL (PAGE 503) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 328

 LoadReductPr
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [-]
Force value
Default value 3
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14490 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Event3 means situation when the load is reduced due to activation of LBI Load Reduct 1-4 or LAI Load
reduction.
Because more Events can occur at the same time, there is setpoint for definition of the priority.
Higher number means lower priority.
LBO EVENT - LOADREDUCT (PAGE 501) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsTripPerPr
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [-]
Force value
Default value 7
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14491 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Event4 means situation within period of time MainsTripPerT (page 350) when the mains returns after
Mains Trip due Mains Protection
Because more Events can occur at the same time, there is setpoint for definition of the priority.
Higher number means lower priority.
LBO EVENT - MAINSTRIPPER (PAGE 503) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 329

 PforQPr
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [-]
Force value
Default value 6
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14492 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Event is activated in case the active power P has to be reduced to reach required Q.
Because more Events can occur at the same time, there is setpoint for definition of the priority.
Higher number means lower priority.
LBO EVENT - PFORQ (PAGE 512) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

SoftUnloadPr
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [-]
Force value
Default value 1
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14493 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event is activated in standard soft unload.
Because more Events can occur at the same time, there is setpoint for definition of the priority.
Higher number means lower priority.
LBOEVENT - SOFT UNLOAD (PAGE 521) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 330

 PostVRTPr
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [-]
Force value
Default value 2
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 15656 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event is activated after VRT situation, when the voltage is still not in the range +-10% around nominal. In
this case could be increased the current over the nominal value and it can lead to opening the breaker. To
prevent this, the active power has to be reduced according to nominal current.
Because more Events can occur at the same time, there is setpoint for definition of the priority.
Higher number means lower priority.
LBOEVENT - POST VRT (PAGE 512) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

RetOvUnFreqPr
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 255 [-]
Force value
Default value 2
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16187 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event is activated when there was a situation of over or under frequency and now is the mains frequency
back in the safety range 49,8-50,2Hz. In this situation is counted internal timer for 600s. Any power
change is possible with ramp given by this event.
Because more Events can occur at the same time, there is setpoint for definition of the priority.
Higher number means lower priority.
LBOEVENT - RET OVUNFREQ (PAGE 516) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 331

 MainsFrqRise
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] SLOW LOAD RAMP/LOAD RAMP/FAST LOAD RAMP[-]
Force value
Default value LOAD RAMP
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14494 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event is activated in case the mains frequency is increasing in ranges 50,2 → 52,5Hz or from 47,5 →
49,8Hz.
With this setpoint you can change which ramp will be activated in above mentioned situation.
LBOEVENT - MAINSFRQRISE (PAGE 503) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsFrqFall
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] SLOW LOAD RAMP/LOAD RAMP/FAST LOAD RAMP[-]
Force value
Default value SLOW LOAD RAMP
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14495 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event is activated in case the mains frequency has falling tendency in ranges 52,5Hz → 50,2Hz or from
49,8 → 47,5Hz.
With this setpoint you can change the which ramp will be activated in above mentioned situation.
LBOEVENT - MAINSFRQFALL (PAGE 503) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 332

 LoadReduct
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] SLOW LOAD RAMP/LOAD RAMP/FAST LOAD RAMP[-]
Force value
Default value FAST LOAD RAMP
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14496 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event3 means situation when the load is reduced due to activation of LBI Load Reduct 1-4 or LAI Load
reduction.
With this setpoint you can change the which ramp will be activated in above mentioned situation.
LBOEVENT - LOADREDUCT (PAGE 501) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsTripPer
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] SLOW LOAD RAMP/LOAD RAMP/FAST LOAD RAMP[-]
Force value
Default value SLOW LOAD RAMP
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14497 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Event4 means situation within period of timeMainsTripPerT (page 350) when the mains returns after
Mains Trip due Mains Protection
With this setpoint you can change the which ramp will be activated in above mentioned situation.
LBOEVENT - MAINSTRIPPER (PAGE 503) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 333

 PforQ
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] SLOW LOAD RAMP/LOAD RAMP/FAST LOAD RAMP[-]
Force value
Default value LOAD RAMP
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14498 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event is activated in case the active power P has to be reduced to reach required Q.
With this setpoint you can change the which ramp will be activated in above mentioned situation.
LBOEVENT - PFORQ (PAGE 512) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

SoftUnload
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] SLOW LOAD RAMP/LOAD RAMP/FAST LOAD RAMP[-]
Force value
Default value LOAD RAMP
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14499 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event is activated in standard soft unload.
With this setpoint you can change the which ramp will be activated in above mentioned situation.
LBOEVENT - SOFT UNLOAD (PAGE 521) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 334

 PostVRT
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] SLOW LOAD RAMP/LOAD RAMP/FAST LOAD RAMP[-]
Force value
Default value LOAD RAMP
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 15657 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event is activated after VRT situation, when the voltage is still not in the range +-10% around nominal. In
this case could be increased the current over the nominal value and it can lead to opening the breaker. To
prevent this, the active power has to be reduced according to nominal current.
With this setpoint you can change the which ramp will be activated in above mentioned situation.
LBOEVENT - POST VRT (PAGE 512) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

RetOvUnFreq
Setpoint group ActPwrRamps Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] SLOW LOAD RAMP/LOAD RAMP/FAST LOAD RAMP[-]
Force value
Default value LOAD RAMP
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16188 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event is activated when there was a situation of over or under frequency and now is the mains frequency
back in the safety range 49,8-50,2Hz. In this situation is counted internal timer for 600s. Any power
change is possible with ramp given by this event.
With this setpoint you can change the which ramp will be activated in above mentioned situation.
LBOEVENT - RET OVUNFREQ (PAGE 516) is active.
If now described event occurs, than is always active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 335

 Group: Grid Codes
GridCodesTest
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] NOTEST, TEST [-]
Force value
Default value NOTEST NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 14129 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint activates simulation mode for following functions: PWROVRF, PforQ
Function can be activated only in OFF mode and when the engine is stopped.
Alarm message Wrn TestPQF is initialized.
When you start (in MAN or AUT mode), can you provide the simulation. After stopping the engine the
simulation mode is automatically deactivated (Setpoint is switched to NOTEST, alarm message
deactivated)
If you want to simulate mains frequency for function PWROVRF, there is LAI: TestF. This LAI can be
configured to PLC output or to analog input.
If you want to simulate PforQ function, there are two LAI: TestP and TestQ. These LAI can be configured
to PLC output or to analog input.

6 back to List of setpoints

LoadReduct1
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MinPwr PtM (page 225) .. 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 100 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16132 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Setpoint defines the value of power reduction in case the LBI: LoadReduct1 is activated. In case more
LBI's is active at once, the lowest value (biggest reduction) will win.
The LBI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476) must be activated to generally enable the load reduction.
Note: Load reduction is calculated from value TotRunPnomAll.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 336

 LoadReduct2
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MinPwr PtM (page 225) .. 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 60 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16133 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Setpoint defines the value of power reduction in case the LBI: LoadReduct2 is activated. In case more
LBI's is active at once, the lowest value (biggest reduction) will win.
The LBI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476) must be activated to generally enable the load reduction.
Note: Load reduction is calculated from value TotRunPnomAll.

6 back to List of setpoints

LoadReduct3
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MinPwr PtM (page 225) .. 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 30
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16134 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Setpoint defines the value of power reduction in case the LBI: LoadReduct3 is activated. In case more
LBI's is active at once, the lowest value (biggest reduction) will win.
The LBI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476) must be activated to generally enable the load reduction.
Note: Load reduction is calculated from value TotRunPnomAll.

6 back to List of setpoints

LoadReduct4
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MinPwr PtM (page 225) .. 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 5 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16135 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Setpoint defines the value of power reduction in case the LBI: LoadReduct4 is activated. In case more
LBI's is active at once, the lowest value (biggest reduction) will win.
The LBI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476) must be activated to generally enable the load reduction.
Note: Load reduction is calculated from value TotRunPnomAll.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 337

 PwrFreqDel
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] OFF;0,1 .. 2.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 0.2 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 9661 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the delay of PWROVRF or PWRUNDRF function.

6 back to List of setpoints

Q&U Protection
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14519 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint activates or deactivates Q for U protection.
See also setpoints Q&U < Q (page 339), Q&U < V (page 338)

6 back to List of setpoints

Q&U < V
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 100.0 [%]
Force value
Default value 75.0 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 14137 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
If the Mains Voltage in all phases is under value written in this setpoint and at the same time is Q on
mains site lower than value in setpoint Q&U < Q (page 339), than is activated Q&U mains protection
Note: The asociated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens either MCB or MGCB.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 338

 Q&U < Q
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. 32000 [kVAr]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14139 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
If the Mains Voltage in all phases is under value in setpoint Q&U < V (page 338) and at the same time is
Q on mains site lower than value in this setpoint, than is mains protection Q&U activated
Note: The associated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens either MCB or MGCB.

6 back to List of setpoints

Q&U Prot Del

Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600.00 [s]
Force value
Default value 0.40 NO
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16078 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
In case the conditions Q&U < V and Q&U < Q are fulfiled timer adjusted by this timer is activated.
Note: The asociated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens either MCB or MGCB.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 339

 Q&U Prot CBsel
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MCB, MGCB [-]
Force value
Default value MCB NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16079 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
In MGCB application is possible to chose type of breaker which should be open in case the Q&U
protection is active. For other applications is automaticaly opened MCB breaker.
Note: The asociated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens either MCB or MGCB.

6 back to List of setpoints

DynamicSupport
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14136 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint activates or deactivates the mains protection defined via user curve LVRT or OVRT in
GenConfig.
Note: The asociated protection to this setpoint is Mains protect type. This type of protection is recorded
into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list. When a protection of Mains protect type
occurs the controller opens the MCB.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 340

 PostVRTonIM
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16408 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Post VRT situation means the state, when the mains voltage is 5s out of the limits ±10% from nominal
voltage. In that case is the activated LBO: PostVRT.
If this setpoint is switched to ENABLED, InteliMains watches the actual current over the MCB. If the
actual current is higher than nominal current, InteliMains starts to reduce the power request until the
current is equal or lower than nominal or the voltage is back in limits but for a fixed time 60s.
If the setpoint is switched to DISABLED, there InteliMains does nothing and there is expected, that the
over current is watched on gen-sets by using the LBO: PostVRT.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 341

 Q Ramp
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 60 [s]
Force value Alternative
Default value 10 YES
config
Step 1
Comm object 16151 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Setpoint defines the length of the ramp from actual value to 95% of the new request value. The ramp is
active in case the Q DeadBand limit is crossed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Q DeadBand
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 5.0 [%]
Force value
Default value 2,0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 16150 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
In case the request value of Q cross the limit defined by this setpoint the Q ramp is activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 342

 Q0(Um)ref
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 75 .. 125 [%]
Force value Alternative
Default value 100 YES
config
Step 1
Comm object 16125 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Offset for reference point of mains voltage when Q=0. This parameter moves the adjusted curve. The
gradient of the curve remains.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 343

 Q(Um)DeadBand
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 5,0 [%]
Force value
Default value 0,0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 14127 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
In case the voltage cross the limit of this dead band parameter than is calculated the new value of
requested Q according to adjusted curve.
Note: this is dead band only in case the voltage moves, in case the Q0UmRef value changes this dead
band is not evaluated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Q(P)DeadBand
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 5,0[%]
Force value
Default value 0,0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 16126 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
In case the power change cross the limit of this dead band parameter than is calculated the new value of
requested Q according to adjusted curve.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 344

 Qref/PnomShift
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -33 .. 33 [%]
Force value Alternative
Default value 0 YES
config
Step 1
Comm object 16128 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Offset for the curve Qref/Ulim. This offset moves on the Y axe the part of the curve between points 3-4. If
there is any non zero value is calculated related X coordinate according to given formula with known Y
points and known gradient.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 345

 QrefUlimDdBand
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 5,0 [%]
Force value
Default value 0,0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 16129 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
In case the voltage cross the limit of this dead band parameter than is calculated the new value of
requested Q according to adjusted curve.
Note: this is dead band only in case the voltage moves, in case the QrefPnom value changes this dead
band is not evaluated.

6 back to List of setpoints

PforQlimit
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 14481 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
When is setpoint ENABLED, than you can use PforQ functions in all modes which are possible to chose
in PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205)
PforQ function is used in case you need to reach required Q and from this reason you have to derate the
actual power of gen-set. This dependence is also called as working area of the generator and generator
manufacturer has to be able define it.
Adjusting of working area (PforQ) curve is possible via user sensor curve in GenConfig. There are to
different curves:
CapabilityQL is part for overexcited mode
CapabilityQC is part for underexcited mode
Create every possible user curve is possible.
Note: For PforQ setting see PforQDeadBand (page 347)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 346

 PforQDeadBand
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Force value
Default value 1 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14486 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Dead band preventing oscilation of actual power P.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsSyncVMax
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MainsSyncVMin (page 347) .. 130 [%]
Force value
Default value 110 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 13012 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Overvoltage value which disables synchronization to mains. In case this value is crossed, the
synchronization is disabled, active synchronization is interrupted.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsSyncVMin
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 10 .. MainsSyncVMax (page 347) [%]
Force value
Default value 90 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 13013 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Undervoltage value which disables synchronization to mains. In case this value is crossed, the
synchronization is disabled, active synchronization is interrupted.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 347

 MainsSyncFMax
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 2.00 [Hz]
Force value
Default value 0,20 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 13014 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Overfrequency value which disables synchronization to mains. In case this value is crossed, the
synchronization is disabled, active synchronization is interrupted.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsSyncFMin
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -2,50 .. 0,00 [Hz]
Force value
Default value -2,50 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 14586 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Underfrequency value which disables synchronization to mains. In case this value is crossed, the
synchronization is disabled, active synchronization is interrupted.

6 back to List of setpoints

MP SyncVMax
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MP SyncVMin (page 349) .. 130 [%]
Force value
Default value
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16393 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
When the mains voltage is recovered after mains failure the timer MP SyncTLong (page 350) is counted
down and alarm message "SyncNotAllowed" is present in alarm list. Voltage must be during this time in limit
adjusted by this setpoint. In case the value cross this limit, the counting is interrupted until the value is back
in limit. Once the value is in limit the timer MP SyncTLong (page 350) counts again from beginning.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 348

 MP SyncVMin
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 10 .. MP SyncVMax (page 348)[%]
Force value
Default value 95 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16394 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
When the mains voltage is recovered after mains failure the timer MP SyncTLong (page 350) is counted
down and alarm message "SyncNotAllowed" is present in alarm list. Voltage must be during this time in limit
adjusted by this setpoint. In case the value cross this limit, the counting is interrupted until the value is back
in limit. Once the value is in limit the timer MP SyncTLong (page 350) counts again from beginning.

6 back to List of setpoints

MP SyncFMax
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.00 .. 2.00 [Hz]
Force value
Default value 0.01 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16395 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
When the mains voltage is recovered after mains failure the timer MP SyncTLong (page 350) is counted
down and alarm message "SyncNotAllowed" is present in alarm list. Frequency must be during this time in
limit adjusted by this setpoint. In case the value cross this limit, the counting is interrupted until the value is
back in limit. Once the value is in limit the timer MP SyncTLong (page 350) counts again from beginning.

6 back to List of setpoints

MP SyncFMin
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -2.50.. 0.00 [Hz]
Force value
Default value -0.10 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.01
Comm object 16396 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
When the mains voltage is recovered after mains failure the timer MP SyncTLong (page 350) is counted
down and alarm message "SyncNotAllowed" is present in alarm list. Frequency must be during this time in
limit adjusted by this setpoint. In case the value cross this limit, the counting is interrupted until the value is
back in limit. Once the value is in limit the timer MP SyncTLong (page 350) counts again from beginning.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 349

 MP SyncTLong
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 1800 [s]
Force value
Default value 600 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 16397 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
When the mains voltage is recovered after mains failure the timer MP SyncTLong is counted down and
alarm message "SyncNotAllowed" is present in alarm list. Voltage and frequency must be during this
time in limit adjusted by this setpoint. In case the value cross this limit, the counting is interrupted until
the value is back in limit. Once the value is in limit the timer MP SyncTLong counts again from beginning.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsTripPerT
Setpoint group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0..1800[s]
Force
Default value 1200 valueAlternative YES
config
Step 1
Comm object 14601 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
There is used time period after trip due mains protection. This period means, that for this time after the
mains return is loading and unloading ramp according to event in Bus Settings MainsTripPer (page
333).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 350

 Group: Force value
Force value 1
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10667 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

Force value 2
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10668 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 351

 Force value 3
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10669 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

Force value 4
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10670 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 352

 Force value 5
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10671 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

Force value 6
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10672 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 353

 Force value 7
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10673 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

Force value 8
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10674 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to use also
any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.
There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated binary
inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default name Force
value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 354

 Force value 9
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10675 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

Force value 10
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10676 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to use also
any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.
There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated binary
inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default name Force
value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 355

 Force value 11
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10677 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

Force value 12
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10678 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 356

 Force value 13
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10679 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

Force value 14
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10680 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 357

 Force value 15
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10681 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

Force value 16
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10682 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is one of the 16 setpoints reserved for using as alternative setpoints for the force value functions. The
alternative setpoint is to be assigned to a particular force value function and renamed in GenConfig.
See also the input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).
Note: It is not obligatory to use one of these reserved setpoints for a force value function. It is possible to
use also any other setpoint or value with matching dimension and decimal resolution.

Note: There isn't any relation between the default names of the force value function blocks, associated
binary inputs and the default names of the reserved setpoints. In other words, the setpoint with default
name Force value 3 is not related to the Force value 3 function block.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 358

 ExtValue1LoLim
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. ExtValue1HiLim (page 361) [X]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11012 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the low limit of the value of ExtValue 1 if the value is lowered / raised by the binary
inputs EXT VALUE1 UP (PAGE 454) and EXT VALUE1 DOWN (PAGE 454). The ExtValue 1 is never lowered
below this limit.
Note: This limit is not taken into account if the value ExtValue 1 is written remotely from a terminal using
the appropriate command ExtValue #n.

6 back to List of setpoints

ExtValue2LoLim
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. ExtValue2HiLim (page 361)[X]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11013 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the low limit of the value of ExtValue 2 if the value is lowered / raised by the binary
inputs EXT VALUE2 DOWN (PAGE 455). The ExtValue 2 is never lowered below this limit.
Note: This limit is not taken into account if the value ExtValue 2 is written remotely from a terminal using
the appropriate command ExtValue #n.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 359

 ExtValue3LoLim
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. ExtValue3HiLim (page 362) [X]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11014 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the low limit of the value of ExtValue 3 if the value is lowered / raised by the binary
inputs EXT VALUE3 UP (PAGE 456) and EXT VALUE3 DOWN (PAGE 455). The ExtValue 3 is never lowered
below this limit.
Note: This limit is not taken into account if the value ExtValue 3 is written remotely from a terminal using
the appropriate command ExtValue #n.

6 back to List of setpoints

ExtValue4LoLim
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. ExtValue4HiLim (page 362) [X]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11015 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the low limit of the value of ExtValue 4 if the value is lowered / raised by the binary
inputs EXT VALUE4 UP (PAGE 457) and EXT VALUE4 DOWN (PAGE 456). The ExtValue 4 is never lowered
below this limit.
Note: This limit is not taken into account if the value ExtValue 4 is written remotely from a terminal using
the appropriate command ExtValue #n.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 360

 ExtValue1HiLim
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] ExtValue1LoLim (page 359) .. 32000 [X]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11016 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the high limit of the value of ExtValue 1 if the value is lowered / raised by the binary
inputs EXT VALUE1 UP (PAGE 454) and EXT VALUE1 DOWN (PAGE 454). The ExtValue 1 is never raised over
this limit.
Note: This limit is not taken into account if the value ExtValue 1 is written remotely from a terminal using
the appropriate command ExtValue #n.

6 back to List of setpoints

ExtValue2HiLim
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] ExtValue2LoLim (page 359) .. 32000 [X]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11017 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the high limit of the value of ExtValue 2 if the value is lowered / raised by the binary
inputs EXT VALUE2 DOWN (PAGE 455). The ExtValue 2 is never raised over this limit.
Note: This limit is not taken into account if the value ExtValue 2 is written remotely from a terminal using
the appropriate command ExtValue #n.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 361

 ExtValue3HiLim
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] ExtValue3LoLim (page 360) .. 32000 [X]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11018 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the high limit of the value of ExtValue 3 if the value is lowered / raised by the binary
inputs EXT VALUE3 UP (PAGE 456) and EXT VALUE3 DOWN (PAGE 455). The ExtValue 3 is never raised over
this limit.
Note: This limit is not taken into account if the value ExtValue 3 is written remotely from a terminal using
the appropriate command ExtValue #n.

6 back to List of setpoints

ExtValue4HiLim
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] ExtValue4LoLim (page 360) .. 32000 [X]
Force value
Default value 0 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11019 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the high limit of the value of ExtValue 4 if the value is lowered / raised by the binary
inputs EXT VALUE4 UP (PAGE 457) and ExtValue4 down (page 456). The ExtValue 4 is never raised over
this limit.
Note: This limit is not taken into account if the value ExtValue 4 is written remotely from a terminal using
the appropriate command ExtValue #n.

6 back to List of setpoints

ExtValue1 rate
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [X/s]
Force value
Default value 1 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11020 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate pre second at which the ExtValue 1 is beeing changed while the input
EXT VALUE1 UP (PAGE 454) or EXT VALUE1 DOWN (PAGE 454) down is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 362

 ExtValue2 rate
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [X/s]
Force value
Default value 1 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11021 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate pre second at which the ExtValue 2 is beeing changed while the input
EXT VALUE2 DOWN (PAGE 455) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

ExtValue3 rate
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [X/s]
Force value
Default value 1 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11022 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate pre second at which the ExtValue 3 is beeing changed while the input
EXT VALUE3 UP (PAGE 456) or EXT VALUE3 DOWN (PAGE 455) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

ExtValue4 rate
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [X/s]
Force value
Default value 1 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11023 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate pre second at which the ExtValue 4 is beeing changed while the input
EXT VALUE4 UP (PAGE 457) or EXT VALUE4 DOWN (PAGE 456) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 363

 ExtValue1deflt
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. 32000 [x]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11008 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the reset (initial) value of the ExtValue 1. This initial value is applied either when the
controller is powered-on or when the ExtValue 1 is reset by the binary input EXT VALUE1RESET (PAGE 454).

6 back to List of setpoints

ExtValue2deflt
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. 32000 [x]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11009 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the reset (initial) value of the ExtValue 2. This initial value is applied either when the
controller is powered-on or when the ExtValue 2 is reset by the binary input EXT VALUE2RESET (PAGE 455).

6 back to List of setpoints

ExtValue3deflt
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. 32000 [X]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11010 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the reset (initial) value of the ExtValue 3. This initial value is applied either when the
controller is powered-on or when the ExtValue 3 is reset by the binary input EXT VALUE3RESET (PAGE 456).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 364

 ExtValue4deflt
Setpoint group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] -32000 .. 32000 [X]
Force value
Default value 0 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11011 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the reset (initial) value of the ExtValue 4. This initial value is applied either when the
controller is powered-on or when the ExtValue 4 is reset by the binary input ExtValue4reset (page 457).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Load Shedding

Ld shed active
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLE, ISLAND ONLY, ISL+TRIP PARAL, ALL THE TIME [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLE YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 11001 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The setpoint is used for adjustment when the load shedding function will be active.

Disabled The Load shedding function is disabled. All the outputs are open.
In Island operation (i.e. MCB is open and MGCB is closed) Load shedding outputs
Island only
(e.g. Ld shed mode (page 366)) are controlled by load shedding function.
This setting adjusts the same behavior as ISLAND ONLY but in addition to it all load
Isl+Trip paral
shedding outputs are closed when gen-set group goes to island operation.
All the time Outputs are controlled by the load shedding function regardless of breaker positions.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 365

 LdShedBased on
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] MAINS IMPORT, GENSETS [-]
Force value
Default value MAINS IMPORT YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9905 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This setpoint is used to select the control quantity for the load shedding function.

The control quantity is active power imported from the mains taken relative to the
Mains import nominal mains import: 100 * MainsImport (page 391)/NominMainsImp (page
232).
The control quantity is sum of the actual power of all running gen-sets taken relative
Gensets to he sum of their nominal power: 100 * TotRunPact (page 417)/TotRunPnomAll
(page 417).

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld shed mode
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] PWR ONLY, FRQ ONLY [-]
Force value
Default value PWR ONLY YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 14036 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts which type of load shedding is active. When PWR ONLY is selected the load shedding
is based on active power. If FRQ ONLY is selected the load shedding is based on frequency.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld shedStages
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 3 [-]
Force value
Default value 3 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14029 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the number of load shedding stages that are used in load shedding.
Example: If 1 load shedding stage is selected the controller will perform one load shedding stage and
rest of the load shedding stages will be omitted.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 366

 Ld shedLevel1
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Ld shedLevel1 (page 367) .. 200 [%]
Force value
Default value 80 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8884 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative load level for load shedding stage 1 (in % of sum of nominal power
of running gen-sets or NominMainsImp (page 232), depending on which control quantity is selected) for
load shedding. When the control quantity exceeds this level for more than Ld shedDelay1 (page 369) time
the next load shedding output is closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld shedLevel2
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Ld reconLevel2 (page 370) .. 20 [%]
Force value
Default value 80 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8885 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative load level for load shedding stage 2 (in % of sum of nominal power
of running gen-sets or NominMainsImp (page 232), depending on which control quantity is selected) for
load shedding. When the control quantity exceeds this level for more than Ld shedDelay2 (page 369) time
the next load shedding output is closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld shedLevel3
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Ld shedDelay3 (page 369) .. 200 [%]
Force value
Default value 80 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8886 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative load level for load shedding stage 3 (in % of sum of nominal power
of running gen-sets or NominMainsImp (page 232), depending on which control quantity is selected) for
load shedding. When the control quantity exceeds this level for more than Ld shedDelay3 (page 369) time
the next load shedding output is closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 367

 Ld shed f lvl1
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 50 .. Ld shed f lvl1 (page 368) [%]
Force value
Default value 50 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14030 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative frequency level for load shedding stage 1 (in % of nominal system
frequency given by setpoints Nominal Freq (page 234) and Nom frq offset). When the frequency goes
below this level for more than Ld shedDelay1 (page 369) time the next load shedding output is closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld shed f lvl2
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 50 .. Ld shed f lvl2 (page 368) [%]
Force value
Default value 50 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14031 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative frequency level for load shedding stage 2 (in % of nominal system
frequency given by setpoints Nominal Freq (page 234) and Nom frq offset). When the frequency goes
below this level for more than Ld shedDelay2 (page 369) time the next load shedding output is closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld shed f lvl3
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 50 .. Ld shed f lvl3 (page 368) [%]
Force value
Default value 50 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14032 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative frequency level for load shedding stage 3 (in % of nominal system
frequency given by setpoints Nominal Freq (page 234) and Nom frq offset). When the frequency goes
below this level for more than Ld shedDelay3 (page 369) time the next load shedding output is closed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 368

 Ld shedDelay1
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 10.0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8887 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust time period for load shedding stage 1, that the control quantity must be above
the Ld reconLevel1 (page 370) limit to close the next load shedding output.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld shedDelay2
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 10.0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8888 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust time period for the load shedding stage 2, that the control quantity must be
above the Ld reconLevel2 (page 370) limit to close the next load shedding output.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld shedDelay3
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 10.0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8889 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust time period for the load shedding stage 3, that the control quantity must be
above the Ld reconLevel3 (page 371) limit to close the next load shedding output.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 369

 Ld reconLevel1
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. Ld shedLevel1 (page 367) [%]
Force value
Default value 20 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8890 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative load level for load shedding stage 1 (in % of sum of nominal power
of running gen-sets or NominMainsImp (page 232), depending on which control quantity is selected) for
load reconnection. When the control quantity drops below this level for more than Ld reconDelay1 (page
372) time the next load can be reconnected back.
The appropriate load shedding output is either opened automatically when the condition above is fulfilled
(AutoLd recon (page 373) = ENABLED) or manually by activation of the input ManualLdRecon.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld reconLevel2
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. Ld shedLevel2 (page 367) [%]
Force value
Default value 20 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8891 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative load level for load shedding stage 2 (in % of sum of nominal power
of running gen-sets or NominMainsImp (page 232), depending on which control quantity is selected) for
load reconnection. When the control quantity drops below this level for more than Ld reconDelay2 (page
372) time the next load can be reconnected back.
The appropriate load shedding output is either opened automatically when the condition above is fulfilled
(AutoLd recon (page 373) = ENABLED) or manually by activation of the input ManualLdRecon.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 370

 Ld reconLevel3
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. Ld reconLevel3 (page 371) [%]
Force value
Default value 20 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8892 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative load level for load shedding stage 3 (in % of sum of nominal power
of running gen-sets or NominMainsImp (page 232), depending on which control quantity is selected) for
load reconnection. When the control quantity drops below this level for more than Ld reconDelay3 (page
373) time the next load can be reconnected back.
The appropriate load shedding output is either opened automatically when the condition above is fulfilled
(AutoLd recon (page 373) = ENABLED) or manually by activation of the input ManualLdRecon.

6 back to List of setpoints

LdRecon f lvl1
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Ld shed f lvl1 (page 368) .. 200 [%]
Force value
Default value 80 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14033 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative frequency level for load shedding stage 1 (in % of nominal system
frequency given by setpoints Nominal Freq and Nom frq offset). When the frequency exceeds this level for
more than Ld reconDelay1 (page 372) time the next load shedding output is opened.

6 back to List of setpoints

LdRecon f lvl2
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Ld shed f lvl2 (page 368) .. 200 [%]
Force value
Default value 80 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14034 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative frequency level for load shedding stage 2 (in % of nominal system
frequency given by setpoints Nominal Freq and Nom frq offset). When the frequency exceeds this level for
more than Ld reconDelay2 (page 372) time the next load shedding output is opened.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 371

 LdRecon f lvl3
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] Ld shed f lvl3 (page 368) .. 200 [%]
Force value
Default value 80 YES
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 14035 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the relative frequency level for load shedding stage 3 (in % of nominal system
frequency given by setpoints Nominal Freq and Nom frq offset). When the frequency exceeds this level for
more than Ld reconDelay3 (page 373) time the next load shedding output is opened.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld reconDelay1
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 10.0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8893 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust time period for load shedding stage1, that the control quantity must be below
theLd reconDelay1 (page 372) limit to allow reconnection of next load group.

6 back to List of setpoints

Ld reconDelay2
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 10.0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8894 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust time period for the load shedding stage 2, that the control quantity must be
below the Ld reconDelay2 (page 372) limit to allow reconnection of next load group.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 372

 Ld reconDelay3
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 0 .. 600.0 [s]
Force value
Default value 10.0 YES
Alternative config
Step 0.1
Comm object 8895 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust time period for the load shedding stage 3, that the control quantity must be
below the Ld reconDelay3 (page 373) limit to allow reconnection of next load group.

6 back to List of setpoints

AutoLd recon
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value ENABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9649 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint selects whether the reconnection of the load occurs automatically when the control quantity
stays below the reconnection limit for a period of the reconnection delay or the reconnection must be initiated
manually by the input MANUAL LDRECON (PAGE 476).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Timer settings

TimerChannel 1
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10969 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #1. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 1-4 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 373

 TimerChannel 2
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10970 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #2. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 1-4 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 3
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10971 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #3. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 1-4 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 4
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10973 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #4. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 1-4 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 374

 TimerChannel 5
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10974 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #6. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 5-8 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 6
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10975 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #6. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 5-8 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 7
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10976 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #7. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 5-8 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 375

 TimerChannel 8
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10977 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #8. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 5-8 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 9
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10978 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #9. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 9-12 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 10
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10979 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #10. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 9-12 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 376

 TimerChannel 11
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10980 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #11. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 9-12 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 12
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10981 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #12. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 9-12 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 13
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10982 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #13. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 13-16 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 377

 TimerChannel 14
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10983 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #14. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 13-16 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 15
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10984 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #15. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 13-16 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

TimerChannel 16
Setpoint group Timer settings Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value OFF NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10985 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint adjusts the mode of the Timer channel #16. Output from this channel is available in the
combined output TIMERACT 13-16 (PAGE 521).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 378

 Group: Act. Calls/SMS
History record
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10568 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to enable sending SMS and/or e-mail alerts when a "protection" configured as History
record occurs.
Note: As the History record protection does not appear in the alarmlist, the SMS or e-mail may contain
empty alarmlist.

6 back to List of setpoints

Alarm only
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10567 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to enable sending SMS and/or e-mail alerts when a "protection" configured as Alarm
only occurs.

6 back to List of setpoints

Warning
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 8482 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to enable sending SMS and/or e-mail alerts when a warning-type protection occurs.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 379

 Mains protect
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10117 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to enable sending SMS and/or e-mail alerts when a "protection" configured as Mains
protect occurs.
Note: As the Mains protect protection does not appear in the alarmlist, the SMS or e-mail may contain
empty alarmlist.

6 back to List of setpoints

MainsP w/Reset
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, ENABLED [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 8484 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to enable sending SMS and/or e-mail alerts when a MainsP w/Reset-type alarm
occurs.

6 back to List of setpoints

AcallCH1-Type
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9594 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the alert type of the active calls - channel 1.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 380

 AcallCH1-Addr
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9597 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the recipient address for the active calls - channel 1. The content of the
address must correspond to the selected alert type (e.g. it must contain e-mail address if the alert type is e-
mail).

6 back to List of setpoints

AcallCH2-Type
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9595 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the alert type of the active calls - channel 2.

6 back to List of setpoints

AcallCH2-Addr
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9598 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the recipient address for the active calls - channel 2. The content of the
address must correspond to the selected alert type (e.g. it must contain e-mail address if the alert type is e-
mail).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 381

 AcallCH3-Type
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9596 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the alert type of the active calls - channel 3.

6 back to List of setpoints

AcallCH3-Addr
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 9599 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the recipient address for the active calls - channel 2. The content of the
address must correspond to the selected alert type (e.g. it must contain e-mail address if the alert type is e-
mail).

6 back to List of setpoints

AcallCH4-Type
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 13274 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the alert type of the active calls - channel 4.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 382

 AcallCH4-Addr
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 13276 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the recipient address for the active calls - channel 4. The content of the
address must correspond to the selected alert type (e.g. it must contain e-mail address if the alert type is e-
mail).

6 back to List of setpoints

AcallCH5-Type
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED YES
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 13275 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the alert type of the active calls - channel 5.

6 back to List of setpoints

AcallCH5-Addr
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [-]
Force value
Default value - NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 13277 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to specify the recipient address for the active calls - channel 5. The content of the
address must correspond to the selected alert type (e.g. it must contain e-mail address if the alert type is e-
mail).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 383

 NumberRings AA
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 30 [-]
Force value
Default value 3 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 24512 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the number of rings after which the modem, which is attached to he controller,
answers the incoming call.
Number of rings prior to answering the modem connection from PC to controller.
Note: Any change of this setpoint is applied first after next switching the controller or modem off and on
or after disconnecting the modem from the controller and connecting it back.

6 back to List of setpoints

ActCallAttempt
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 250 [-]
Force value
Default value 5 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 24505 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the maximum number of consequent attempts to perform an active data call.
The next attempt is performed 120s after the previous unsuccessful attempt.

6 back to List of setpoints

Acall+SMS lang
Setpoint group Act. Calls/SMS Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 7 [-]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 11394 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint specifies in which language the active SMS and e-mail messages are issued. Adjust the
setpoint to the index of the required language. The index can be obtained from the tab Languages in
GenConfig . Index 1 is always English.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 384

 Group: Date/Time
Time stamp act
Setpoint group Date/Time Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, CONDITION, ALWAYS [-]
Force value
Default value CONDITION NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 10532 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint selects the Time stamp function mode.

Disabled The function is disabled.

While the binary input TIME STAMP ACT (PAGE 486) is active the Time stamps records
Condition are recorded into the history log with period adjusted by setpoint Time Stamp Per
(page 385).
The Time stamps records are recorded into the history log with period adjusted by
Always
setpoint Time Stamp Per all the time while the controler is switched on.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Stamp Per

Setpoint group Date/Time Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] 1 .. 240 [min]
Force value
Default value 1 NO
Alternative config
Step 1
Comm object 8979 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint adjusts the time interval for Time stamp records. See also the setpoint Time stamp act (page
385).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 385

 #SummerTimeMod
Setpoint group Date/Time Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] DISABLED, WINTER, SUMMER, WINTER-S, SUMMER-S [-]
Force value
Default value DISABLED NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 8727 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint is used to select the mode of automatic daylight saving time change.

Disabled The automatic change to daylight saving time and back is disabled.
The automatic change is enabled, the current season is winter and the controller is
Winter
located in the northern hemisphere.
The automatic change is enabled, the current season is summer and the controller
Summer
is located in the northern hemisphere.
The automatic change is enabled, the current season is winter and the controller is
Winter-S
located in the southern hemisphere.
The automatic change is enabled, the current season is summer and the controller
Summer-S
is located in the southern hemisphere.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

#Time
Setpoint group Date/Time Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [HH:MM:SS]
Force value
Default value 00:00:00 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24554 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint shows the current time from the internal RTC clock of the controller and can be also used to
readjust it.
If the controller is connected to other controllers via the CAN2 bus, the setpoints #Time and #Date are
automatically synchronized each hour with the controller that has lowest address. If date/time is changed at
one controller it is automatically updated also in all other controllers in the group.
Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 386

 #Date
Setpoint group Date/Time Related FW 3.8.0
Range [units] [dd.mm.yyyy]
Force value
Default value 1.1.2006 NO
Alternative config
Step -
Comm object 24553 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The setpoint shows the date from the internal RTC clock of the controller and can be also used to readjust it.
Note: If the controller is connected to other controllers via the CAN2 bus, the setpoints #Time and #Date
are automatically synchronized each hour with the controller that has lowest address. If date/time is
changed at one controller it is automatically updated also in all other controllers in the group.

Note:
# sign in the name of this setpoint marks that this setpoint is shared among all controllers connected by
CAN2 bus.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 387

5.1.2 Values
List of value groups
Group: Mains 391
Group: Bus 402
Group: Object 405
Group: Gen-sets 406
Group: Control loops 416
Group: Power Management 417
Group: Sync/Load ctrl 420
Group: Voltage/PF Control 421
Group: Grid Codes 422
Group: Force value 431
Group: Load 433
Group: Analog CU 433
Group: Log Bout 434
Group: Info 437
Group: Statistics 444

For full list of values go to the chapter List of values (page 389).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 388

 List of values Mains I unbal 398 AppPwr10minAvg 408
Mains V [kV] 398 Gen-set1 pwr 408
Group of values: MainsV10L1-L2 399 Gen-set2 pwr 409
Mains MainsV10L2-L3 399 Gen-set3 pwr 409
MainsImport 391 MainsV10L3-L1 400 Gen-set4 pwr 409
MP L1 391 MainsV1L1-L2 400 Gen-set5 pwr 409
MP L2 391 MainsV1L2-L3 401 Gen-set6 pwr 410
MP L3 391 MainsV1L3-L1 401 Gen-set7 pwr 410
Mains Q 391 Mains Mid V 401 Gen-set8 pwr 410
MQ L1 392 Gen-set9 pwr 410
MQ L2 392 Group of values: Bus Gen-set10 pwr 411
MQ L3 392 Bus freq 402 Gen-set11 pwr 411
Mains A 392 Bus V L1-N 403 Gen-set12 pwr 411
MA L1 392 Bus V L2-N 403 Gen-set13 pwr 411
MA L2 393 Bus V L3-N 403 Gen-set14 pwr 412
MA L3 393 Bus V 403 Gen-set15 pwr 412
Mains PF 393 Bus V L1-L2 404 Gen-set16 pwr 412
Mains Ld char 393 Bus V L2-L3 404 Gen-set17 pwr 412
MPf L1 394 Bus V L3-L1 404 Gen-set18 pwr 413
M Ld char L1 394 Bus V unbal 404 Gen-set19 pwr 413
MPf L2 394 I Aux 404 Gen-set20 pwr 413
M Ld char L2 394 Slip freq 405 Gen-set21 pwr 413
MPf L3 394 Angle 405 Gen-set22 pwr 414
M Ld char L3 395 Bus V [kV] 405 Gen-set23 pwr 414
Mains freq 395 Gen-set24 pwr 414
MainsFreq2Dec/BusFreq2De Group of values: Basic Gen-set25 pwr 414
c 395 settings Gen-set26 pwr 415
MainsFreq3Dec 395 Object P 405 Gen-set27 pwr 415
Mains V L1-N 395 Object Q 406 Gen-set28 pwr 415
Mains V L2-N 396 Object PF 406 Gen-set29 pwr 415
Mains V L3-N 396 Obj Load char 406 Gen-set30 pwr 416
Mains V 396
Gen-set31 pwr 416
Mains V L1-L2 396 Group of values:
Gen-set32 pwr 416
Mains V L2-L3 397 Generator
Mains V L3-L1 397 TotRun Q 406 Group of values:
Mains curr L1 397 TotRun S 407 Analog CU
Mains curr L2 397 TotRun PF 407 LSO 416
Mains curr L3 398 TotRun Ld char 407 VSO 417
Mains V unbal 398 ActPwr10minAvg 407
RctPwr10minAvg 408

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 389

 Group of values: CPU Temp 433 NextDate9-12 442

Power Management AIN CU-1 433 NextTime13-16 442

TotRunPact 417 AIN CU-2 434 NextDate13-16 443

TotRunPnomAll 417 AIN CU-3 434 AirGate ID 443

TotAvlbPnom 417 AIN CU-4 434 AirGate status 443

TotRunPnom 418 Latitude 444

Group of values: Log Longitude 444
Act Reserve 418
Bout
LoadRes Start 418
LogBout 1 434 Group of values:
Reserve Stp 418
LogBout 2 435 Statistics
ActRes rel 419
LogBout 3 435 Sum MWh 444
ResStart rel 419
LogBout 4 435 Sum MVAhr 445
ResStp rel 419
LogBout 5 436 M kWh I 445

Group of values: LogBout 6 436 M kVAhr I 445

Binary CU LogBout 7 436 M kVAh 445

ActPwrReq 420 RemoteControls 437 M kWh E 446

SystLoadCtrl 420 ModbusSw1 437 M kVAhr E 446

SyncAllowTim 420 ModbusSw2 437 PulseCounter 1 446

SysNominFreq 420 PulseCounter 2 446

Group of values: Load PulseCounter 3 446
Group of values: Control PulseCounter 4 447
Voltage/PF Control Controller mode 437
6 back to Controller
SystPfCtrl 421 SW Version 438
objects
Required Q 421 Application 438

Required Qrel 421 SW Branch 438

Required PF3dc 421 PasswordDecode 438

CAN16 439
Group of values: Info CAN32 439

ExtValue1 431 Reg16 439

ExtValue2 432 Reg32 439

ExtValue3 432 GL16 440

ExtValue4 432 GL32 440

Breaker state 440
Group of values: Load Timer text 440
StatLdShed 433 Timer val 441
NextTime1-4 441
Group of values: NextDate1-4 441
Aftertreatment NextTime5-8 441
UBat 433 NextDate5-8 442
NextTime9-12 442

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 390

 Group: Mains
MainsImport
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 8202 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows actual power imported from mains. This value is used for various purposes (e.g. peak
shaving detremination etc.).

6 back to List of values

MP L1
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 8524 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains active power in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

MP L2
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 8525 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains active power in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

MP L3
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [kW]
Comm object 8526 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains active power in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

Mains Q
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVar]
Comm object 8203 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains total reactive power.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 391

 MQ L1
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVAr]
Comm object 8527 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains reactive power in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

MQ L2
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVAr]
Comm object 8528 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains reactive power in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

MQ L3
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVAr]
Comm object 8529 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains reactive power in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

Mains A
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVA]
Comm object 8565 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains total apparent power.

6 back to List of values

MA L1
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVA]
Comm object 8530 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains apparent power in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 392

 MA L2
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVA]
Comm object 8531 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains apparent power in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

MA L3
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVA]
Comm object 8532 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains apparent power in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

Mains PF
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [-]
Comm object 16156 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains cos-phi factor.
Note: The "cos-phi" factor is widely used instead of power factor for pure harmonic waveforms, because
a simplified method can be used for calculation of it's value. However, if this simplified method is used
for significantly distorted waveforms, it may provide inaccurate results. This fact causes the controller
"power factor" value may be different from a value measured by another truerms measurement device if
the waveform contains significant portion of higher harmonic frequencies.

6 back to List of values

Mains Ld char
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 8395 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Character of the Mains load. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load (power
factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 393

 MPf L1
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [-]
Comm object 8533 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains power factor in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

M Ld char L1
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 8626 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Character of the Mains load in the L1 phase. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive
load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

MPf L2
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 8534 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains power factor in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

M Ld char L2
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 8627 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Character of the Mains load in the L2 phase. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive
load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

MPf L3
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 8535 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains power factor in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 394

 M Ld char L3
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 8628 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Character of the Mains load in the L3 phase. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive
load (power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Mains freq
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 1 [Hz]
Comm object 8210 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains frequency. The frequency is measured in the phase L3.

6 back to List of values

MainsFreq2Dec/BusFreq2Dec
Value group Mains values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] Hz
Comm object 9851 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value is used for fixed frequency protections

6 back to List of values

MainsFreq3Dec
Value group Mains values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] Hz
Comm object 16398 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value is used for fixed frequency protections

6 back to List of values

Mains V L1-N
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 8192 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains voltage in phase L1.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Vm VT ratio (page 225).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 395

 Mains V L2-N
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 8193 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains voltage in phase L2.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Vm VT ratio (page 225).

6 back to List of values

Mains V L3-N
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 8194 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains voltage in phase L3.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Vm VT ratio (page 225).

6 back to List of values

Mains V
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 10645 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains voltage. Average from all three phases.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Vm VT ratio (page 225).

6 back to List of values

Mains V L1-L2
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 9628 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains voltage between phase L1 and phase L2.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Vm VT ratio (page 225).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 396

 Mains V L2-L3
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 9629 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains voltage between phase L2 and phase L3.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Vm VT ratio (page 225).

6 back to List of values

Mains V L3-L1
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 9630 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains voltage between phase L3 and phase L1.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Vm VT ratio (page 225).

6 back to List of values

Mains curr L1
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [A]
Comm object 8198 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains current in phase L1.
Note: The ratio between the current measured at the input terminals and the displayed current is
adjusted by the setpoints MainsCTprim (page 232) and MainsCTsec (page 232).

6 back to List of values

Mains curr L2
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [A]
Comm object 8199 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains current in phase L2.
Note: The ratio between the current measured at the input terminals and the displayed current is
adjusted by the setpoints MainsCTprim (page 232) and MainsCTsec (page 232).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 397

 Mains curr L3
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [A]
Comm object 8200 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains current in phase L3.
Note: The ratio between the current measured at the input terminals and the displayed current is
adjusted by the setpoints MainsCTprim (page 232) and MainsCTsec (page 232).

6 back to List of values

Mains V unbal
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [%]
Comm object 9268 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains voltage unbalance. The value is calculated as maximal difference of two phase voltages at one
moment and expressed in % of the nominal voltage.
Note: This value can be used for creating the Mains voltage unbalance protection using the "universal
analog protections".

6 back to List of values

Mains I unbal
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 10550 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Mains current unbalance. The value is calculated as maximal difference of two phase currents at one
moment and expressed in % of the nominal current.
Note: This value can be used for creating the Mains current unbalance protection using the "universal
analog protections".

6 back to List of values

Mains V [kV]
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [kV]
Comm object 12270 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows measured mains voltage in kV.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 398

 MainsV10L1-L2
Value group Mains values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 16082 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value shows average Mains Ph-Ph voltage in phase L1-L2.

Bus Avg V1
Value group Bus values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 12792 Related applications MINT, COX
Description
This value shows average Bus voltage in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

MainsV10L2-L3
Value group Mains values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 16083 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value shows average Mains Ph-Ph voltage in phase L2-L3.

Bus Avg V2
Value group Bus values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 12793 Related applications MINT, COX
Description
This value shows average Bus voltage in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 399

 MainsV10L3-L1
Value group Mains values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 16084 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value shows average Mains Ph-Ph voltage in phase L3-L1.

Bus Avg V3
Value group Bus values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 12794 Related applications MINT, COX
Description
This value shows average Bus voltage in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

MainsV1L1-L2
Value group Mains values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 16085 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value shows 1min average Mains Ph-Ph voltage in phase L1-L2.

Bus Avg V1
Value group Bus values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 12792 Related applications MINT, COX
Description
This value shows average Bus voltage in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 400

 MainsV1L2-L3
Value group Mains values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 16086 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value shows 1min average Mains Ph-Ph voltage in phase L2-L3.

Bus Avg V2
Value group Bus values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 12793 Related applications MINT, COX
Description
This value shows average Bus voltage in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

MainsV1L3-L1
Value group Mains values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 16087 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value shows 1min average Mains Ph-Ph voltage in phase L3-L1.

Bus Avg V3
Value group Bus values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 12794 Related applications MINT, COX
Description
This value shows average Bus voltage in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

Mains Mid V
Value group Mains values Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] V
Comm object 13137 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value is connected with LAI:MAINSMIDVOLT (PAGE 537) multiplied by value given in to setpoint

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 401

 ROCOF
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [Hz/s]
Comm object 9848 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This is actual measured ROCOF.

6 back to List of values

Max ROCOF
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [Hz/s]
Comm object 10049 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This is maximal measured value of ROCOF of the mains voltage. The value is reset to 0 automatically at the
moment of closing the MGCB.

6 back to List of values

MaxVectorS
Value group Mains Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 1 [°]
Comm object 9847 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This is maximal measured value of vector shift of the mains voltage. The value is reset to 0 automatically at
the moment of closing the MGCB.

6 back to List of values

Group: Bus
Bus freq
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 1 [Hz]
Comm object 8211 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Bus frequency. The frequency is measured in the phase L3.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 402

 Bus V L1-N
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 8195 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Bus voltage in phase L1.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Bus VT ratio (page 226).

6 back to List of values

Bus V L2-N
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 8196 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Bus voltage in phase L2.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Bus VT ratio (page 226).

6 back to List of values

Bus V L3-N
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 8197 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Bus voltage in phase L3.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Bus VT ratio (page 226).

6 back to List of values

Bus V
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [V]
Comm object 12271 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Bus voltage. Average from all three phases.
Note: The ratio between the voltage measured at the input terminals and the displayed voltage is
adjusted by the setpoint Bus VT ratio (page 226).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 403

 Bus V L1-L2
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 9631 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Bus voltage phase L1 to L2.

6 back to List of values

Bus V L2-L3
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 9632 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Bus voltage phase L2 to L3.

6 back to List of values

Bus V L3-L1
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 9633 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Bus voltage phase L3 to L1.

6 back to List of values

Bus V unbal
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 9274 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Bus voltage unbalance. The value is calculated as maximal difference of two phase voltages at one moment
and expressed in % of the bus nominal voltage.

6 back to List of values

I Aux
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [A]
Comm object 8208 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows actual current measured at auxiliar terminals.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 404

 Slip freq
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [Hz]
Comm object 8224 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Differential frequency between the bus and the mains.

6 back to List of values

Angle
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 1 [°]
Comm object 8225 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The angle between the phasors of the bus and mains voltage.

6 back to List of values

Bus V [kV]
Value group Bus Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [kV]
Comm object 12271 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows measured bus voltage in kV.

6 back to List of values

Group: Object
Object P
Value group Object Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10601 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This is actual active power consumption of the load. This value together with value Object Q (page 406) is
used for calculation of Object PF (page 406).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 405

 Object Q
Value group Object Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVAr]
Comm object 10644 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This is actual reactive power consumption of the load. This value together with value Object P (page 405) is
used for calculation of Object PF (page 406).

6 back to List of values

Object PF
Value group Object Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [-]
Comm object 16158 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Cos-phi factor at the load. This value is computed indirectly from the values Object P (page 405) and
Object Q (page 406).

6 back to List of values

Obj Load char

Value group Object Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9026 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the characteristic of the load. The displayed value is R, L or C.

6 back to List of values

Group: Gen-sets
TotRun Q
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVAr]
Comm object 10656 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows total sum of reactive power of all gensets controlled by corresponding IM-NT (e.g. in one
logical group or in two logical groups linked by Group link).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 406

 TotRun S
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVAr]
Comm object 16424 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows total sum of actual apparent power of all gensets controlled by corresponding IM-NT (e.g.
in one logical group or in two logical groups linked by Group link).

6 back to List of values

TotRun PF
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0,001 [-]
Comm object 16482 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows average of power factor of all gensets controlled by corresponding IM-NT (e.g. in one
logical group or in two logical groups linked by Group link).

6 back to List of values

TotRun Ld char
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9028 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows total load character of all running gensets in group controlled by IM-NT (e.g. in one logical
group or in two logical groups linked by Group link).

6 back to List of values

ActPwr10minAvg
Value group Generator Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] kW
Comm object 16073 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
10-minutes average from gen P
Mains controller will calculate this average value from values which sends connected gen-sets via CAN
bus communication.
Average value is calculated from gen-sets connected via CAN bus to power management and which are
in the one logic group (if more groups are available they have to be linked with Group link function).
Value starts to be counted while the first gen-set is on the bus and the counting stops when the last gen-
set leaves the bus.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 407

 RctPwr10minAvg
Value group Generator Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] kVAr
Comm object 16080 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
10-minutes average from gen
Mains controller will calculate this average value from values which sends connected gen-sets via CAN
bus communication.
Average value is calculated from gen-sets connected via CAN bus to power management and which are
in the one logic group (if more groups are available they have to be linked with Group link function).
Value starts to be counted while the first gen-set is on the bus and the counting stops when the last gen-
set leaves the bus.

6 back to List of values

AppPwr10minAvg
Value group Generator Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] kVA
Comm object 16081 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
10-minutes average from gen S
Mains controller will calculate this average value from values which sends connected gen-sets via CAN
bus communication.
Average value is calculated from gen-sets connected via CAN bus to power management and which are
in the one logic group (if more groups are available they have to be linked with Group link function).
Value starts to be counted while the first gen-set is on the bus and the counting stops when the last gen-
set leaves the bus.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set1 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10935 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 408

 Gen-set2 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10936 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set3 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10937 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set4 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [V]
Comm object 10938 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set5 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10939 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 409

 Gen-set6 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10940 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set7 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10941 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set8 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10942 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set9 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10943 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 410

 Gen-set10 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10944 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If genset with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set11 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10945 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set12 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10946 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set13 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10947 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 411

 Gen-set14 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10948 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set15 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10949 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set16 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10950 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If genset with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set17 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10951 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 412

 Gen-set18 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10952 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set19 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10953 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set20 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10954 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set21 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10955 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 413

 Gen-set22 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10956 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set23 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10957 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set24 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10958 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set25 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10959 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 414

 Gen-set26 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10960 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set27 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10961 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set28 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10962 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set29 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10963 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 415

 Gen-set30 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10964 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set31 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10965 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Gen-set32 pwr
Value group Gen-sets Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10966 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the actual power of corresponding Gen-set (i.e. power of Gen-set with CAN address 1 is
shown in Gen-set1 pwr). If Gen-set with corresponding address is not available (does not exist of function on
the CAN bus) value "#####" is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Group: Control loops
LSO
Value group Control loops Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [%]
Comm object 10924 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Control loop for active power in percentage.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 416

 VSO
Value group Control loops Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 2 [%]
Comm object 10925 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Control loop for reactive power in percentage.

6 back to List of values

Group: Power Management
TotRunPact
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10657 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Sum of active power of all loaded gen-sets within the group that are connected to the bus.

6 back to List of values

TotRunPnomAll
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10658 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Sum of nominal power of all loaded gensets within the group that are connected to the bus (in MAN or AUT
mode) (e.g. all gensets in logical group controlled by IM-NT or in two logical groups linked by Group link). See
also values TotAvlbPnom (page 417) and TotRunPnom (page 418).

6 back to List of values

TotAvlbPnom
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10998 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the sum of nominal powers of all Gen-sets that are available for power management (in
any state – stopped, running etc.). See also values TotRunPnomAll (page 417) and TotRunPnom (page
418).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 417

 TotRunPnom
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 10999 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the sum of nominal powers of all running Gen-sets that are participating in power
management. See also values TotRunPnomAll (page 417) and TotAvlbPnom (page 417).

6 back to List of values

Act Reserve
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kX]
Comm object 8625 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Actual absolute reserve.

6 back to List of values

LoadRes Start
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kX]
Comm object 8622 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
If the actual absolute reserve is lower than this value, the next gen-set, which is about to be started by power
management, is started.

6 back to List of values

Reserve Stp
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [kX]
Comm object - Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Actual absolute reserve - when the reserve is higher than this value the last started gen-set (the gen-set with
the highest priority) is stopped. This value contains the following: #LoadResStop plus Nominal power of the
Gen-set which is first to stop. #LoadResStop is used from the currently selected reserve set.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 418

 ActRes rel
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [%]
Comm object 10788 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Actual relative reserve. This value is active only when BTB is closed.

6 back to List of values

ResStart rel
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [%]
Comm object 10786 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
If the actual relative reserve is lower than this value the next gen-set which is about to be started in power
management is started.

6 back to List of values

ResStp rel
Value group Power Management Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [%]
Comm object 10787 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Actual relative reserve - when the relative reserve is higher than this value the last started Gen-set (the Gen-
set with the highest priority) is stopped. This value contains the following:

Pn is the nominal power of the Gen-set which is next to be stopped, the upper sum is the sum of the rest of
the Gen-sets running in power management. The lower sum is the sum of all the Gen-sets currently running
in power management.
LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473) is used from the currently selected reserve set.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 419

 Group: Sync/Load ctrl
ActPwrReq
Value group Sync/Load ctrl Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kW]
Comm object 8663 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value contains actual required load level, which is used as the input into the load regulation loop in the
parallel to mains operation.

6 back to List of values

SystLoadCtrl
Value group Sync/Load ctrl Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10792 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Code of the current load control mode. The text representation of each code can be obtained by the
procedure described at the value Timer text (page 440).

6 back to List of values

SyncAllowTim
Value group Sync/Load ctrl Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] s
Comm object 13018 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Time to start synchronizing after mains fail trip.

6 back to List of values

SysNominFreq
Value group Sync/Load ctrl Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] Hz
Comm object 15536 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This value shows sume of Nominal Freq (page 234) and Nom frq offset (page 235).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 420

 Group: Voltage/PF Control
SystPfCtrl
Value group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10793 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Code of the current power factor control mode. The text representation of each code can be obtained by the
procedure described at the value Timer text (page 440).

6 back to List of values

Required Q
Value group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] kVAr
Comm object 16152 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value shows required reactive power from generator calculated after the Q ramp.
In case the Q regulation is not active, value is not visible.

6 back to List of values

Required Qrel
Value group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] %
Comm object 13169 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value shows required relative reactive power from generator calculated after the Q ramp.
In case the Q regulation is not active, value is not visible.

6 back to List of values

Required PF3dc
Value group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] -
Comm object 16159 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Value shows required power factor from generator in 0,001 resolution.
In case the PF regulation is not active, value is not visible.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 421

 Group: Grid Codes
Pm
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [kW]
Comm object 13019 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value saves a value of actual active power when the mains frequency goes above or under the limit
of initialization Power over frequency and Power under frequency function adjusted by user curve in
GenConfig: PWROVRFREQ and PWRUNDRFREQ.

6 back to List of values

Q(Um) Curve
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [kVAr]
Comm object 13168 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
If there is used Q(Um) type of regulation chosen by setpoint:PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) value is active
and shows calculated actual value of Q(Um) curve adjusted in GenConfig.

6 back to List of values

Q(P) Curve
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [kVAr]
Comm object 16127 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
If there is used Q(P) type of regulation chosen by setpoint:PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) value is active and
shows calculated actual value of Q(P) curve adjusted in GenConfig.

6 back to List of values

QrefUlim Curve
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [kVAr]
Comm object 16149 Related applications MGCB, MCB,
Description
If there is used Qref/Ulim type of regulation chosen by setpoint:PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) value is active
and shows calculated actual value of Qref/Ulim curve adjusted in GenConfig.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 422

 PF(P) Curve
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 13636 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
If there is used PF(Pm) type of regulation chosen by setpoint:PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) value is active
and shows calculated actual value of PF(Pm) curve adjusted in GenConfig.

6 back to List of values

TestF
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [Hz]
Comm object 14128 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value is connected with LAI: TestF and shows the actual simulated mains frequency.

6 back to List of values

PoF Curve
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [%]
Comm object 16185 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value show actual ΔP calculated from curve PWROVERFREQ.
The actual power will be reduced of this value and will be limited with Min Power PTM.

6 back to List of values

PuF Curve
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [%]
Comm object 16184 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value show actual ΔP calculated from curve PWRUNDRFREQ.
The actual power will be increased of this value and will be limited by value of setpoint Instal power.

6 back to List of values

TotRunSamax
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [kVA]
Comm object 16425 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value shows the sume of Samax of running engines in the same group.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 423

 #PowerReduct1
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 16089 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Number of request on LBI: LoadReduct1.
Value is adjustable via Set Statistic menu.

6 back to List of values

#PowerReduct2
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 16090 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Number of request on LBI: LoadReduct2.
Value is adjustable via Set Statistic menu.

6 back to List of values

#PowerReduct3
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 16091 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Number of request on LBI: LoadReduct3.
Value is adjustable via Set Statistic menu.

6 back to List of values

#PowerReduct4
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 16092 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Number of request on LBI: LoadReduct4.
Value is adjustable via Set Statistic menu.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 424

 PwrRed1HrsActM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16103 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed1HrsActM is accumulated in to this statistic value for a one calendar month.
Value is automatically reseted every 1.day of new month at 0:00 and value is moved in to the value
PwrRed1HrsLstM.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed1MinActM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16107 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed1MinActM is accumulated in to this statistic value for a one calendar month.
Value is automatically reseted every 1.day of new month at 0:00 and value is moved in to the value
PwrRed1MinLstM.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed1HrsLstM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16111 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed1HrsLstM shows statistic value from last month accumulated in to the value
PwrRed1HrsActM.
Every 1.day of new month is value from PwrRed1HrsActM copied in to this value.
The previous value is replaced with the new one.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 425

 PwrRed1MinLstM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16115 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed1MinLstM shows statistic value from last month accumulated in to the value
PwrRed1MinActM.
Every 1.day of new month is value from PwrRed1MinActM copied in to this value.
The previous value is replaced with the new one.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed1HrsAcc
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16093 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value shows accumulated hours in power reduction 1.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed1MinAcc
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16094 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value shows accumulated minutes in power reduction 1.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed2HrsActM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16104 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed2HrsActM is accumulated in to this statistic value for a one calendar month.
Value is automatically reseted every 1.day of new month at 0:00 and value is moved in to the value
PwrRed2HrsLstM.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 426

 PwrRed2MinActM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16108 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed2MinActM is accumulated in to this statistic value for a one calendar month.
Value is automatically reseted every 1.day of new month at 0:00 and value is moved in to the value
PwrRed2MinLstM.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed2HrsLstM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16112 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed2HrsLstM shows statistic value from last month accumulated in to the value
PwrRed2HrsActM.
Every 1.day of new month is value from PwrRed2HrsActM copied in to this value.
The previous value is replaced with the new one.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed2MinLstM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16116 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed2MinLstM shows statistic value from last month accumulated in to the value
PwrRed2MinActM.
Every 1.day of new month is value from PwrRed2MinActM copied in to this value.
The previous value is replaced with the new one.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed2HrsAcc
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16095 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value shows accumulated hours in power reduction 2.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 427

 PwrRed2MinAcc
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16096 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value shows accumulated minutes in power reduction 2.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed3HrsActM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16105 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed3HrsActM is accumulated in to this statistic value for a one calendar month.
Value is automatically reseted every 1.day of new month at 0:00 and value is moved in to the value
PwrRed3HrsLstM.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed3MinActM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16109 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed3MinActM is accumulated in to this statistic value for a one calendar month.
Value is automatically reseted every 1.day of new month at 0:00 and value is moved in to the value
PwrRed3MinLstM.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed3HrsLstM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16113 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed3HrsLstM shows statistic value from last month accumulated in to the value
PwrRed3HrsActM.
Every 1.day of new month is value from PwrRed3HrsActM copied in to this value.
The previous value is replaced with the new one.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 428

 PwrRed3MinLstM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16117 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed3MinLstM shows statistic value from last month accumulated in to the value
PwrRed3MinActM.
Every 1.day of new month is value from PwrRed3MinActM copied in to this value.
The previous value is replaced with the new one.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed3HrsAcc
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16097 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value shows accumulated hours in power reduction 3.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed3MinAcc
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16098 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value shows accumulated minutes in power reduction 3.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed4HrsActM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16106 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed4HrsActM is accumulated in to this statistic value for a one calendar month.
Value is automatically reseted every 1.day of new month at 0:00 and value is moved in to the value
PwrRed4HrsLstM.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 429

 PwrRed4MinActM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16110 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed4MinActM is accumulated in to this statistic value for a one calendar month.
Value is automatically reseted every 1.day of new month at 0:00 and value is moved in to the value
PwrRed4MinLstM.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed4HrsLstM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16114 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed4HrsLstM shows statistic value from last month accumulated in to the value
PwrRed4HrsActM.
Every 1.day of new month is value from PwrRed4HrsActM copied in to this value.
The previous value is replaced with the new one.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed4MinLstM
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16118 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value PwrRed4MinLstM shows statistic value from last month accumulated in to the value
PwrRed4MinActM.
Every 1.day of new month is value from PwrRed4MinActM copied in to this value.
The previous value is replaced with the new one.

6 back to List of values

PwrRed4HrsAcc
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [h]
Comm object 16099 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value shows accumulated hours in power reduction 4.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 430

 PwrRed4MinAcc
Value group Grid Codes Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [min]
Comm object 16100 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
Value shows accumulated minutes in power reduction 4.
There is possibility to reset this value with dedicated command.

6 back to List of values

Group: Force value
ExtValue1
Value group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 11004 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This data object is intended for remote control of the gen-set via the communication if some kind of data is to
be passed into the controller.
This object can be written via the communication (e.g. Modbus) without any limitation. Use GenConfig
function Generate Cfg Image to get the communication object number or register number of this particular
value object. Below is a typical example of using this object.
Example: The gen-set group is required to be running in parallel-to-mains mode at constant load level
(baseload), however the system baseload level is adjusted from a supervisory PLC system via
Modbus.

IMPORTANT: It is not allowed to solve this task by cyclic writing of the baseload setpoint
from the supervisory device. The EEPROM memory may become damaged when any
setpoint is written repeatedly with a short period.

The proper solution is following:

Go to GenConfig, download the configuration from the controller, select the LAI tab and configure the
logical analog input MLC:ANEXSYSBLD (PAGE 538) onto the ExtValue1 (page 431), which is located
in the Info group. If you do not see the LAI tab you have to switch the GenConfig to "advanced" mode.
Then upload the configuration into the controller.
Go to InteliMonitor and change the setpoint MLoad ctrl PtM (page 201) to ANEXSYSBLD->LS.
Now you have to program your PLC to write requested gen-set baseload into the Modbus register
ExtValue1 (register number 40392 for IG/IS-NT-2.4).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 431

 ExtValue2
Value group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 11005 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This data object is intended for remote control of the InteliMains via the communication if some kind of data
is to be passed into the controller.
This object can be written via the communication (e.g. Modbus ) without any limitation. Use GenConfig
function Generate Cfg Image to get the communication object number or register number of this particular
value object. See an example at the object ExtValue1 (page 431).

6 back to List of values

ExtValue3
Value group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 11006 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This data object is intended for remote control of the InteliMains via the communication if some kind of data
is to be passed into the controller.
This object can be written via the communication (e.g. Modbus ) without any limitation. Use GenConfig
function Generate Cfg Image to get the communication object number or register number of this particular
value object. See an example at the object ExtValue1 (page 431).

6 back to List of values

ExtValue4
Value group Force value Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 11007 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This data object is intended for remote control of the InteliMains via the communication if some kind of data
is to be passed into the controller.
This object can be written via the communication (e.g. Modbus ) without any limitation. Use GenConfig
function Generate Cfg Image to get the communication object number or register number of this particular
value object. See an example at the object ExtValue1 (page 431).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 432

 Group: Load
StatLdShed
Value group Load Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9591 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
The value indicates the current load shedding stage. 0 indicates that the load shedding is not active.

6 back to List of values

Group: Analog CU
UBat
Value group Analog CU Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 1 [V]
Comm object 8213 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Voltage at the controller power supply terminals.

6 back to List of values

CPU Temp
Value group Analog CU Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 1 [°C]
Comm object 10124 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Temperature inside the controller (on the CPU).

6 back to List of values

AIN CU-1
Value group Analog CU Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] configurable []
Comm object 9155 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is the value of the analog input 1 of the controller. Analog inputs are fully configurable so the name and
units depend on configuration. In the default configuration the input is used for oil pressure measurement.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 433

 AIN CU-2
Value group Analog CU Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] configurable []
Comm object 9156 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is the value of the analog input 2 of the controller. Analog inputs are fully configurable so the name and
units depend on configuration. In the default configuration the input is used for water temperature
measurement.

6 back to List of values

AIN CU-3
Value group Analog CU Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] configurable []
Comm object 9157 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is the value of the analog input 3 of the controller. Analog inputs are fully configurable so the name and
units depend on configuration. In the default configuration the input is used for fuel level measurement.

6 back to List of values

AIN CU-4
Value group Analog CU Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] configurable []
Comm object 9158 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is the value of the analog input 4 of the controller. Analog inputs are fully configurable so the name and
units depend on configuration. In the default configuration the input is used for fuel level measurement.

6 back to List of values

Group: Log Bout
LogBout 1
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9143 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is a bit array containing status of logical binary outputs 1-16 of the controller. Bit0 represents LBO1, bit1
represents LBO2 etc..
Note: All terminals display binary values in "human-readable" form - from left to right. That means the bit
0 is displayed in the most left position. This is different from common use in computer science, where
binary values are displayed from right to left.

Note: Click on button with "..." to get a clear list of BI names with their corresponding values.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 434

 LogBout 2
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9144 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is a bit array containing status of logical binary outputs 17-32 of the controller. Bit0 represents LBO17,
bit1 represents LBO18 etc..
Note: All terminals display binary values in "human-readable" form - from left to right. That means the bit
0 is displayed in the most left position. This is different from common use in computer science, where
binary values are displayed from right to left.

Note: Click on button with "..." to get a clear list of BI names with their corresponding values.

6 back to List of values

LogBout 3
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9145 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is a bit array containing status of logical binary outputs 33-48 of the controller. Bit0 represents LBO33,
bit1 represents LBO34 etc..
Note: All terminals display binary values in "human-readable" form - from left to right. That means the bit
0 is displayed in the most left position. This is different from common use in computer science, where
binary values are displayed from right to left.

Note: Click on button with "..." to get a clear list of BI names with their corresponding values.

6 back to List of values

LogBout 4
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9146 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is a bit array containing status of logical binary outputs 49-64 of the controller. Bit0 represents LBO49,
bit1 represents LBO50 etc..
Note: All terminals display binary values in "human-readable" form - from left to right. That means the bit
0 is displayed in the most left position. This is different from common use in computer science, where
binary values are displayed from right to left.

Note: Click on button with "..." to get a clear list of BI names with their corresponding values.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 435

 LogBout 5
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9147 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is a bit array containing status of logical binary outputs 65-80 of the controller. Bit0 represents LBO65,
bit1 represents LBO66 etc..
Note: All terminals display binary values in "human-readable" form - from left to right. That means the bit
0 is displayed in the most left position. This is different from common use in computer science, where
binary values are displayed from right to left.

Note: Click on button with "..." to get a clear list of BI names with their corresponding values.

6 back to List of values

LogBout 6
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9148 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is a bit array containing status of logical binary outputs 81-96 of the controller. Bit0 represents LBO81,
bit1 represents LBO82 etc..
Note: All terminals display binary values in "human-readable" form - from left to right. That means the bit
0 is displayed in the most left position. This is different from common use in computer science, where
binary values are displayed from right to left.

Note: Click on button with "..." to get a clear list of BI names with their corresponding values.

6 back to List of values

LogBout 7
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9149 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is a bit array containing status of logical binary outputs 97-113 of the controller. Bit0 represents LBO97,
bit1 represents LBO98 etc..
Note: All terminals display binary values in "human-readable" form - from left to right. That means the bit
0 is displayed in the most left position. This is different from common use in computer science, where
binary values are displayed from right to left.

Note: Click on button with "..." to get a clear list of BI names with their corresponding values.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 436

 RemoteControls
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10627 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is a bit array containing status of the binary outputs REMOTECONTROL 1 (PAGE 514) -
REMOTECONTROL 8 (PAGE 516).
Note: Click on button with "..." to get a clear list of BI names with their corresponding values.

6 back to List of values

ModbusSw1
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 13267 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value mirrors the content of what has been written in Modbus register 46337.

6 back to List of values

ModbusSw2
Value group Log Bout Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 13268 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value mirrors the content of what has been written in Modbus register 46338.

6 back to List of values

Group: Info
Controller mode
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9574 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains actual controller mode. The controller mode is selected by the setpoint Controller mode
but the setpoint position can be overriden by binary inputs REMOTE: REMOTE OFF (PAGE 483), REMOTE:
REMOTE MAN (PAGE 483), REMOTE: REMOTE AUT (PAGE 482) or REMOTE: REMOTE TEST (PAGE 483).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 437

 SW Version
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 1 [-]
Comm object 8393 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Major and minor firmware version number. E.g. value "2,4" means version 2.4. Release version number is
not included.

6 back to List of values

Application
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 8480 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Code of the application type. E.g. 1 for SPtM, 2 for SPI, 3 for MINT etc. The value is intended for diagnostic
purposes.

6 back to List of values

SW Branch
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 8707 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Firmware branch code. Contains 1 in case of standard branches.

6 back to List of values

PasswordDecode
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 9090 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains encrypted serial number of the controller and administrator password and is intended for
retrieving of the lost password. Send this number together with controller serial number to your distributor if
you need to retrieve your password.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 438

 CAN16
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 8546 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller receives messages from the controller which has address
corresponding with the bit position. Bit 0 represents address 1 etc. This value contains information about
controllers with addresses 1-16.
Note: The bit which corresponds to the own controller is always set to "1".

6 back to List of values

CAN32
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 8827 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller receives messages from the controller which has address
corresponding with the bit position. Bit 0 represents address 17 etc. This value contains information about
controllers with addresses 17-32.
Note: The bit which corresponds to the own controller is always set to "1".

6 back to List of values

Reg16
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 11081 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller which has address corresponding with the bit position plays active
role in the power management. Bit 0 represents address 1 etc. This value contains information about
controllers with addresses 1-16.

6 back to List of values

Reg32
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 11082 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller which has address corresponding with the bit position plays active
role in the power management. Bit 0 represents address 17 etc. This value contains information about
controllers with addresses 17-32.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 439

 GL16
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10196 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller which has address corresponding with the bit position has GCB
closed. Bit 0 represents address 1 etc. This value contains information about controllers with addresses 1-
16.

6 back to List of values

GL32
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10197 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller which has address corresponding with the bit position has GCB
closed. Bit 0 represents address 1 etc. This value contains information about controllers with addresses 17-
32.

6 back to List of values

Breaker state
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 9245 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Code of the current state of the breaker control. The text representation of each code can be obtained by the
procedure described at the value Timer text (page 440).

6 back to List of values

Timer text
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10040 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Code of the currently running system process timer.
The list of this value can be found in the cfg image which can be generated using GenConfig (open archive
which you want to inspect and click on File-Generate Cfg Image-Generate Cfg Image (Comm. objects)... ).
Text file is generated, open it and find the communication object of your interest. According type of the list is
found next to the name of the communication object. Search for the name of the list (e.g. LIST#3) and in the
lower part of document there is a list of corresponding values included in that particular list.
Note: Remaining time of the timer is available in the value Timer val (page 441).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 440

 Timer val
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 8955 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
The value contains remaining time of the currently running system process timer. The name of the timer is
available in the value Timer text (page 440).

6 back to List of values

NextTime1-4
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10927 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains time of next activation of the timer block 1-4 (i.e. of the output TIMERACT 1-4 (PAGE
521)). The related date is available in the value NextDate1-4 (page 441).

6 back to List of values

NextDate1-4
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10931 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains date of next activation of the timer block 1-4 (i.e. of the output TIMERACT 1-4 (PAGE
521)). The related time is available in the value NextTime1-4 (page 441).

6 back to List of values

NextTime5-8
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10928 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains time of next activation of the timer block 5-8 (i.e. of the output TIMERACT 5-8 (PAGE
521)). The related date is available in the value NextDate5-8 (page 442).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 441

 NextDate5-8
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10932 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains date of next activation of the timer block 5-8 (i.e. of the output TIMERACT 5-8 (PAGE
521)). The related time is available in the value NextTime5-8 (page 441).

6 back to List of values

NextTime9-12
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [V]
Comm object 10929 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains time of next activation of the timer block 9-12 (i.e. of the output TIMERACT 9-12 (PAGE
521)). The related date is available in the value NextDate9-12 (page 442).

6 back to List of values

NextDate9-12
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10933 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains date of next activation of the timer block 9-12 (i.e. of the output TIMERACT 9-12 (PAGE
521)). The related time is available in the value NextTime9-12 (page 442).

6 back to List of values

NextTime13-16
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10930 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains time of next activation of the timer block 13-16 (i.e. of the output TIMERACT 13-16 (PAGE
521)). The related date is available in the value NextDate13-16 (page 443).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 442

 NextDate13-16
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 10934 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains date of next activation of the timer block 13-16 (i.e. of the output TIMERACT 13-16 (PAGE
521)). The related time is available in the value NextTime13-16 (page 442).

6 back to List of values

AirGate ID
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 24345 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
If the controller is connected to an AirGate server this value displays the ID string assigned by the server.
This ID string is to be used in ComAp PC tools (e.g. InteliMonitor) to specify the respective controller when
the connection is opened.

6 back to List of values

AirGate status
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 24344 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value displays actual status of the connection to the AirGate server.

0 Not connected to AirGate .

1 Connected, registered, waiting for authorization.
2 Registration denied.
3 Can not register, no free capacity in the server.
4 Can not register, other reason.
5 Connected, registered, authorized.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 443

 Latitude
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 11678 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains latitude of the controller. This value is obtained from connected IB-NT with active GPS.
Time is automatically synchronized as well when successful GPS fix is established. If no valid value is
available from InternetBridge-NT, value ##### is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Longitude
Value group Info Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] [-]
Comm object 11679 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value contains longitude of the controller. This value is obtained from connected IB-NT with active
GPS. Time is automatically synchronized as well when successful GPS fix is established. If no valid value
is available from InteliBridge-NT, value ##### is displayed.

6 back to List of values

Group: Statistics
Sum MWh
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [MWh]
Comm object 8980 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
In BTB – this value shows always 0.
This value shows the total sum of MWh counted from all the Gen-set in the according control group. If two
separate control groups are connected by group link this value shows sum of MWh from both connected
control groups.
Note: The counter of Import / Export statistics can be readjusted / reset from InteliMonitor menu Monitor
-> Set statistics.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 444

 Sum MVAhr
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 8981 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
In BTB – this value shows always 0.
This value shows the total sum of MVAhr counted from all the Gen-set in the according control group. If two
separate control groups are connected by group link this value shows sum of MVAhr from both connected
control groups.
Note: The counter can be readjusted / reset from InteliMonitor menu Monitor -> Set statistics.

6 back to List of values

M kWh I
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kWh]
Comm object 8205 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the sum of kWh imported from the mains.
Note: The counter can be readjusted/reset from InteliMonitor menu Monitor -> Set statistics.

6 back to List of values

M kVAhr I
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 8539 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the sum of kVAhr imported from the mains.
Note: The counter can be readjusted/reset from InteliMonitor menu Monitor -> Set statistics.

6 back to List of values

M kVAh
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kVAr]
Comm object 13663 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows sum of kVAh that were tranferred through CB.

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 445

 M kWh E
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [kWh]
Comm object 11025 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Description
This value shows the sum of kWh exported to the mains.
Note: The counter can be readjusted/reset from InteliMonitor menu Monitor -> Set statistics.

6 back to List of values

M kVAhr E
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 11026 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This value shows the sum of kVAhr exported to the mains.
Note: The counter can be readjusted / reset from InteliMonitor menu Monitor -> Set statistics.

6 back to List of values

PulseCounter 1
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 10986 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is the value of PulseCounter #1 module. See the binary input PULSECOUNTER 1 (PAGE 481).

6 back to List of values

PulseCounter 2
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 10987 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is the value of PulseCounter #2 module. See the binary input PULSECOUNTER 2 (PAGE 481).

6 back to List of values

PulseCounter 3
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 10988 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is the value of PulseCounter #3 module. See the binary input PULSECOUNTER 3 (PAGE 481).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 446

 PulseCounter 4
Value group Statistics Related FW 3.8.0
Resolution [units] 0 [-]
Comm object 10989 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
This is the value of PulseCounter #4 module. See the binary input PULSECOUNTER 4 (PAGE 482).

6 back to List of values

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 447

5.1.3 Logical binary inputs
Virtual and physical modules
Number of I/O can be extended and project wiring can be reduced using the following extension and virtual
modules.

Number of
Modules
Module Name BIN BOUT AIN AOUT Note
Supported by
Controller
Controllers
IM-NT(c)-BB
12 12 3 1 Controller I/O -
controller
IM-NT controller 6 6 - - Controller I/O -
Extension Modules
IGS-PTM 8 8 4 1 Standard I/O extension module. 4
IS-AIN8 - - 8 - Standard I/O extension module. 10
I-AOUT8 - - - 8 Standard I/O extension module. 4
S-BIN16/8 16 8 - - Standard I/O extension module. 6
IGL-RA15 - 15 - - 15 Green, Red, Yellow LED panel. 4
Standard I/O extension module.
Inteli-AIN8 - - 8+1 - 10
One Frequency/Pulse input.
Inteli-AIN8TC - - 8 - Standard I/O extension module 10
Inteli-IO8/8 8 8 - 2 Standard I/O extension module 12
Inteli-IO16/0 16 - - 2 Standard I/O extension module 6
Virtual modules
VPIO 8 8 - - Virtual periphery I/O module. 4
SHared (virtual) Binary INput
SHBIN 8 - - - 6
module
SHared (virtual) Binary OUTput
SHBOUT - 8 - - 6
module
Shared (virtual) Analog Input
SHAIN - - 4 - 2
module
Shared (virtual) Analog OUTput
SHAOUT - - - 4 2
module
Programmable (internal) logic
PLC x x x x 1
module.

Note: Maximum number of configured modules (both extension and virtual) is given by available addresses.
The numbers in the table are valid in the case that no other modules are configured.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 448

 Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs
LBI: A 451
LBI: C 452
LBI: E 452
LBI: F 457
LBI: G 465
LBI: H 465
LBI: I 465
LBI: L 468
LBI: M 476
LBI: P 481
LBI: R 482
LBI: S 484
LBI: T 485

For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter List of LBI (page 450).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 449

 List of LBI HornResButton 465 StartButton 484
ImpCountSet1 465 StopButton 484
AccessLock D#2 451
ImpCountSet2 466 Test on load 485
AccessLock ext 451
ImpCountSet3 466 Time stamp act 486
AccessLock int 451
ImpCountSet4 466 Timer block 1 486
Alt brightness 452
IssueActCallC1 466 Timer block 2 486
CtrlHBeat sens 452
IssueActCallC2 467 Timer block 3 486
Emerg. manual 452
IssueActCallC3 467 Timer block 4 486
ExtValue1 down 454
Lang sel D#2 A 468 Timer block 5 486
ExtValue1 up 454
Lang sel D#2 B 469 Timer block 6 487
ExtValue1reset 454
Lang sel D#2 C 470 Timer block 7 487
ExtValue2 down 455
Lang sel int A 471 Timer block 8 487
ExtValue2reset 455
Lang sel int B 472 Timer block 9 487
ExtValue3 down 455
Lang sel int C 473 Timer block 10 487
ExtValue3 up 456
Load res 2 473 Timer block 11 487
ExtValue3reset 456
Load res 3 474 Timer block 12 488
ExtValue4 down 456
Load res 4 474 Timer block 13 488
ExtValue4 up 457
ManualLdRecon 476 Timer block 14 488
ExtValue4reset 457
MCB disable 476 Timer block 15 488
FaultResButton 457
MCB fdb neg 476 Timer block 16 488
Force block 1 458
MCB feedback 477
Force block 2 458 6 back to Controller
MCBButton 477 objects
Force block 3 458
MCBIsolated 477
ForceValueIn 1 458
MGCB disable 478
ForceValueIn 2 460
MGCB fdb neg 478
ForceValueIn 3 460
MGCB feedback 478
ForceValueIn 4 460
MGCB open 479
ForceValueIn 5 461
MGCBIsolated 479
ForceValueIn 6 461
MinRun power 1 479
ForceValueIn 7 461
MinRun power 2 480
ForceValueIn 8 462
MinRun power 3 480
ForceValueIn 9 462
PulseCounter 1 481
ForceValueIn10 462
PulseCounter 2 481
ForceValueIn11 463
PulseCounter 3 481
ForceValueIn12 463
PulseCounter 4 482
ForceValueIn13 463
Rem Start/Stop 482
ForceValueIn14 464
REMOTE: Remote AUT 482
ForceValueIn15 464
REMOTE: Remote MAN 483
ForceValueIn16 464
REMOTE: Remote off 483
GroupLink 465
REMOTE: Remote TEST 483

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 450

 LBI: A
AccessLock D#2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 2
Description
This input forces the external local terminal or InteliVision (display) #2 into monitoring mode.
Note: Local display means that it is connected to dedicated RS485. There is possibility to connect up to
2 external displays in IG-NT-BB or 1 in IG-NT. It is possible to connect up to 3 external displays in IS-
NT-BB and in IS-NT.

Setpoints changes are disabled.

Using control buttons on the panel is disabled even if the controller is in MAN mode.
Change of controller mode is disabled.

6 back to List of LBI

AccessLock ext
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 4
Description
This input forces all external remote terminals into monitoring mode.
Setpoints changes are disabled.
Executing commands is disabled.
Change of controller mode is disabled.
An external remote terminal is any device, which reads and/or writes data from/into the controller and is
connected to the controller via any other communication bus than the dedicated terminal RS485 bus.
Note: An example of such terminal is a PC with InteliMonitor , any kind of remote display connected via
CAN2 or a PLC connected to the RS485 and communicating via Modbus.

6 back to List of LBI

AccessLock int
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1
Description
This input forces the controller built-in terminal into monitoring mode.
Setpoints changes are disabled.
Using control buttons on the panel is disabled even if the controller is in MAN mode.
Change of controller mode is disabled.

Note: As the IS-NT and IGS-NT-BB do not have built-in terminal, this input is assigned to the terminal or
InteliVision (display) #1, which is supposed to be directly attached to the controller or mounted close to
it.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 451

 Alt brightness
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 5
Description
This input is used to switch the IG-NT built-in terminal (display) to the alternative backlight intensity mode
(e.g. "night mode"). The alternative intensity level is adjusted using the display buttons (see the operator
guide for details) while this input is active and is stored in the nonvolatile memory.
Note: A binary input with identical function (not configurable) is located in the power connector of the
external IG-Display and IS-Display modules.

6 back to List of LBI

LBI: C
CtrlHBeat sens
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 74
Description
This input is used at a redundant controller to sense the "heart beat" from the main controller. The input is to
be connected to the output CTRL HEART BEAT (PAGE 497) of the main controller.
If the redundant controller does not sense the heart beat from the main one, it will activate the binary output
CTRL HBEAT FD (PAGE 497), which has to be wired in such a way, that it disconnects the dead main
controller, connects the redundant controller instead and activates it.

6 back to List of LBI

LBI: E
Emerg. manual
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 279
Description
IMPORTANT: Since InteliMains-NT deactivates its regulation loops, it is not possible to use
Emerg. manual when InteliMains-NT has both its breakers closed and the system is running
in parallel to Mains. If Emerg. manual needs to be used when the system is in parallel to
Mains, make sure that the setpoint SysLdCtrl PtM is set to BASELOAD to prevent gen-sets
from running unregulated.

IMPORTANT: Running Hours Equalization and Load Demand Swapping are not active in
InteliMains-NT and if InteliMains-NT is set to MASTER for these function, no other controller
will assume its role eventhough InteliMains-NT is in Emerg. manual.

The controller is accepting manual control of breakers and other controlled components when the Emerg.
manual is active. It deactivates all outputs. This function is also used in case of redundancy to disable
redundant controller.
Controller opens following binary inputs (or if already opened these outputs stay inactive):

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 452

 Binary outputs for Start and Stop of Gen-sets Group Sys start/stop
MCB close/open
MCB ON coil
MCB OFF coil
MCB UV coil
MGCB ON coil
MGCB OFF coil
MGCB UV coil
Binary outputs for Breaker Control BTB close/open
BTB ON coil
BTB OFF coil
BTB UV coil
LCB close/open
LCB ON coil
LCB OFF coil
LCB UV coil
In synchronism
ReverseSynchro
Other Binary outputs
ForwardSynchro
EnginesSwapped

The output terminals that are configured with inversion are closed. Voltage, current and power measurement
is active all the time, regardless of the actual state of the mains. It is possible to influence breaker under IM-
NT supervision without Wrn MCB fail or Wrn MGCB fail.
After the binary input EMERG. MANUAL is open again, the controller recovers to the previous mode and
behaves according to the actual situation.
Function is active in any controller mode and activation of this input is written to history.
Note: The function is intended especially for Marine gen-sets which are supposed to be started manually
while the controller has no power supply. To recover successfully from this state, only the signals MCB
ON/OFF coil should be used for mains and breaker control, as the other outputs are continuously active
during Mains operation and it is not possible to switch them between more control sources.

Note: In InteliMains-NT informational outputs SystReady, Syst res OK and other outputs related to the
power management are still active in Emerg. manual mode even though InteliMains-NT does not play
active role in power management and load sharing. If there are any user defined functions based on
these outputs, blocking those functions (e.g. in PLC) in Emerg. manual mode should be considered.

IMPORTANT: Be aware that all outputs related to PLC functions remain functional!

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 453

 ExtValue1 down
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 79
Description
While this input is active the value of ExtValue 1 is continuously beeing decreased at the rate of ExtValue2
rate (page 363) until it reaches ExtValue2HiLim (page 361).
Note: If this input is used (configured), the ExtValue 2 can't be written remotely from a remote terminal
using the command ExtValue 2.

6 back to List of LBI

ExtValue1 up
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 75
Description
While this input is active the value of ExtValue 1 is continuously beeing increased at the rate of ExtValue1
rate (page 362) until it reaches ExtValue1HiLim (page 361).
Note: If this input is used (configured), the ExtValue 1 can't be written remotely from a remote terminal
using the command ExtValue 1.

6 back to List of LBI

ExtValue1reset
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 83
Description
The ExtValue 1 is reset to it's default value when this input is activated and held there until the input is
deactivated. The default value is given by the setpoint ExtValue1deflt.
While the reset input is active:
The value does not respond to up and down inputs.
The value does not accept new data that are written remotely from a remote terminal using the
ExtValue command.
Note: Configuring of the reset input does not block writing the ExtValue remotely, in comparison to the
up and down inputs, which does. However, if the reset input is active, the remotely written data are not
accepted.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 454

 ExtValue2 down
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 80
Description
While this input is active the value of ExtValue 2 is continuously beeing decreased at the rate of ExtValue2
rate (page 363) until it reaches ExtValue2LoLim (page 359).
Note: If this input is used (configured), the ExtValue 2 can't be written remotely from a remote terminal
using the command ExtValue 2.

6 back to List of LBI

ExtValue2reset
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 84
Description
The ExtValue 2 is reset to it's default value when this input is activated and held there until the input is
deactivated. The default value is given by the setpoint ExtValue2deflt (page 364).
While the reset input is active:
The value does not respond to up and down inputs.
The value does not accept new data that are written remotely from a remote terminal using the
ExtValue command.
Note: Configuring of the reset input does not block writing the ExtValue remotely, in comparison to the
up and down inputs, which does. However, if the reset input is active, the remotely written data are not
accepted.

6 back to List of LBI

ExtValue3 down
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 81
Description
While this input is active the value of ExtValue 3 is continuously beeing decreased at the rate of ExtValue3
rate (page 363) until it reaches ExtValue3LoLim (page 360).
Note: If this input is used (configured), the ExtValue 3 can't be written remotely from a remote terminal
using the command ExtValue 3.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 455

 ExtValue3 up
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 77
Description
While this input is active the value of ExtValue 3 is continuously beeing increased at the rate of ExtValue3
rate (page 363) until it reaches ExtValue3HiLim (page 362).
Note: this input is used (configured), the ExtValue 3 can't be written remotely from a remote terminal
using the command ExtValue 3.

6 back to List of LBI

ExtValue3reset
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 85
Description
The ExtValue 3 is reset to it's default value when this input is activated and held there until the input is
deactivated. The default value is given by the setpoint ExtValue3deflt (page 364).
While the reset input is active:
The value does not respond to up and down inputs.
The value does not accept new data that are written remotely from a remote terminal using the
ExtValue command.
Note: Configuring of the reset input does not block writing the ExtValue remotely, in comparison to the
up and down inputs, which does. However, if the reset input is active, the remotely written data are not
accepted.

6 back to List of LBI

ExtValue4 down
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 82
Description
While this input is active the value of ExtValue 4 is continuously beeing decreased at the rate of ExtValue4
rate (page 363) until it reaches ExtValue4LoLim (page 360).
Note: If this input is used (configured), the ExtValue 4 can't be written remotely from a remote terminal
using the command ExtValue 4.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 456

 ExtValue4 up
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 78
Description
While this input is active the value of ExtValue 4 is continuously beeing increased at the rate of ExtValue4
rate (page 363) until it reaches ExtValue4HiLim (page 362).
Note: If this input is used (configured), the ExtValue 4 can't be written remotely from a remote terminal
using the command ExtValue 4.

6 back to List of LBI

ExtValue4reset
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 86
Description
The ExtValue 4 is reset to it's default value when this input is activated and held there until the input is
deactivated. The default value is given by the setpoint ExtValue4deflt (page 365).
While the reset input is active:
The value does not respond to up and down inputs.
The value does not accept new data that are written remotely from a remote terminal using the
ExtValue command.
Note: Configuring of the reset input does not block writing the ExtValue remotely, in comparison to the
up and down inputs, which does. However, if the reset input is active, the remotely written data are not
accepted.

6 back to List of LBI

LBI: F
FaultResButton
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 6
Description
This input is used for an external FAULT RESET button mounted on the switchboard. The function of the
input is identical as function of the fault reset button on the controller front panel.
The input is enabled only if the setpoint Local buttons (page 237) is set to position EXTBUTTONS or
BOTH.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 457

 Force block 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 16
Description
This is one of three binary inputs used for user-defined blocking of protections. If the input is active, all the
protections that have Protection block type configured as Force block 1 block type are blocked (i.e.
temporarily disabled).

6 back to List of LBI

Force block 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 17
Description
This is one of three binary inputs used for user-defined blocking of protections. If the input is active, all the
protections that have Protection block type configured as Force block 2 block type are blocked (i.e.
temporarily disabled).

6 back to List of LBI

Force block 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 18
Description
This is one of three binary inputs used for user-defined blocking of protections. If the input is active, all the
protections that have Protection block type configured as Force block 3 block type are blocked (i.e.
temporarily disabled).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 19
Description
This input activates the Force value #1 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #1 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #1 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 458

 Image 4.81 Example of an active force value block

Image 4.82 Example of an inactive force value block

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 459

 ForceValueIn 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 20
Description
This input activates the Force value #2 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #2 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #2 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 21
Description
This input activates the Force value #3 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #3 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #3 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn 4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 22
Description
This input activates the Force value #4 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #4 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #4 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 460

 ForceValueIn 5
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 23
Description
This input activates the Force value #5 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #5 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #5 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn 6
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 24
Description
This input activates the Force value #6 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #6 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #6 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn 7
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 25
Description
This input activates the Force value #7 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #7 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #7 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in Gen-set in
the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 461

 ForceValueIn 8
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 26
Description
This input activates the Force value #8 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #8 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #8 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn 9
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 27
Description
This input activates the Force value #9 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #9 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #9 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn10
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 28
Description
This input activates the Force value #10 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #10 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #10 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 462

 ForceValueIn11
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 29
Description
This input activates the Force value #11 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #11 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #11 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn12
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 30
Description
This input activates the Force value #12 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #12 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #12 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn13
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 31
Description
This input activates the Force value #13 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #13 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #13 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 463

 ForceValueIn14
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 32
Description
This input activates the Force value #14 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #14 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #14 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn15
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 33
Description
This input activates the Force value #15 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #15 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #15 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

ForceValueIn16
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 34
Description
This input activates the Force value #16 block. If the input is active, the value of the setpoint, to which the
Force value #16 block is configured, will be overridden by value of the alternative setpoint assigned to the
Force value #16 block.
Note: If there are more than one force value blocks configured onto one setpoint then the highest priority
has the block with the lowest index (i.e. the first active block according to the list displayed in GenConfig
in the Force value window at the related setpoint).

Note: See an example in the description of the binary input FORCEVALUEIN 1 (PAGE 458).

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 464

 LBI: G
GroupLink
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 59
Description
This input can be mainly used in BTB application. Nonetheless, any IM-NT or IGS-NT controller can be used
for group link function even if bus tie breaker is controlled manually or by third party device (only proper
feedback from BTB is required).
If this input is configured, the group linking function is active, i.e. this controller becomes the status server
for two groups of gen-sets and informs them about the BTB status. Closing of this input indicates closing of
BTB (i.e. two groups are linked together). Opening of this input indicates opening of BTB (i.e. two groups are
working separately).
Note: This input is intended for connecting to the BTB feedback.

For more information see setpoints Control group, GroupLinkLeft (page 315) and GroupLinkRight (page
316).

6 back to List of LBI

LBI: H
HornResButton
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 7
Description
This input is used for an external HORN RESET button mounted on the switchboard. The function of the
input is identical as function of the horn reset button on the controller front panel.
The input is enabled only if the setpoint Local buttons (page 237) is set to position EXTBUTTONS or
BOTH.

6 back to List of LBI

LBI: I
ImpCountSet1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 684
Description
This binary input sets the according impulse counter to a value in setpoint ImpCountDef1 (page 241).

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 465

 ImpCountSet2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 685
Description
This binary input sets the according impulse counter to a value in setpoint ImpCountDef2 (page 241).

6 back to List of LBI

ImpCountSet3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 686
Description
This binary input sets the according impulse counter to a value in setpoint ImpCountDef3 (page 242).

6 back to List of LBI

ImpCountSet4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 687
Description
This binary input sets the according impulse counter to a value in setpoint ImpCountDef4 (page 242).

6 back to List of LBI

IssueActCallC1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 35
Description
This input forces the controller to issue an active call/e-mail/SMS via the channel #1. Type of the channel is
to be adjusted by the setpoint AcallCH1-Type (page 380).
This input can be used to inform a remote user about a specific non-alarm situation, e.g. mains failure and/or
mains return:
Select a binary signal in the controller, which indicates, that the particular situation occurred, about
which you want to be informed remotely. There are many predefined binary information provided
directly by the controller or use PLC functions to create the desired binary signal.
Configure an universal protection block to the binary signal mentioned above and select protection
type AL indication.
Configure the binary signal mentioned above onto the logical binary input IssueActCallC1.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 466

 IssueActCallC2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 36
Description
This input forces the controller to issue an active call/e-mail/SMS via the channel #2. Type of the channel is
to be adjusted by the setpoint AcallCH2-Type (page 381).
This input can be used to inform a remote user about a specific non-alarm situation, e.g. mains failure and/or
mains return:
Select a binary signal in the controller, which indicates, that the particular situation occurred, about
which you want to be informed remotely. There are many predefined binary information provided
directly by the controller or use PLC functions to create the desired binary signal.
Configure an universal protection block to the binary signal mentioned above and select protection
type AL indication.
Configure the binary signal mentioned above onto the logical binary input IssueActCallC2.

6 back to List of LBI

IssueActCallC3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 37
Description
This input forces the controller to issue an active call/e-mail/SMS via the channel #3. Type of the channel is
to be adjusted by the setpoint AcallCH3-Type (page 382).
This input can be used to inform a remote user about a specific non-alarm situation, e.g. mains failure and/or
mains return:
Select a binary signal in the controller, which indicates, that the particular situation occurred, about
which you want to be informed remotely. There are many predefined binary information provided
directly by the controller or use PLC functions to create the desired binary signal.
Configure an universal protection block to the binary signal mentioned above and select protection
type AL indication.
Configure the binary signal mentioned above onto the logical binary input IssueActCallC3.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 467

 LBI: L
Lang sel D#2 A
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 110
Description
This is one of three binary inputs LANG SEL D#2 A (PAGE 468), LANG SEL D#2 B (PAGE 469), LANG SEL
D#2 C (PAGE 470), used for selecting language of the external local terminal #2.
Note: Using these inputs for language selection is an option only. If the inputs are not configured, the
language can be selected using the menus on the terminal.

Encoding table
Language Index Input A Input B Input C
0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
2 0 1 0
3 1 1 0
4 0 0 1
5 1 0 1
6 0 1 1
7 1 1 1

Note: "0" in the table means the input is not active or not configured.

Note: Language index 0 selects the default language of the terminal, i.e. the language, which is adjusted
in the terminal using it's menus.

Note: The reaction on changes of these inputs is delayed about 1 sec to ensure the new combination is
valid (e.g. if a rotary selector switch is used).

IMPORTANT: Each language change causes the reinitialization of the display. Function of
the controller is not influenced.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 468

 Lang sel D#2 B
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 111
Description
This is one of three binary inputs LANG SEL D#2 B (PAGE 469), LANG SEL D#2 B (PAGE 469), LANG SEL
D#2 C (PAGE 470), used for selecting language of the external local terminal #2.
Note: Using these inputs for language selection is an option only. If the inputs are not configured, the
language can be selected using the menus on the terminal.

Encoding table
Language Index Input A Input B Input C
0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
2 0 1 0
3 1 1 0
4 0 0 1
5 1 0 1
6 0 1 1
7 1 1 1

Note: "0" in the table means the input is not active or not configured.

Note: Language index 0 selects the default language of the terminal, i.e. the language, which is adjusted
in the terminal using it's menus.

Note: The reaction on changes of these inputs is delayed about 1 sec to ensure the new combination is
valid (e.g. if a rotary selector switch is used).

IMPORTANT: Each language change causes the reinitialization of the display. Function of
the controller is not influenced.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 469

 Lang sel D#2 C
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 112
Description
This is one of three binary inputs LANG SEL D#2 C (PAGE 470), LANG SEL D#2 B (PAGE 469), LANG SEL
D#2 C (PAGE 470), used for selecting language of the external local terminal #2.
Note: Using these inputs for language selection is an option only. If the inputs are not configured, the
language can be selected using the menus on the terminal.

Encoding table
Language Index Input A Input B Input C
0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
2 0 1 0
3 1 1 0
4 0 0 1
5 1 0 1
6 0 1 1
7 1 1 1

Note: "0" in the table means the input is not active or not configured.

Note: Language index 0 selects the default language of the terminal, i.e. the language, which is adjusted
in the terminal using it's menus.

Note: The reaction on changes of these inputs is delayed about 1 sec to ensure the new combination is
valid (e.g. if a rotary selector switch is used).

IMPORTANT: Each language change causes the reinitialization of the display. Function of
the controller is not influenced.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 470

 Lang sel int A
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 107
Description
This is one of three binary inputs LANG SEL INT A (PAGE 471), LANG SEL INT B (PAGE 472), LANG SEL INT C
(PAGE 473), used for selecting language of the built-in IG-NT terminal (display). As the IS-NT does not have
built-in terminal, this input is assigned to the terminal (display) #1, which is supposed to be directly attached
to the controller or mounted close to it.
Note: Using these inputs for language selection is an option only. If the inputs are not configured, the
language can be selected using the menus on the terminal.

Encoding table
Language Index Input A Input B Input C
0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
2 0 1 0
3 1 1 0
4 0 0 1
5 1 0 1
6 0 1 1
7 1 1 1

Note: "0" in the table means the input is not active or not configured.

Note: Language index 0 selects the default language of the terminal, i.e. the language, which is adjusted
in the terminal using it's menus.

Note: The reaction on changes of these inputs is delayed about 1 sec to ensure the new combination is
valid (e.g. if a rotary selector switch is used).

IMPORTANT: Each language change causes the reinitialization of the display. Function of
the controller is not influenced.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 471

 Lang sel int B
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 108
Description
This is one of three binary inputs LANG SEL INT B (PAGE 472), LANG SEL INT B (PAGE 472), LANG SEL INT C
(PAGE 473), used for selecting language of the built-in IG-NT terminal (display). As the IS-NT does not have
built-in terminal, this input is assigned to the terminal (display) #1, which is supposed to be directly attached
to the controller or mounted close to it.
Note: Using these inputs for language selection is an option only. If the inputs are not configured, the
language can be selected using the menus on the terminal.

Encoding table
Language Index Input A Input B Input C
0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
2 0 1 0
3 1 1 0
4 0 0 1
5 1 0 1
6 0 1 1
7 1 1 1

Note: "0" in the table means the input is not active or not configured.

Note: Language index 0 selects the default language of the terminal, i.e. the language, which is adjusted
in the terminal using it's menus.

Note: The reaction on changes of these inputs is delayed about 1 sec to ensure the new combination is
valid (e.g. if a rotary selector switch is used).

IMPORTANT: Each language change causes the reinitialization of the display. Function of
the controller is not influenced.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 472

 Lang sel int C
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 109
Description
This is one of three binary inputs LANG SEL INT C (PAGE 473), LANG SEL INT B (PAGE 472), LANG SEL INT C
(PAGE 473), used for selecting language of the built-in IG-NT terminal (display). As the IS-NT does not have
built-in terminal, this input is assigned to the terminal (display) #1, which is supposed to be directly attached
to the controller or mounted close to it.
Note: Using these inputs for language selection is an option only. If the inputs are not configured, the
language can be selected using the menus on the terminal.

Encoding table
Language Index Input A Input B Input C
0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
2 0 1 0
3 1 1 0
4 0 0 1
5 1 0 1
6 0 1 1
7 1 1 1

Note: "0" in the table means the input is not active or not configured.

Note: Language index 0 selects the default language of the terminal, i.e. the language, which is adjusted
in the terminal using it's menus.

Note: The reaction on changes of these inputs is delayed about 1 sec to ensure the new combination is
valid (e.g. if a rotary selector switch is used).

IMPORTANT: Each language change causes the reinitialization of the display. Function of
the controller is not influenced.

6 back to List of LBI

Load res 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 49
Description
This input is used to activate the load reserve set #2 instead of the set #1, which is active by default. The set
#2 is adjusted by setpoints:
#LoadResStrt 2 (page 299) and #LoadResStop 2 (page 300) if the power management is switched
to absolute mode
#%LdResStrt 2 (page 305) and #%LdResStop 2 (page 306) if the power management is switched
to relative mode.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 473

 IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the
same load reserve set selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus.

6 back to List of LBI

Load res 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 50
Description
This input is used to activate the load reserve set #3 instead of the set #1, which is active by default. The set
#3 is adjusted by setpoints:
#LoadResStrt 3 (page 301) and #LoadResStop 3 (page 302) if the power management is switched
to absolute (kW-based) mode
#%LdResStrt 3 (page 306) and #%LdResStop 3 (page 307) if the power management is switched
to relative (%Pnom-based) mode.
IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the
same load reserve set selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus. See example in the description of
the input LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473).

6 back to List of LBI

Load res 4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 51
Description
This input is used to activate the load reserve set #4 instead of the set #1, which is active by default. The set
#4 is adjusted by setpoints:
#LoadResStrt 4 (page 303) and #LoadResStop 4 (page 304) if the power management is switched
to absolute (kW-based) mode
#%LdResStrt 4 (page 307) and #%LdResStop 4 (page 308) if the power management is switched
to relative (%Pnom-based) mode.
IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the
same load reserve set selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus. See example in the description of
the input LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473).

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 474

 LoadReduct 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications SPtM, SPI, Combi
Description
Load reduction is based on adjustment of user curve named PWRGENMNGM, where x axis means
number of activated LBI and y axis means required power reduction from nominal power given by
Setpoint .
When more than one LBI is activated all the limitations are activated but only the lowest is used.
Simultaneously must be activated LBI:LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476)

6 back to List of LBI

LoadReduct 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications SPtM, SPI, Combi
Description
Load reduction is based on adjustment of user curve named PWRGENMNGM, where x axis means
number of activated LBI and y axis means required power reduction from nominal power given by
Setpoint .
When more than one LBI is activated all the limitations are activated but only the lowest is used
Simultaneously must be activated LBI:LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476)

6 back to List of LBI

LoadReduct 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications SPtM, SPI, Combi
Description
Load reduction is based on adjustment of user curve named PWRGENMNGM, where x axis means
number of activated LBI and y axis means required power reduction from nominal power given by
Setpoint .
When more than one LBI is activated all the limitations are activated but only the lowest is used
Simultaneously must be activated LBI:LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476)

6 back to List of LBI

LoadReduct 4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications SPtM, SPI, Combi
Description
Load reduction is based on adjustment of user curve named PWRGENMNGM, where x axis means
number of activated LBI and y axis means required power reduction from nominal power given by
Setpoint .
When more than one LBI is activated all the limitations are activated but only the lowest is used.
Simultaneously must be activated LBI:LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476)

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 475

 Load reduction
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
If this input is configured, than is possible to reduce the power of generator either via LBI: LOADREDUCT
1 (PAGE 475), LOADREDUCT 2 (PAGE 475), LOADREDUCT 3 (PAGE 475), LOADREDUCT 4 (PAGE 475) or
via LAI: LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 537)

6 back to List of LBI

LBI: M
ManualLdRecon
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 60
Description
This input is used for manual reconnection of the last disconnected part of the load, if the load has dropped
below the setpoint Ld reconLevel1 (page 370).
This input works only if automatic reconnection is disabled, i.e. the setpoint AutoLd recon (page 373) is set
to DISABLED.

6 back to List of LBI

MCB disable
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 124
Description
The input is used to disable issuing the MCB closing command.
If the input is active during synchronizing, the controller will keep the loaded genset group
synchronized with the mains without issuing the MCB closing command until the input is deactivated
or Sync timeout is elapsed.
If the input is active and the MCB button is pressed in MAN mode to close the MCB to dead bus, the
MCB will not be closed until the input is deactivated and the MCB button pressed again.
If the input is active and the MCB is to be closed to dead bus automatically, the MCB will not be
closed until the input is deactivated.

6 back to List of LBI

MCB fdb neg

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 66
Description
This input is used for connection of the normally closed feedback contact from the mains circuit breaker or
contactor. This input is optional and if it is configured, it must be always in inverse position to the normally
open input MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 477). Maximal allowed time the both inputs are in the same position is
500ms, after this time the alarm MCB Fail is issued.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 476

 MCB feedback
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 65
Description
This input is used for connection of the normally open feedback contact from the mains circuit breaker or
contactor. If the input is active, the controller will consider the MCB as closed and vice versa.
If the feedback does not respond to a change of the control output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 504)
within 2s, the alarm MCB Fail will be issued.
If the feedback indicates the MCB has unexpectedly closed without any command given by the
control output, the alarm MCB Fail will be issued immediately.
If the feedback indicates the MCB has unexpectedly opened without any command given by the
control output, the controller will accept this situation and the following behavior will depend on mains
conditions (healthy or failure).

6 back to List of LBI

MCBButton
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 10
Description
This input is used for an external MCB button mounted on the switchboard. The function of the input is
identical as function of the MCB button on the controller front panel.
The input is enabled only if the setpoint Local buttons (page 237) is set to position EXTBUTTONS or
BOTH.

6 back to List of LBI

MCBIsolated
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 601
Description
This input can be used for secondary breaker feedback. When this logical binary input gets activated the
controller will consider the corresponding CB to be opened regardless of the position of normal and negative
feedback of that CB.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 477

 MGCB disable
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 62
Description
The input is used to disable issuing the MGCB closing command.
If the input is active during synchronizing, the controller will keep the controller will keep the genset
group synchronized without issuing the MGCB closing command until the input is deactivated or
Sync timeout is elapsed.
If the input is active and the MGCB button is pressed in MAN mode to close the MGCB to dead bus,
the MGCB will not be closed until the input is deactivated and the MGCB button pressed again.
If the input is active and the MGCB is to be closed to dead bus automatically, the MGCB will not be
closed until the input is deactivated.

6 back to List of LBI

MGCB fdb neg

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 64
Description
This input is used for connection of the normally closed feedback contact from the master generator circuit
breaker or contactor. This input is optional and if it is configured, it must be always in inverse position to the
normally open input MGCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 478). Maximal allowed time the both inputs are in the same
position is 500ms, after this time the alarm MGCB Fail is issued.

6 back to List of LBI

MGCB feedback
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB
Comm object 63
Description
This input is used for connection of the normally open feedback contact from the master generator circuit
breaker or contactor. If the input is active, the controller will consider the MGCB as closed and vice versa.
If the feedback does not respond to a change of the control output MGCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 507)
within 2s, the alarm MGCB Fail will be issued.
If the feedback changes it's position unexpectedly without any command given by the control output,
the alarm MGCB Fail will be issued immediately.
Note: This input is obligatory.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 478

 MGCB open
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB
Comm object 278
Description
If this input is closed MGCB closing is not possible. If MGCB is already closed and input MGCB open
becomes active MGCB is opened immediately. All functions involving MGCB closing are blocked until
MGCB open is opened again.

6 back to List of LBI

MGCBIsolated
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 603
Description
This input can be used for secondary breaker feedback. When this logical binary input gets activated the
controller will consider the corresponding CB to be opened regardless of the position of normal and negative
feedback of that CB.

6 back to List of LBI

MinRun power 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 52
Description
This input is used to activate the function Minimal running power #1, which is adjusted by setpoint
#MinRunPower 1 (page 310).
Note: The default value of minimal running power, which takes place while none of the inputs MinRun
power x, is 0kW.

Note: If more then one binary input for MinRunPower is activated, the one with the highest number is
used (i.e. its corresponding value).

IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the
same minimal running power selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus. See the principial diagram of such
distribution in the description of the input LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473).

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 479

 MinRun power 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 53
Description
This input is used to activate the function Minimal running power #1, which is adjusted by setpoint
#MinRunPower 2 (page 311).
Note: The default value of minimal running power, which takes place while none of the inputs MinRun
power x, is 0kW.

Note: If more then one binary input for MinRunPower is activated, the one with the highest number is
used (i.e. its corresponding value).

IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the
same minimal running power selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus. See the principial diagram of such
distribution in the description of the input LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473).

6 back to List of LBI

MinRun power 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 54
Description
This input is used to activate the function Minimal running power #1, which is adjusted by setpoint
#MinRunPower 3 (page 311).
Note: The default value of minimal running power, which takes place while none of the inputs MinRun
power x, is 0kW.

Note: If more then one binary input for MinRunPower is activated, the one with the highest number is
used (i.e. its corresponding value).

IMPORTANT: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the
same minimal running power selected.

Note: It is possible to use virtual peripheries for distribution of the binary signal from one physical switch
connected to one controller to all other controllers over the CAN bus. See the principial diagram of such
distribution in the description of the input LOAD RES 2 (PAGE 473).

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 480

 LBI: P
PulseCounter 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 87
Description
This is the input of the PulseCounter #1 module. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint ConvCoefPulse1 (page 242), the counter value
PulseCounter 1 (page 446) (in the group Statistic) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0.
Both counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
The PulseCounter modules are intended e.g. for connecting external energy or fuel meters with pulse
outputs.
Note: Minimal pulse width as well as minimal pause between two successful pulses is 100 ms.

Note: The counter value can be reset in the InteliMonitor statistics window.

6 back to List of LBI

PulseCounter 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 88
Description
This is the input of the PulseCounter #2 module. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint ConvCoefPulse2 (page 243), the counter value
PulseCounter 2 (page 446) (in the group Statistic) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0.
Both counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
The PulseCounter modules are intended e.g. for connecting external energy or fuel meters with pulse
outputs.
Note: Minimal pulse width as well as minimal pause between two successful pulses is 100 ms.

The counter value can be reset in the InteliMonitor statistics window.

6 back to List of LBI

PulseCounter 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 89
Description
This is the input of the PulseCounter #3 module. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint ConvCoefPulse3 (page 243), the counter value
PulseCounter 3 (page 446) (in the group Statistic) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0.
Both counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
The PulseCounter modules are intended e.g. for connecting external energy or fuel meters with pulse
outputs.
Note: Minimal pulse width as well as minimal pause between two successful pulses is 100 ms.

Note: The counter value can be reset in the InteliMonitor statistics window.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 481

 6 back to List of LBI

PulseCounter 4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 90
Description
This is the input of the PulseCounter #4 module. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint ConvCoefPulse4 (page 244), the counter value
PulseCounter 4 (page 447) (in the group Statistic) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0.
Both counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
The PulseCounter modules are intended e.g. for connecting external energy or fuel meters with pulse
outputs.
Note: Minimal pulse width as well as minimal pause between two successful pulses is 100 ms.

Note: The counter value can be reset in the InteliMonitor statistics window.

6 back to List of LBI

LBI: R
Rem Start/Stop
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 38
Description
If the input closes (AUT mode only), the controller activates the binary output Sys start/stop in order to start
the gen-set group (to enable the start setpoint ParallelEnable (page 216) should not be set to NO). In
MGCB application, the MGCB can be closed before the output activation (see setpoint description
MGCBparalClose (page 220)).

6 back to List of LBI

REMOTE: Remote AUT

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 14
Description
The controller is forced into AUT mode while this input is active.
Note: Programming of firmware and/or configuration is disabled while this input is active, as the
programming is allowed in OFF mode only and GenConfig is not able to switch the controller to OFF
mode while AUT mode is forced by this input.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 482

 REMOTE: Remote MAN
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 13
Description
The controller is forced into MAN mode while this input is active.
Note: Programming of firmware and/or configuration is disabled while this input is active, as the
programming is allowed in OFF mode only and GenConfig is not able to switch the controller to OFF
mode while MAN mode is forced by this input.

6 back to List of LBI

REMOTE: Remote off

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 12
Description
The controller is forced into OFF mode while this input is active. The controller will return into the previous
mode after the input is deactivated.
Use this input if you need to disable the controller temporarily from any reason (maintenance, control from a
higher-level automation system etc..). Keep in mind that in OFF mode IM-NT automatically closes MCB if
there is healthy Mains.

6 back to List of LBI

REMOTE: Remote TEST

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 116
Description
This function is MCB/MGCB specific.
The controller is forced into TEST mode while this input is active. This input can be used, among others, for
following purposes:
In combination with a timer module for periodic testing of the engine.
In combination with the input TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 485) for forcing the genset to start and take over
the load by one binary signal (manual switch, higher-level automation system etc.)

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 483

 LBI: S
StartButton
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 9
Description
This input is used for an external START button mounted on the switchboard. The function of the input is
identical as function of the start button on the controller front panel.
The input is enabled only if the setpoint Local buttons (page 237) is set to position EXTBUTTONS or
BOTH.

6 back to List of LBI

StopButton
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 8
Description
This input is used for an external STOP button mounted on the switchboard. The function of the input is
identical as function of the stop button on the controller front panel.
The input is enabled only if the setpoint Local buttons (page 237) is set to position EXTBUTTONS or
BOTH.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 484

 LBI: T
Test on load
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 61
Description
This binary input affects the behavior of controller in TEST mode.
Note: Before activation of this function:
-adjust ReturnTo mains (page 292) to DISABLED (MGCB application only)
-adjust MFStart enable (page 217) to YES
-switch controller to Test on load mode

Gen-set group starts and goes to load (in MGCB application, the MGCBis closed first; the gen-sets are
synchronized to the mains and close their GCBs) automatically when this input is closed even if Mains is
OK. Gen-set group stays running in parallel with mains during the soft load transfer from the mains to the
gen-set group until power import from Mains goes under 5% of Nominal power but at least for
BreakerOverlap (page 290) time. When the load is bigger than the sum of Nominal power of all loaded gen-
sets, MCB stays closed, BO WrnTstOnLdFail is closed and warning message is issued (WrnTstOnLdFail).
MCB application:
When the controller is switched from Test on load mode (and Mains is OK), it synchronizes the MCB and
switches off the SYS START /STOP (PAGE 519).
MGCB application:
When the controller is switched from Test on load mode (and Mains is OK), it synchronizes the MCB , stays
running in parallel for BreakerOverlap (page 290) time (soft load transfer), opens MGCB and switches off
the Sys start/stop (page 519). During the load transfer from the gen-set group to the mains can the
BreakerOverlap (page 290) time be shortened due to the influence of: Load ramp, MGCB open level,
MGCB open del setpoints.
Note: You may configure both inputs needed for the Test on load function on one physical binary input
(i.e. Test on load and Remote TEST). See the drawing below. Test on load is then switched on by only
one physical switch.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 485

 Time stamp act
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 125
Description
Binary input activates time stamp writing to history depending on Date/Time:Time stamp act (page 385)
and Time Stamp Per (page 385) setpoints.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 91
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #1.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 92
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #2.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 93
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #3.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 94
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #4.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 5
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 95
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #5.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 486

 Timer block 6
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 96
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #6.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 7
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 97
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #7.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 8
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 98
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #8.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 9
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 99
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #9.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 10
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 100
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #10.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 11
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 101
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #11.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 487

 Timer block 12
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 102
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #12.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 13
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 103
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #13.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 14
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 104
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #14.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 15
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 105
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #15.

6 back to List of LBI

Timer block 16
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 106
Description
This input is used to disable temporarily the output from the Timer channel #16.

6 back to List of LBI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 488

5.1.4 Logical binary outputs
Virtual and physical modules
Number of I/O can be extended and project wiring can be reduced using the following extension and virtual
modules.

Number of
Modules
Module Name BIN BOUT AIN AOUT Note
Supported by
Controller
Controllers
IM-NT(C)-BB
12 12 3 1 Controller I/O. -
controller
IM-NT controller 6 6 - - Controller I/O. -
Extension modules
IGS-PTM 8 8 4 1 Standard I/O extension module. 4
IS-AIN8 - - 8 - Standard I/O extension module. 10
I-AOUT8 - - - 8 Standard I/O extension module. 4
IS-BIN16/8 16 8 - - Standard I/O extension module. 6
15 Green, Red, Yellow LED
IGL-RA15 - 15 - - 4
panel.
Standard I/O extension module.
Inteli-AIN8 - - 8+1 - 10
One Frequency/Pulse input.
Inteli-AIN8TC - - 8 - Standard I/O extension module. 10
Inteli-IO8/8 8 8 - 2 Standard I/O extension module. 12
Inteli-IO16/0 16 - - 2 Standard I/O extension module. 6
Virtual modules
VPIO 8 8 - - Virtual periphery I/O module. 4
SHared (virtual) Binary INput
SHBIN 8 - - - 6
module
SHared (virtual) Binary OUTput
SHBOUT - 8 - - 6
module
Shared (virtual) Analog Input
SHAIN - - 4 - 2
module
Shared (virtual) Analog OUTput
SHAOUT - - - 4 2
module
Programmable (internal) logic
PLC x x x x 1
module.

Note: Maximum number of configured modules (both extension and virtual) is given by available addresses.
The numbers in the table are valid in the case that no other modules are configured.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 489

 Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs
LBO: A 492
LBO: B 494
LBO: C 495
LBO: E 497
LBO: F 498
LBO: G 499
LBO: H 499
LBO: I 500
LBO: L 501
LBO: M 502
LBO: P 511
LBO: Q 513
LBO: R 514
LBO: S 517
LBO: T 521
LBO: U 522
LBO: V 531
LBO: W 531

For full list of Logical binary outputs go to the chapter List of LBO (page 491).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 490

 List of LBO MCB UV coil 506 TimerAct 13-16 521
MCBButnEcho 506 TimerActiveCom 522
Alarm flashing 492
MGCB close/open 507 User Button 1 523
Alarm 493
MGCB OFF Coil 507 User Button 2 523
AllAvailGS run 494
MGCB ON Coil 508 User Button 3 524
Bus fail 494
MGCB status 508 User Button 4 524
Bus OK 494
MGCB UV Coil 509 User Button 5 525
Bus Params OK 494
MGCBButnEcho 510 User Button 6 525
Common Al 495
ModbusSw 1 510 User button 7 526
Common Fls 495
ModbusSw 17 510 User Button 8 526
Common Hst 495
MODES: Aut mode 510 User Button 9 527
Common Wrn 495
MODES: Man mode 511 User Button 10 527
CommonActLev 1 496
MODES: Off mode 511 User Button 11 528
CommonActLev 2 496
MODES: Test mode 511 User Button 12 528
CommonAlLev 1 496
PeakShaveAct 511 User Button 13 529
CommonAlLev 2 496
PeriphCommErr 511 User Button 14 529
CtrlHBeat FD 497
Ready for Load 514 User Button 15 530
CtrlHeartBeat 497
RemoteControl1 514 User Button 16 530
Engines swapped 497
RemoteControl2 514 Vbus <> 531
fbus <> 498
RemoteControl3 515 VectorShiftTrp 531
FltResButnEcho 498
RemoteControl4 515 Vmains <> 531
fmains <> 498
RemoteControl5 515 WrongPhSeq 531
ForwardSynchro 498
RemoteControl6 516
GSG params OK 499 6 back to Controller
RemoteControl7 516 objects
Horn flashing 499
RemoteControl8 516
Horn 499
ReverseSynchro 517
HrnResButnEcho 500
ROCOF Trp 517
In synchronism 500
Start Blocked 517
Initialized 500
StartButnEcho 518
LdShed stage 1 501
StopButnEcho 518
LdShed stage 2 501
Sys start/stop 519
LdShed stage 3 501
Syst res 1 OK 519
Logical 0 502
Syst res 2 OK 520
Logical 1 502
Syst res 3 OK 520
Mains fail 502
Syst res 4 OK 520
MainsParams OK 503
Syst res OK 520
MCB close/open 504
SystReady 520
MCB OFF coil 505
TimerAct 1-4 521
MCB ON coil 505
TimerAct 5-8 521
MCB status 505
TimerAct 9-12 521

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 491

 LBO: A
Alarm flashing
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 28
Description
This is the flashing alternative of the output ALARM (PAGE 493), i.e. the output flashes with period 1 s / 1 s
while the output ALARM (PAGE 493) is closed.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 492

 Alarm
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 2
Description
The output is closed if there is at least one unconfirmed alarm in the alarm list.
Note: Some alarm types as e.g. Off load, History record, Low power, Mains protection do not require
confirmation, they disappear from the alarm list automatically when the alarm condition disappears. That
means the Alarm output is not activated by alarms of these types.

Image 4.83 Alarm states and Behavior of Related Outputs

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 493

 AllAvailGS run
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 122
Description
The output closes if all gen-sets available to take part in PMS are running and loaded. All gen-sets having the
same logical group (Control group) as this controller has are considered + gen-sets from other logical groups
if those are currently linked with controller’s logical group (using group link function).

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: B
Bus fail
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 198
Description
The output is open if healthy bus voltage is present. It closes with a delay given by bus protections if bus
voltage or frequency gets out of the limits.
Note: For example see MAINS FAIL (PAGE 502).

6 back to List of LBO

Bus OK
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 196
Description
The output is closed if healthy bus voltage is present. It opens immediately if bus voltage or frequency gets
out of the limits.

6 back to List of LBO

Bus Params OK
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 106
Description
This output indicates that the bus is healthy. The output is closed while all bus electrical parameters are in
limits.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 494

 LBO: C
Common Al
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 11
Description
The output is closed while there is at least one alarm of the Alarm only type present in the alarm list. The
alarm can be in any state, i.e. active unconfirmed, active confirmed or inactive unconfirmed. For more
information see Protections and Alarm management on page 47.

6 back to List of LBO

Common Fls
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 6
Description
The output is closed while there is at least one alarm of the Sensor fail type present in the alarm list. The
alarm can be in any state, i.e. active unconfirmed, active confirmed or inactive unconfirmed. For more
information see Protections and Alarm management on page 47.

6 back to List of LBO

Common Hst
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 12
Description
The output is closed for 1s when any alarm of History record type appears. For more information see
Protections and Alarm management on page 47.

6 back to List of LBO

Common Wrn
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 3
Description
The output is closed while there is at least one alarm of the Warning type present in the alarm list. The alarm
can be in any state, i.e. active unconfirmed, active confirmed or inactive unconfirmed. For more information
see Protections and Alarm management on page 47.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 495

 CommonActLev 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 13
Description
The output is closed while there is at least one 1st level (yellow) alarm present in the alarm list. The alarm
can be in any state, i.e. active unconfirmed, active confirmed or inactive unconfirmed. For more information
see Protections and Alarm management on page 47.

6 back to List of LBO

CommonActLev 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 15
Description
The output is closed while there is at least one 2nd level (red) alarm present in the alarm list. The alarm can
be in any state, i.e. active unconfirmed, active confirmed or inactive unconfirmed. For more information see
Protections and Alarm management on page 47.

6 back to List of LBO

CommonAlLev 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 14
Description
This output is active if there is at least one unconfirmed 1st level (yellow) alarm present in the alarm list. For
more information see Protections and Alarm management on page 47.

6 back to List of LBO

CommonAlLev 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 16
Description
This output is active if there is at least one unconfirmed 2nd level (red) alarm present in the alarm list. For
more information see Protections and Alarm management on page 47.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 496

 CtrlHBeat FD
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 125
Description
This output is used at a redundant controller to disconnect the main controller, connect the redundant one
instead and activate it.
The output is closed:
If the input CTRL HBEAT SENS (PAGE 452) sens is configured onto any input terminal and the
redundancy controller does not sense the "heart beat" signal from the main controller at that terminal.
If the redundant controller has not received two consequent messages from the main controller. The
address of the main controller for the particular redundant one is selected by the setpoint
WatchedContr (page 224).

6 back to List of LBO

CtrlHeartBeat
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 81
Description
The output provides alternating signal with rate 500 ms active / 500 ms inactive while the controller is
operational, i.e. it has passed all checks after startup and no failure was detected.
If the output does not provide the alternating signal it may indicate following:
Controller is switched off or
Controller is damaged or
Incorrect / missing firmware and/or application or
Corrupted setpoints
The output is intended for using in wired redundancy systems at the main controller.

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: E
Engines swapped
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 208
Description
This output is activated by the master controller for 100 ms pulse when the priority of two gen-sets was
swapped by the Running hours equalization function.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 497

 LBO: F
fbus <>
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 194
Description
The output is closed while the bus over/under frequency alarm is present in the alarm list.

6 back to List of LBO

FltResButnEcho
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 30
Description
This output provides 1 s pulse when:
Fault reset button is pressed on the controller front panel or
Fault reset button is pressed on any of external local / remote terminals or
Fault reset command is received via communication line or
The input FAULT RESBUTTON (PAGE 457) is activated.

6 back to List of LBO

fmains <>
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 193
Description
The output is closed while the mains over/under frequency alarm is present in the alarm list.

6 back to List of LBO

ForwardSynchro
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB
Comm object 68
Description
MGCB application only
The output is closed during forward synchronizing and opens when the output MGCB status is activated (=
MGCB was closed).
Note: The output can be used for control of an external synchronizing module.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 498

 LBO: G
GSG params OK
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 191
Description
The output is closed if bus electric values are in limits and there is a sufficient number of loaded gen-sets
that do not have 2nd level alarm active (this output is closed regardless of 1st level alarms on gen-sets).

6 back to List of LBO

GenCapClim
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Output is activated in case there is required Q or PF out of the adjusted capacitive part of capability
curve.

6 back to List of LBO

GenCapLlim
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Output is activated in case there is required Q or PF out of the adjusted inductive part of capability curve.

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: H
Horn flashing
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 29
Description
This is the flashing alternative of the output HORN (PAGE 499), i.e. the output flashes with period 1 s / 1 s
while the output HORN (PAGE 499) is closed.

6 back to List of LBO

Horn
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1
Description
The output closes together with the output ALARM (PAGE 493). It opens when the output ALARM (PAGE 493)
is opened or Horn reset button is pressed or Horn Timeout (page 261) has elapsed.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 499

 HrnResButnEcho
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 31
Description
This output provides 1 s pulse when:
Horn reset button is pressed on the controller front panel or
Horn reset button is pressed on any of external local / remote terminals or
Horn reset command is received via communication line or
The input HORNRESBUTTON (PAGE 465) is activated.

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: I
In synchronism
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 80
Description
This output is closed during synchronization when all synchro conditions have been fulfilled. The output is
opened either when:
the synchro conditions are lost or
the corresponding breaker has been closed or
the sychronizing was interrupted or timed out.
Synchro conditions are following:
Slip frequency is lower than 0.25 Hz
Phase shift between mains and bus (BusLeft and BusRight – in BTB application) voltage must be
within range of ±Phase window (page 317) for period longer than Dwell time (page 318).
Voltage difference between mains and bus (BusLeft and BusRight – in BTB application) voltage (in all
phases) must be lower or equal to Voltage window (page 316) for period longer than Dwell time
(page 318).
The output is intended for manual synchronization. Automatic closing of MCB / MGCB must be disabled for
this case. Use the input MGCB DISABLE (PAGE 478) or MCB DISABLE (PAGE 476).

6 back to List of LBO

Initialized
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1222
Description
This LBO indicates that the controller finished the reboot after the restart. It can be used in internal PLC for
blocking some binary inputs to avoid the hazards after restart of the controller.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 500

 LBO: L
LdShed stage 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 51
Description
This output is used for control of first load group. This is the group which is disconnected as first one when
the load shedding function becomes active. Connect least important loads to this group.

6 back to List of LBO

LdShed stage 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 52
Description
This output is used for control of second load group. This group is disconnected as second one when the first
group is already disconnected and the condition for disconnecting of next group is still fulfilled.

6 back to List of LBO

LdShed stage 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 53
Description
This output is used for control of third load group. This group is disconnected as last one when the first two
groups are already disconnected and the condition for disconnecting of next group is still fulfilled.

6 back to List of LBO

Load reduct ON
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Output is activated in case the LBI: Load reduct 1-4 together with LBI: Load reduction or LAI: Load
reduction together with LBI: Load reduction is configured and active.

6 back to List of LBO

Event - LoadReduct
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event - LoadReduct means situation when the load is reduced due to activation of LBI Load Reduct 1-4
or LAI:LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 537).

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 501

 Logical 0
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 26
Description
This output is always opened. It may be used in functions (e.g. ECU outputs or PLC modules inputs) where
a binary value is required, however it has to be continuously inactive.

6 back to List of LBO

Logical 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 27
Description
This output is always closed. It may be used in functions (e.g. ECU outputs or PLC modules inputs) where
continuously active binary value is required.

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: M
Mains fail
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 197
Description
The output is open if healthy mains voltage is present and stays open if mains protection configured on
binary input is active regardless of MCB status. It closes with a delay given by mains protections if mains
voltage or frequency gets out of the limits.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 502

 MainsAllowsSyn
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Logical binary output is activated when is synchronization to the mains allowed. This means the output is
activated when is the time MP SyncTLong (page 350) counted down. Output is deactivated when
mains fail occurs.

6 back to List of LBO

Event - MainsFrqFall
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active when the mains frequency has falling tendency in ranges 52,5Hz → 50,2Hz and from 49,8 →
47,5Hz.

6 back to List of LBO

Event - MainsFrqRise
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active when the mains frequency is increasing in ranges 50,2 → 52,5Hz and from 47,5 → 49,8Hz.

6 back to List of LBO

MainsParams OK
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 105
Description
This output indicates that the mains is healthy. The output is closed while all mains electrical parameters are
in limits. If MCB is closed, the output deactivates after the the delay for fixed voltage or frequency
protections elapses. If MCB is opened, the output deactivates immediately after electrical parameters get
out of limit (e.g. frequency, voltage, voltage unbalance etc.).

6 back to List of LBO

Event - MainsTripPer
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Active within period of time MainsTripPerT (page 350) after Mains Trip due Mains Protectio.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 503

 MCB close/open
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB
Comm object 103
Description
This output is intended for control of the MCB if a contactor is used as MCB. The output provides continuous
signal while the MCB has to be closed. See timing diagram of all available breaker control outputs at the
bottom of this description.
Note: Use invert function when configuring the output in GenConfig to obtain inverted function of the
output, i.e. output is closed while the MCB has to be open.

There are also other outputs availabe for MCB control:

MCB ON COIL (PAGE 505)
MCB OFF COIL (PAGE 505)
MCB UV COIL (PAGE 506)

Image 4.84 Timing of Breaker Control Outputs

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 504

 MCB OFF coil
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 47
Description
This output is intended for opening of the MCB using OFF coil if a circuit breaker is used as MCB. The output
provides 2 sec pulse when the MCB has to open. If synchronizing is disabled with the particular breaker, the
pulse length is extended to 5sec. See timing diagram of all available breaker control outputs in the
description of the MGCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 507) output.
There are also other outputs availabe for MCB control:
MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 504)
MCB ON COIL (PAGE 505)
MCB UV COIL (PAGE 506)

6 back to List of LBO

MCB ON coil
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 46
Description
This output is intended for closing of the MCB using ON coil if a circuit breaker is used as MCB. The output
provides 2 sec pulse when the MCB has to close. If synchronizing is disabled with the particular breaker, the
pulse length is extended to 5sec. See timing diagram of all available breaker control outputs in the
description of the MGCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 507) output.
There are also other outputs availabe for MCB control:
MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 504)
MCB OFF COIL (PAGE 505)
MCB UV COIL (PAGE 506)

6 back to List of LBO

MCB status
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 85
Description
This output indicates the MCB position, how it is internally considered in the controller. The position is based
on MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 477) input and optionally also on the MCB FDB NEG (PAGE 476) input.
If only the positive feedback input is used the output mirrors the feedback.
If both feedbacks are used and they match each other the output indicates the MCB position
according to the feedbacks.
If both feedbacks are used, however they do not match each other, the output remains in previous
position when they matched.
The output can be used for indication of the MCB position.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 505

 MCB UV coil
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 48
Description
This output is intended for opening of the MCB using an undervoltage coil if a circuit breaker is used as MCB.
The output is closed while mains values are within limits. MCB closing command is blocked for 1 sec
after the UV coil has been closed to allow the breaker mechanical system getting ready for closing.
The output is opened for 2 sec when the MCB has to open. If synchronizing is disabled with the
particular breaker, the length of the inverse pulse is extended to 5sec.

Image 4.85 MCB UV coil Output Timing

There are also other outputs availabe for GCB control:

MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 504)
MCB ON COIL (PAGE 505)
MCB OFF COIL (PAGE 505)

6 back to List of LBO

MCBButnEcho
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 34
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
MCB button is pressed on the controller front panel or
MCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
MCB close/open command is received via communication line or
The input MCBBUTTON (PAGE 477) is activated.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 506

 MGCB close/open
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB
Comm object 807
Description
MGCB application only
This output is intended for control of the MGCB if a contactor is used as MGCB. The output provides
continuous signal while the MGCB has to be closed. See timing diagram of all available breaker control
outputs in the description of the MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 504) output.
Note: Use invert function when configuring the output in GenConfig to obtain inverted function of the
output, i.e. output is closed while the MGCB has to be open.

There are also other outputs availabe for MGCB control:

MGCB ON COIL (PAGE 508)
MGCB OFF COIL (PAGE 507)
MGCB UV COIL (PAGE 509)

6 back to List of LBO

MGCB OFF Coil

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 43
Description
This output is intended for opening of the MGCB using OFF coil if a circuit breaker is used as MGCB. The
output provides 2 sec pulse when the MGCB has to open. If synchronizing is disabled with the particular
breaker, the pulse length is extended to 5sec. See timing diagram of all available breaker control outputs in
the description of the MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 504) output.
There are also other outputs availabe for MGCB control:
MGCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 507)
MGCB ON COIL (PAGE 508)
MGCB UV COIL (PAGE 509)

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 507

 MGCB ON Coil
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB
Comm object 42
Description
This output is intended for closing of the MGCB using ON coil if a circuit breaker is used as MGCB. The
output provides 2 sec pulse when the MGCB has to close. If synchronizing is disabled with the particular
breaker, the pulse length is extended to 5sec. See timing diagram of all available breaker control outputs in
the description of the MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 504) output.
There are also other outputs availabe for MGCB control:
MGCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 507)
MGCB OFF COIL (PAGE 507)
MGCB UV COIL (PAGE 509)

6 back to List of LBO

MGCB status
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 84
Description
This output indicates the MGCB position, how it is internally considered in the controller. The position is
based on MGCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 478) input and optionally also on the MGCB FDB NEG (PAGE 478) input.
If only the positive feedback input is used the output mirrors the feedback.
If both feedbacks are used and they match each other the output indicates the MGCB position
according to the feedbacks.
If both feedbacks are used, however they do not match each other, the output remains in previous
position when they matched.
The output can be used for indication of the MGCB position.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 508

 MGCB UV Coil
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 44
Description
This output is intended for opening of the MGCB using an undervoltage coil if a circuit breaker is used as
MGCB.
The output is closed while bus values are within limits. MGCB closing command is blocked for 1 sec
after the UV coil has been closed to allow the breaker mechanical system getting ready for closing.
The output is opened for 2 sec when the MGCB has to open. If synchronizing is disabled with the
particular breaker, the length of the inverse pulse is extended to 5sec.

Image 4.86 MGCB UV coil Output Timing

There are also other outputs availabe for GCB control:

MGCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 507)
MGCB ON COIL (PAGE 508)
MGCB OFF COIL (PAGE 507)

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 509

 MGCBButnEcho
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 35
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
MGCB button is pressed on the controller front panel or
MGCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
MGCB close/open command is received via communication line or
The input MGCBButton is activated.

6 back to List of LBO

ModbusSw 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1108
Description
This logical binary output gets activated when the corresponding bit is written to the Modbus register number
46337. The mirror of the written value can be also seen in the value ModbusSw1 (page 437).
Example: If value 255 is written in the Modbus register number 46337, first eight ModbusSw logical
binary outputs get activated.

6 back to List of LBO

ModbusSw 17
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1124
Description
This logical binary output gets activated when the corresponding bit is written to the Modbus register number
46338. The mirror of the written value can be also seen in the value ModbusSw2 (page 437).
Note: If value 255 is written in the Modbus register number 46338, first eight ModbusSw logical binary
outputs get activated.

6 back to List of LBO

MODES: Aut mode

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCBBTB
Comm object 19
Description
The output is closed while the controller is currently in AUT mode (either switched by the mode selector on
the front panel or by the input REMOTE: REMOTE AUT (PAGE 482)).

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 510

 MODES: Man mode
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 18
Description
The output is closed while the controller is currently in MAN mode (either switched by the mode selector on
the front panel or by the input REMOTE: REMOTE MAN (PAGE 483)).

6 back to List of LBO

MODES: Off mode

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 17
Description
The output is closed while the controller is currently in OFF mode (either switched by the mode selector on
the front panel or by the input REMOTE: REMOTE OFF (PAGE 483)).

6 back to List of LBO

MODES: Test mode

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 20
Description
The output is closed while the controller is currently in TEST mode (either switched by the mode selector on
the front panel or by the input REMOTE: REMOTE TEST (PAGE 483)).

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: P
PeakShaveAct
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 828
Description
Binary output is active when the gen-set is running (in SPtM application) or gen-set group is activated by
InteliMains-NT due to Peak Shaving or Peak kVA Shaving (dependence on parameters PeakLevelStart
(page 208), PeakLevelStop (page 209),PeakAutS/S del (page 209), Peak kVA Start (page 210), Peak
kVA Stop (page 210), PeakKVAS/S del (page 211) in ProcessControl group).

6 back to List of LBO

PeriphCommErr
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 118
Description
The output is closed while there is an error in the communication with any peripheral unit (e.g. IS-AIN8, IGS-
PTM, ...).

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 511

 Event - PforQ
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Description
Event - PforQ means situation when PforQ function is active.PforQlimit (page 346) is set to ENABLED
and there are fulfilled conditions to reduce the P to reach the required Q. LBO is active during reduction of
the power.

6 back to List of LBO

PforQActive
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Outputs gets active when the gen-set active power is reduced in order to achieve reactive power. The
output becomes inactive when the active power is not more reduced..

6 back to List of LBO

PQ-C AreaLim
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Logical binary output defines when is the required Q inside or outside the capacitive part of PQ area
defined by PQ-C curve. LBO is active when the required Q is outside the PQ area. PQ area is one of the
conditions for activation of PforQ function in case the actual active power is lower than InstalPower. In
case the PQ area is not used as condition for PforQ function output stays deactivated.

6 back to List of LBO

PQ-L AreaLim
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Logical binary output defines when is the required Q inside or outside the inductive part of PQ area
defined by PQ-L curve. LBO is active when the required Q is outside the PQ area. PQ area is one of the
conditions for activation of PforQ function in case the actual active power is lower than InstalPower. In
case the PQ area is not used as condition for PforQ function output stays deactivated.

6 back to List of LBO

Event - PostVRT
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Event - PostVRT means situation after VRT (voltage right through). In case the Umains is 5s out of range
10% from Umains nominal there is very usual that the current is higher then Nominal current. The active
power has to be reduced till the actual current is equal to Nominal current.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 512

 PwrOverFreqLim
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Output is active when the power starts to be limited due to PWROVRFREQ function and stays active all
the time while the frequency is in over frequency and until the power is back on the Pm value.

6 back to List of LBO

PwrOverFrInval
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Output is active when frequency is above defined interval value of sensor PWROVRFREQ

6 back to List of LBO

PwrUnderFreq
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Output is active when the power starts to be forced to increase the actual (reduced) power due to
PWRUNDRFREQ function and stays active all the time while the frequency is in under frequency
(<49,8).

6 back to List of LBO

PwrUnderFrInval
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Output is active when the power starts to be forced to increase the actual (reduced) power due to
PWRUNDRFREQ function and stays active all the time while the frequency is in under frequency
(<49,8).

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: Q
Q&U Protection
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Output gets active when the Q&U protection is evaluated.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 513

 LBO: R
Ready for Load
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB
Comm object 58
Description
IMPORTANT: MGCB application only!

The output closes when the gen-set group is running (Sys start/stop is active) and output SystReady is
active (i.e. sufficient number of gen-sets in Power management is available).
The MGCB may be already closed or is available to closing.

6 back to List of LBO

RemoteControl1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 141
Description
This is a general purpose output, which can be closed and opened remotely, e.g. from InteliMonitor using the
"Remote switches" tool or via Modbus using the register #46361 and command #26.
Note: See the Remote switches chapter in the InteliMonitor help for details about how to control the
output from InteliMonitor and the Modbus chapter in the latest communication guide for information about
control the output using Modbus.

6 back to List of LBO

RemoteControl2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object lbo_142
Description
This is a general purpose output, which can be closed and opened remotely, e.g. from InteliMonitor using the
"Remote switches" tool or via Modbus using the register #46361 and command #26.
Note: See the Remote switches chapter in the InteliMonitor help for details about how to control the
output from InteliMonitor and the Modbus chapter in the latest communication guide for information about
control the output using Modbus.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 514

 RemoteControl3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 143
Description
This is a general purpose output, which can be closed and opened remotely, e.g. from InteliMonitor using the
"Remote switches" tool or via Modbus using the register #46361 and command #26.
Note: See the Remote switches chapter in the InteliMonitor help for details about how to control the
output from InteliMonitor and the Modbus chapter in the latest communication guide for information about
control the output using Modbus.

6 back to List of LBO

RemoteControl4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 144
Description
This is a general purpose output, which can be closed and opened remotely, e.g. from InteliMonitor using the
"Remote switches" tool or via Modbus using the register #46361 and command #26.
Note: See the Remote switches chapter in the InteliMonitor help for details about how to control the
output from InteliMonitor and the Modbus chapter in the latest communication guide for information about
control the output using Modbus.

6 back to List of LBO

RemoteControl5
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 145
Description
This is a general purpose output, which can be closed and opened remotely, e.g. from InteliMonitor using the
"Remote switches" tool or via Modbus using the register #46361 and command #26.
Note: See the Remote switches chapter in the InteliMonitor help for details about how to control the
output from InteliMonitor and the Modbus chapter in the latest communication guide for information about
control the output using Modbus.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 515

 RemoteControl6
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 146
Description
This is a general purpose output, which can be closed and opened remotely, e.g. from InteliMonitor using the
"Remote switches" tool or via Modbus using the register #46361 and command #26.
Note: See the Remote switches chapter in the InteliMonitor help for details about how to control the
output from InteliMonitor and the Modbus chapter in the latest communication guide for information about
control the output using Modbus.

6 back to List of LBO

RemoteControl7
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 147
Description
This is a general purpose output, which can be closed and opened remotely, e.g. from InteliMonitor using the
"Remote switches" tool or via Modbus using the register #46361 and command #26.
Note: See the Remote switches chapter in the InteliMonitor help for details about how to control the
output from InteliMonitor and the Modbus chapter in the latest communication guide for information about
control the output using Modbus.

6 back to List of LBO

RemoteControl8
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 148
Description
This is a general purpose output, which can be closed and opened remotely, e.g. from InteliMonitor using the
"Remote switches" tool or via Modbus using the register #46361 and command #26.
Note: See the Remote switches chapter in the InteliMonitor help for details about how to control the
output from InteliMonitor and the Modbus chapter in the latest communication guide for information about
control the output using Modbus.

6 back to List of LBO

Event - RetOvUnFreq
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Event - RetOvUnFreq is active for a fixed time 600s in following situations:
when Mains Frequency goes from Underfrequency and across >49,8Hz
when Mains Frequency goes from Overfrequency and across <50,2Hz
This means the LBO will be active during the ramping of the power.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 516

 ReverseSynchro
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 69
Description
The output is closed during reverse synchronizing (synchronizing of loaded gen-set group back to the mains)
and opens when the output MCB STATUS (PAGE 505) is activated (= MCB was closed).
Note: The output can be used for external synchronizing module control.

6 back to List of LBO

ROCOF Act
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
The output closes if the Vector shift protection gets active. It stays closed for 3s, then opens again. This
output is activated even if the selected breaker is actually not tripped.
Note: See also the output ROCOF TRP (PAGE 517).

6 back to List of LBO

ROCOF Trp
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 1006
Description
The output closes if the ROCOF protection gets active. The output stays closed for 3s, then opens again.

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: S
Start Blocked
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1226
Description
Activation of this logical binary output indicates that the start of the engine is blocked. This can be caused by
conditions given by setpoints in ProcessControl group (Island enable, ParalEnable, Synchro enable,
MFStart enable, MGCBparalClose - where applicable).
Example: The start of the gen-set is blocked when Mains is not OK and Island enable is set to NO.
Therefore this output is activated and letting you know that the gen-set will not start because the
island operation is not allowed.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 517

 StartButnEcho
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 33
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Start button is pressed on the controller front panel or
Start button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Start command is received via communication line or
The input START BUTTON (PAGE 484) is activated.

6 back to List of LBO

StopButnEcho
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 32
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Stop button is pressed on the controller front panel or
Stop button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Stop command is received via communication line or
The input STOPBUTTON (PAGE 484) is activated.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 518

 Sys start/stop
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 190
Description
The output serves for easy interfacing with gen-set IG/IS-NT controllers. It can be directly connected to their
Sys start/stop inputs which serve to control a group of gen-sets.
Sys start/stop output is closed if:
If binary input Rem start/stop gets active (AUT mode only).
If binary input TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 485) gets active (TEST mode only).
If AMF condition is sensed in IM-NT and the gen-set group should be started as stand-by power
source (AUT mode only).
If PeakShaving function senses that it is suitable to start the gen-set group in order to lower the mains
import (AUT mode only).
If Start button is pressed on IM-NT front panel or remotely (MAN mode only). The signal can be
deactivated by pressing the Stop button. If the controller is switched from AUT to MAN mode, the
internal status of the flip-flop circuit created by Start-Stop buttons is set to follow the previous state in
AUT mode. E.g. if the gen-set group has run in an AMF situation in AUT mode, switching to MAN will
not stop it (= Sys start/stop output stays active).
Sys start/stop output is opened if:
If binary inpu Rem start/stop gets inactive (AUT mode only).
If binary input TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 485) gets inactive (TEST mode only).
If mains is recovered and after MCB is clossed (synchro enable). If Synchro enable = none than Sys
start/stop signal gets inactive after mains is recovered.
If required power is under PeakLevelStop (page 209) during PeakAutS/S del (page 209) Sys
start/stop gets inactive.
If STOP button is pressed on IM-NT front panel or remotely (MAN mode only). Sys start/stop button
stayed in the previous state despite of mode changing.
Note: For MGCB application - in first and third case (output closing - first paragraph), before the output
Sys start/stop is activated, the MGCB close command is issued. This makes it easier to bring the gen-
sets to the mainsparallel operation. If MGCB should stay open until all required gen-sets are
synchronized on the generator bus (without load), adjust the setpoint MGCBparalClose (page 220) to
NO.

6 back to List of LBO

Syst res 1 OK
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 88
Description
The output is closed while the actual reserve is above the reserve for start from the reserve set #1.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 519

 Syst res 2 OK
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 89
Description
The output is closed while the actual reserve is above the reserve for start from the reserve set #2.

6 back to List of LBO

Syst res 3 OK
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 90
Description
The output is closed while the actual reserve is above the reserve for start from the reserve set #3.

6 back to List of LBO

Syst res 4 OK
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 91
Description
The output is closed while the actual reserve is above the reserve for start from the reserve set #4.

6 back to List of LBO

Syst res OK
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 87
Description
The output is closed while the actual reserve is above the selected reserve for start.

6 back to List of LBO

SystReady
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 86
Description
The output is closed while the group of gen-sets has enough capacity to fulfill the requested power reserve. If
this output is not closed it means the system has not enough capacity to fulfill the reserve even if all the gen-
sets will run.
Note: Fulfilled reserve means the actual reserve is above the requested reserve for start.

Note: This output do not indicate the requested reserve has been already fulfilled. It only indicates
whether the system is able to fulfill it or not.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 520

 Event - SoftUnload
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Event - SoftUnload means situation when the standard soft unload mode is active.

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: T
TimerAct 1-4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 117
Description
This is combined output from timer channels 1-4. The output is closed if at least one of the channels is
active.

6 back to List of LBO

TimerAct 5-8
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 118
Description
This is combined output from timer channels 5-8. The output is closed if at least one of the channels is
active.

6 back to List of LBO

TimerAct 9-12
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 119
Description
This is combined output from timer channels 9-12. The output is closed if at least one of the channels is
active.

6 back to List of LBO

TimerAct 13-16
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 120
Description
This is combined output from timer channels 13-16. The output is closed if at least one of the channels is
active.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 521

 TimerActiveCom
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 121
Description
This is combined output from all timer channels. The output is active if at least one timer channel is active.

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: U
UQ-C AreaLim
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Logical binary output defines when is the required Q inside or outside the capacitive part of UQ area
defined by UQ-L curve. LBO is active when the required Q is outside the UQ area. UQ area is one of the
conditions for activation of PforQ function in case the actual active power is at the level of InstalPower.
In case the UQ area is not used as condition for PforQ function output stays deactivated.

6 back to List of LBO

UQ-L AreaLim
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Logical binary output defines when is the required Q inside or outside the inductive part of UQ area
defined by UQ-L curve. LBO is active when the required Q is outside the UQ area. UQ area is one of the
conditions for activation of PforQ function in case the actual active power is at the level of InstalPower.
In case the UQ area is not used as condition for PforQ function output stays deactivated.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 522

 User Button 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 726
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

User Button 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 727
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its
state depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16
are locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 523

 User Button 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 728
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

User Button 4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 729
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 524

 User Button 5
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 730
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

User Button 6
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 751
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 525

 User button 7
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 752
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

User Button 8
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1087
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 526

 User Button 9
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1088
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

User Button 10
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1089
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 527

 User Button 11
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1090
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

User Button 12
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1091
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 528

 User Button 13
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1092
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

User Button 14
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1093
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 529

 User Button 15
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1094
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

User Button 16
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 1095
Description
This output can be specified for example on buttons on IV-5/8 or in SCADA diagram in InteliMonitor. Its state
depends on function assigned to the related button.
It is possible to lock UserButton commands in configuration to specific user level. Buttons 1-8 and 9-16 are
locked separately.

Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to closed.
ON
When the output is closed and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened.
OFF
When the output is opened and the button is pressed state is not changed.
Pressing the button changes the state of log. binary output User Button X to opened or
ON/OFF
closed depending on previous state (it is changed to the opposite state).
Pressing the button issues log. binary output User Button X to close for time given by
setpoint UserBtn pulse (page 241).
Pulse ON
Note: Repeated pressing of button during the closed period causes issuing another
pulse to be generated from the moment of button pushing.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 530

 LBO: V
Vbus <>
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 192
Description
The output is closed while the bus over/under voltage alarm is present in the alarm list.

6 back to List of LBO

VectorShiftTrp
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 92
Description
The output closes if the Vector shift protection gets active. The output stays closed for 3s, then opens again.

6 back to List of LBO

Vmains <>
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 96
Description
The output is closed while the mains over/under voltage alarm is present in the alarm list.
The output is closed while the mains or bus over/under voltage alarm is present in the alarm list.

6 back to List of LBO

VRT Prot Trip

Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
The output closes if the VRT protection gets active and the controller trips the selected breaker. The
output stays closed for 3 s, then opens again.

6 back to List of LBO

LBO: W
WrongPhSeq
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 719
Description
Binary output WrongPhSeq is active when at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: Mains / Bus
phase is inverted or wrong mains / bus phase sequence or opposed mains / bus phase sequence is
detected.

6 back to List of LBO

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 531

5.1.5 Logical analog inputs
Virtual and physical modules
Number of I/O can be extended and project wiring can be reduced using the following extension and virtual
modules.

Number of
Modules
Module Name BIN BOUT AIN AOUT Note
Supported by
Controller
Controllers
IM-NT(C)-
12 12 3 1 Controller I/O. -
BB controller
IM-NT controller 6 6 - - Controller I/O. -
Extension modules
IGS-PTM 8 8 4 1 Standard I/O extension module. 4
IS-AIN8 - - 8 - Standard I/O extension module. 10
I-AOUT8 - - - 8 Standard I/O extension module. 4
IS-BIN16/8 16 8 - - Standard I/O extension module. 6
IGL-RA15 - 15 - - 15 Green, Red, Yellow LED panel. 4
Standard I/O extension module.
Inteli-AIN8 - - 8+1 - 10
One Frequency/Pulse input.
Inteli-AIN8TC - - 8 - Standard I/O extension module. 10
Inteli-IO8/8 8 8 - 2 Standard I/O extension module. 12
Inteli-IO16/0 16 - - 2 Standard I/O extension module. 6
Virtual modules
VPIO 8 8 - - Virtual periphery I/O module. 4
SHared (virtual) Binary INput
SHBIN 8 - - - 6
module.
SHared (virtual) Binary OUTput
SHBOUT - 8 - - 6
module.
Shared (virtual) Analog Input
SHAIN - - 4 - 2
module.
Shared (virtual) Analog
SHAOUT - - - 4 2
OUTput.module.
Programmable (internal) logic
PLC x x x x 1
module.

Note: Maximum number of configured modules (both extension and virtual) is given by available addresses.
The numbers in the table are valid in the case that no other modules are configured.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 532

 Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs
LAI: A 534
LAI: C 536
LAI: L 537
LAI: M 537
LAI: P 539
LAI: T 540

For full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter List of LAI (page 534).

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 533

 List of LAI 6 back to List of LAI AnExQref/Pnom
AnExMQI/E 534 AnExQ0I/EUmRe MC
Rela 3. Related
B,
AnExQ0I/EUmRe 534 MC ted 8. applica
Rela 3. Related MG
AnExQ0UmRef 534 B, FW 0 tions
ted 8. applica CB
AnExQref/Pnom 534 MG
FW 0 tions Description
CB
AnExQrfI/EPnom 534
Description This functional input is
AnExSysBaseQ 535 used for requesting the
This functional input is
Cold temp 1 536 Qref/Pnom externally
used for requesting the
Cold temp 2 536 by an analog input. The
Q0UmRef externally by
setpoint PF/Qctrl PtM
Cold temp 3 536 an analog input when
(page 205) must be set
Cold temp 4 537 the import export of Q
to Qref/Ulim, PF/Qctrl
LCD brightness 537 is required. The
ANEXT (page 206)
setpoint PF/Qctrl PtM
MLC:AnExSysBld 538 must be set to
(page 205) must be set
MLC:AnExI/E 538 ENABLED.
to Q(Um), PF/Qctrl
MLC:I/E-Pm 538 ANEXT (page 206) 6 back to List of LAI
MLC:TByPwr 538 must be set to
AnExQrfI/EPnom
MPF:AnExI/E 539 ENABLED, PF/Qctrl
IM/EX (page 206) MC
MPF:I/E-Qm 539 Rela 3. Related
must be set to B,
ted 8. applica
ENABLED. MG
6 back to Controller FW 0 tions
objects CB
6 back to List of LAI
Description
LAI: A AnExQ0UmRef This functional input is
MC used for requesting the
AnExMQI/E Rela 3. Related
B, Qref/Pnom externally
ted 8. applica
MC MG by an analog input
Rela 3. Related FW 0 tions
B, CB when the import export
ted 8. applica
MG of Q is required. The
FW 0 tions Description
CB setpoint PF/Qctrl PtM
This functional input is
Description (page 205) must be set
used for requesting the
This functional input is to Qref/Ulim, PF/Qctrl
Q0UmRef externally by
used for requesting the ANEXT (page 206)
an analog input. The
mains reactive power must be set to
setpoint PF/Qctrl PtM
externally by an analog ENABLED, PF/Qctrl
(page 205) must be set
input. The setpoint IM/EX (page 206)
to Q(Um), PF/Qctrl
PF/Qctrl PtM (page must be set to
ANEXT (page 206)
205) must be set to Q ENABLED.
must be set to
control, PF/Qctrl ENABLED. 6 back to List of LAI
ANEXT (page 206)
6 back to List of LAI
must be set to
ENABLED, PF/Qctrl
IM/EX (page 206)
must be set to
ENABLED.

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 534

 AnExSysBaseQ
MC
Rela 3. Related
B,
ted 8. applica
MG
FW 0 tions
CB
Description
This functional input is
used for requesting the
gen-set base Q
externally by an analog
input. The setpoint
PF/Qctrl PtM (page
205) must be set to Q
control, PF/Qctrl
ANEXT (page 206)
must be set to
ENABLED.

6 back to List of LAI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 535

 LAI: C
Cold temp 1
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 56
Description
If there is an additional terminal board between a thermocouple and the IS-AIN8 module and there is a
significant temperature difference between this terminal board and the module, it is necessary to measure
the temperature at this terminal board and use this temperature for the thermocouple compensation instead
of the internal temperature of the module.
This analog input is intended for measurement of this thermocouple compensation temperature for the IS-
AIN8 module with index #1.
Note: Thermocouples without internal compensation "Thermo(nc)..." must be used for this case.

6 back to List of LAI

Cold temp 2
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 57
Description
If there is an additional terminal board between a thermocouple and the IS-AIN8 module and there is a
significant temperature difference between this terminal board and the module, it is necessary to measure
the temperature at this terminal board and use this temperature for the thermocouple compensation instead
of the internal temperature of the module.
This analog input is intended for measurement of this thermocouple compensation temperature for the IS-
AIN8 module with index #2.
Note: Thermocouples without internal compensation "Thermo(nc)..." must be used for this case.

6 back to List of LAI

Cold temp 3
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 58
Description
If there is an additional terminal board between a thermocouple and the IS-AIN8 module and there is a
significant temperature difference between this terminal board and the module, it is necessary to measure
the temperature at this terminal board and use this temperature for the thermocouple compensation instead
of the internal temperature of the module.
This analog input is intended for measurement of this thermocouple compensation temperature for the IS-
AIN8 module with index #3.
Note: Thermocouples without internal compensation "Thermo(nc)..." must be used for this case.

6 back to List of LAI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 536

 Cold temp 4
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 59
Description
If there is an additional terminal board between a thermocouple and the IS-AIN8 module and there is a
significant temperature difference between this terminal board and the module, it is necessary to measure
the temperature at this terminal board and use this temperature for the thermocouple compensation instead
of the internal temperature of the module.
This analog input is intended for measurement of this thermocouple compensation temperature for the IS-
AIN8 module with index #4.
Note: Thermocouples without internal compensation "Thermo(nc)..." must be used for this case.

6 back to List of LAI

LAI: L
LCD brightness
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB, BTB
Comm object 7
Description
This functional input is used to adjust the backlight intensity of the IG-NT built-in terminal (display) by an
analog input (e.g. a potentiometer). If this input is configured to a physical analog input or other value, the
brightness adjusted by buttons at the terminal is overridden by this analog input.

6 back to List of LAI

Load reduction
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This functional input is used for load reduction via analog input. If there is also configured LBI: Load
reduct 1-4, the lower requested value is required.
Simultaneously must be activated LBI:LOAD REDUCTION (PAGE 476)

6 back to List of LBI

LAI: M
MainsMidVolt
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This functional input is used for measuring of medium voltage. Nominal medium voltage is defined by the
setpoint and by dedicated voltage ratio defined by . When is this LAI configured, this value is taken as the
reference Mains voltage for Q(Um) or Qref/Ulim regulation activated by switching the PF/Qctrl PtM
(page 205) to Q(Um) or Qref/Ulim.

6 back to List of LAI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 537

 MLC:AnExSysBld
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 14
Description
This input is used for external determination of system load.

6 back to List of LAI

MLC:AnExI/E
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 2
Description
This functional input is used for requesting the mains import value externally by an analog input. The setpoint
MLoad ctrl PtM (page 201) must be set to ANEXT IM/EX position.

6 back to List of LAI

MLC:I/E-Pm
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 5
Description
This functional input is used for connecting of an external device, which measures the active power imported
from the mains. The device is connected to the controller via an analog input (e.g. -20 .. 20mA). The setpoint
I/E-Pm meas (page 207) must be set to the ANALOG INPUT position for this case.

6 back to List of LAI

MLC:TByPwr
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 13
Description
This functional input is used as the temperature input into the load control loop if the loop is switched into "T
BY PWR" position. More information is available at the setpoint MLoad ctrl PtM (page 201).

6 back to List of LAI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 538

 MPF:AnExI/E
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 4
Description
This functional input is used for requesting the mains cos phi factor externally by an analog input. The
setpoint PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) must be set to PF control, PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) must be set to
ENABLED, PF/Qctrl IM/EX (page 206) must be set to ENABLED.
The analog value is transformed to the requested cos phi factor following way:

Analog Value Cos phi Factor

<60 0,6L
60 - 100 0,6L - 1,00
101 - 120 0,99C - 0,80C

6 back to List of LAI

MPF:I/E-Qm
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MGCB, MCB
Comm object 6
Description
This functional input is used for connecting of an external device, which measures the reactive power
imported from the mains. The device is connected to the controller via an analog input (e.g. -20 .. 20mA). The
setpoint I/E-Qm meas (page 208) must be set to the ANALOG INPUT position for this case.

6 back to List of LAI

6 back to Controller objects

LAI: P
PFCtrl:AnExBPF
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This functional input is used for requesting the gen-set cos phi factor externally by an analog input. The
setpoint PF/Qctrl PtM (page 205) must be set to PF control, PF/Qctrl ANEXT (page 206) must be set
to ENABLED.
The analog value is transformed to the requested cos phi factor following way:

Analog value cos phi factor

<60 0.6L
60 .. 100 0.6L .. 1.00
101 .. 120 0.99C .. 0.80C

6 back to List of LAI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 539

 LAI: T
TestF
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This functional input is used for simulation of mains frequency in PWROVERFREQ and
PWRUNDERFREQ mode.
Value must be configured as offset to the nominal frequency in 0,01Hz resolution

6 back to List of LAI

TestP
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This functional input is used for simulation of generator active power for testing PforQ function.

6 back to List of LAI

TestQ
Related FW 3.8.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
This functional input is used for simulation of generator reactive power for testing PforQ function.

6 back to List of LAI

InteliMainsNT MGCB-MCB - 3.5.1 Global Guide 540